You are on page 1of 446

Version 1 - 31/10/03

Prisma Plus
General contents

Index
Pack wall-mount enclosures
System G
System P
Contents system G/P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
EnglishIXA.fm/1 EnglishIXA.fm/1
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
03000
03001 Modular device rail 301E21000/2, 300E21400/3, 300E21510/2, 100E21060/5,
100E21060/6
03002 Adjustable modular device rail 301E21001/4, 300E20160/3, 300E20160/5, 300E21200/3,
300E21400/3, 300E21510/2, 300E21600/2, 300E22450/3
03003 Dropped modular device rail 300E21200/3
03003 Recessed modular device rail 300E21600/2
03004 Rear modular device rail 200E23000/5, 300E21510/2, 300E21510/3, 300E21600/2,
300E22450/3
03005 45DIN rail support 300E22450/3, 300E22450/5
03006 Modular device rail, L=750mm 301E21820/2
03007 Adjustable modular device rail, L=750mm 301E21820/2
03008 Modular device rail for NSA in Pack enclosure 200E23000/5
03010 Modular device rail, L=250mm 300E21920/2, 300E21925/2, 300E21930/2
03011 Adjustable modular device rail, L=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21900/3, 300E21910/3, 300E21920/2,
300E21925/2, 300E21925/3, 300E21930/2
03030 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS-INS250 with toggle 300E20160/2, 300E21200/2, 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3
03031 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with rotary handle 300E20160/4
03032 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with motor mechanism or horizontal
plug-in NS250 with toggle
300E20160/2, 300E20160/4, 300E21200/3
03033 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed Vigi NS250 with toggle 300E20160/2, 301E21800/2
03040 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS250 with toggle 300E20160/3, 300E21200/3
03041 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS250 with rotary handle 300E20160/5
03043 Mounting plate for NS-INS250 source changeover system with rotary handles 300E21210/2, 300E21210/3
03050 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS-INS250 with toggle, W=250mm 300E21900/2, 300E21910/2
03051 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS-INS250 with rotary handle, W=250mm 300E21900/2
03070 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS630 with toggle 300E20150/2, 300E21200/2, 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3
03073 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS-INS630 with toggle 300E20150/3, 300E21200/3
03074 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS630 with rotary handle 300E20150/3
03080 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS-INS630 with toggle, W=250mm 300E21900/2, 300E21910/2
03081 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS-630 with rotary handle, W=250mm 300E21900/2
03140 Metering panel kit, 1P 201E21000/2, 301E21000/2
03141 Control panel kit 201E21000/2, 301E21000/2
03142 Metering panel kit, 3P, W=250mm 301E21000/4
03143 "Tarif jaune" mounting plate for NS-INV250 301E21001/2, 401E21001/2
03144 One-piece "Tarif jaune" mounting plate for NS-INV250, W=250mm 301E21001/5
03145 "Tarif jaune" mounting plate for NS250+INV250 301E21001/3, 401E21001/3
03146 "Tarif jaune" mounting plate for NS-INV400 301E21001/2, 301E21001/3, 401E21001/2, 401E21001/3,
401E21002/2
03147 One-piece "Tarif jaune" mounting plate for NS-INV400, W=250mm 301E21001/5
03164 20 M4 clip-nuts for DIN rails 100E21110/2
03165 20 M5 clip-nuts for DIN rails 100E21110/2
03166 20 M6 clip-nuts for DIN rails 100E21110/2
03168 Mounting plate for Tego Power 300E21510/3
03170 Slotted mounting plate, 4 modules, for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 300E21600/2, 301E21890/2
03171 Recessed slotted mounting plate, 4 modules, for wall-mount or floor-standing
enclosure
300E21510/3, 300E21600/2
03172 Recessed slotted mounting plate, 6 modules, for wall-mount or floor-standing
enclosure
200E23000/5, 300E21600/2
03173 Recessed slotted mounting plate, 9 modules, for wall-mount or floor-standing
enclosure
300E21600/2
03175 Slotted mounting plate, 4 modules, W=250mm 300E21925/3, 300E21930/2
03176 Recessed slotted mounting plate, 4 modules, W=250mm 300E21930/2
03177 Recessed slotted mounting plate, 6 modules, W=250mm 300E21930/2
03178 Recessed slotted mounting plate, 9 modules, W=250mm 300E21930/2
03180 20 M4 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates 100E21110/2
03181 20 M5 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates 100E21110/2
03182 20 M6 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates 100E21110/2
03183 20 M5 self-tapping screws for functional unit mounting 300E21600/3, 300E21930/3
03185 4 M5 hexagonal spacers, H=9mm 100E21110/3
03186 4 M5 hexagonal spacers, H=23mm 100E21110/3
03187 4 M5 hexagonal spacers, H=55mm 100E21110/3
03194 20 captive nuts for M6 hexagonal spacers 300E23220/3, 100E21110/2
03195 4 M6 hexagonal spacers, H=9mm 300E22450/3, 300E22450/5, 100E21110/3
03196 4 M6 hexagonal spacers, H=23mm 300E22450/3, 300E22450/5, 100E21110/3
03197 4 M6 hexagonal spacers, H=55mm 300E22450/3, 300E22450/5, 100E21110/3
EnglishIXA.fm/2
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
03198 4 M6 hexagonal spacers, H=25mm 100E21110/3
03199 4 M8 hexagonal spacers, H=40+10mm 100E21110/3
03202 Modular front plate, 2 modules 100E21060/6
03203 Modular front plate, 3 modules 300E21400/3, 300E21510/2, 400E21400/3, 400E21500/2,
100E21060/5, 100E21060/6
03204 Modular front plate, 4 modules 300E21400/3, 400E21400/3, 400E21400/4
03205 Modular front plate 5 modules 300E21400/3
03205 Modular front plate, 5 modules 200E23000/5, 301E21000/2, 300E21510/2, 400E21400/3,
400E21400/4, 400E21500/2
03213 Modular front plate, 3 modules, W=250mm 300E21920/2, 300E21925/2
03214 Modular front plate, 4 modules, W=250mm 300E21920/2
03216 Modular front plate, 3 modules, W=750mm 301E21820/2
03217 Modular front plate, 4 modules, W=750mm 301E21820/2
03218 Modular front plate, 5 modules, W=750mm 301E21820/2
03220 Blanking strip, L=1000mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/2
03221 4 divisible blanking plates, W=90mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/2
03230 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with toggle 301E21001/2, 300E20160/2, 401E21001/2
03231 Front plate for horizontal INS250 300E21200/2
03232 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with rotary handle 300E20160/4
03233 Front plate for horizontal plug-in NS250 with toggle 300E20160/2
03234 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with motor mechanism 300E20160/4
03235 Front plate for INS250 source changeover system with rotary handles 300E21210/3, 400E21250/2
03236 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with toggle + ammeter 300E20160/2
03237 Front plate for horizontal fixed Vigi NS250 with rotary handle 300E20160/4
03238 Front plate for horizontal fixed Vigi NS250 with toggle 301E21001/2, 300E20160/2, 401E21001/2
03239 Front plate for horizontal INS250, W=750mm 301E21800/3
03241 Front plate for 3-4 vertical Vigi NS250 devices with toggles 300E20160/3, 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5
03242 "Tarif jaune" front plate for NS-INV250 301E21001/3, 401E21001/3
03243 Front plate for 3-4 vertical NS250 devices 300E20160/3, 300E20160/5, 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5,
400E21150/7, 400E21150/9
03244 Front plate for 3-4 vertical Vigi NS250 devices with rotary handles or motor
mechanisms
300E20160/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9
03245 Front plate for vertical NS250 source changeover system with rotary handles 300E21210/2, 400E21160/5
03246 One-piece "Tarif jaune" front plate for NS-INV250 301E21001/3, 401E21001/3
03247 Front plate for INS250 complete source changeover assembly 300E21210/3, 400E21250/3
03248 Front plate for vertical INS250 301E21001/2, 300E21200/3, 401E21001/2, 400E21200/3
03249 Blanking plate for vertical NS-INS250 100E21100/2
03250 Front plate for vertical fixed NS250 with toggle, W=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21900/2
03251 Front plate for vertical fixed INS250 with toggle, W=250mm 300E21910/2
03252 Front plate for vertical fixed Vigi NS250 with toggle, W=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21900/2
03253 Front plate for vertical fixed NS250 with rotary handle, W=250mm 300E21900/2
03254 One-piece "Tarif jaune" front plate for NS-INV250, W=250mm 301E21001/5
03256 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with toggle, W=750mm 301E21800/2
03257 Front plate for horizontal fixed Vigi NS250 with toggle, W=750mm 301E21800/2
03270 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS630 with toggle 300E20150/2
03271 Front plate for horizontal INS630 300E21200/2
03273 Front plate for vertical NS630 with toggle 301E21001/3, 300E20150/3, 401E21001/3, 400E21150/3,
400E21150/5, 400E21150/9
03274 Front plate for vertical INS630 301E21001/2, 300E21200/3, 401E21001/2, 400E21200/3
03275 Front plate for vertical NS630 with rotary handle or motor mechanism 300E20150/3, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9
03276 Front plate for vertical Vigi NS630 with toggle 301E21001/3, 300E20150/3, 401E21001/3, 400E21150/3,
400E21150/5, 400E21150/9
03277 Front plate for vertical Vigi NS630 with rotary handle or motor mechanism 300E20150/3, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9
03278 "Tarif jaune" front plate for NS-INV630 301E21001/3, 401E21001/3, 401E21002/2
03279 One-piece "Tarif jaune" front plate, NS-INV630A 301E21001/3, 401E21001/3, 401E21002/2
03280 Front plate for vertical fixed NS630 with toggle, W=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21900/2
03281 Front plate for vertical fixed INS630 with toggle, W=250mm 300E21910/2
03282 Front plate for fixed Vigi NS630 with toggle, W=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21900/2
03283 Front plate for vertical NS630 with rotary handle or motor mechanism, W=250mm 300E21900/2
03284 One-piece "Tarif jaune" front plate, NS-INV400A, W=250mm 301E21001/5
03286 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS630 with toggle, W=750mm 301E21800/2
03287 Front plate for horizontal INS630, W=750mm 301E21800/3
03342 Transparent front plate, 4 modules 300E21510/2, 400E21500/2, 100E21050/2, 100E21060/6
03343 Transparent front plate, 6 modules 300E21510/3, 400E21500/3, 100E21050/2, 100E21060/6
03344 Transparent front plate, 9 modules 100E21050/2, 100E21060/6
03345 Transparent front plate, 12 modules 100E21050/2, 100E21060/6
EnglishIXA.fm/3 EnglishIXA.fm/3
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
03352 Transparent front plate, 4 modules,W=250mm 300E21925/2, 100E21050/2
03353 Transparent front plate, 6 modules,W=250mm 100E21050/2
03354 Transparent front plate, 9 modules,W=250mm 100E21050/2
03358 4 lead-sealable front plate screws 100E21100/2
03401 Modular device rail 400E21400/3, 400E21400/4, 400E21500/2, 400E21600/5,
100E21060/5, 100E21060/6
03402 Adjustable modular device rail 401E21001/4, 400E21400/3, 400E21500/2, 400E21500/3,
400E21600/5, 400E22450/3
03411 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS250 with toggle, 3P 400E21150/2
03412 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS-INS250 with toggle, 4P 400E21150/2, 400E21200/2
03413 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in NS250 with rotary handle or motor
mechanism, 3P
400E21150/4, 400E21150/6
03414 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in NS250 with rotary handle or motor
mechanism, 4P
400E21150/4, 400E21150/6
03415 Mounting plate for horizontal withdrawable NS250, 3P or 4P 400E21150/8
03417 Mounting plate for horizontal NS250 source changeover system with motor
mechanism
400E21160/3, 400E21160/4, 400E21160/5
03420 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical fixed NS-INS250 devices with toggles 400E21150/3, 400E21200/3
03421 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical withdrawable NS250 devices 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9
03422 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical fixed NS250 devices 400E21150/7
03428 Mounting plate for vertical NS-INS250 source changeover system with rotary
handles
400E21160/5, 400E21250/2, 400E21250/3
03451 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS630 with toggle 400E21150/2
03452 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS-INS630 with toggle, 4P 400E21150/2, 400E21200/2
03453 Mounting plate for horizontal NS630, 3P 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6
03454 Mounting plate for horizontal NS630, 4P 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6
03457 Mounting plate for horizontal NS630 source changeover system with motor
mechanism
400E21160/5
03458 Mounting plate for horizontal NS-INS630 source changeover system with rotary
handles
400E21160/5, 400E21250/2, 400E21250/3
03461 Mounting plate for 2 vertical NS630 or 1 vertical INS630 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9,
400E21200/3
03462 Mounting plate for horizontal withdrawable NS630, 3P or 4P 400E21150/8
03480 Mounting plate for horizontal fixed NS1600 with toggle or rotary handle, 4P 400E21130/4
03482 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NS1600 400E21130/3
03483 Mounting plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3
03484 Mounting plate for vertical fixed NT 400E21110/3
03485 One-piece "Tarif vert" mounting plate, 1250A 401E21002/2
03491 Mounting plate for horizontal NS1600 source changeover system with rotary
handles
400E21160/4
03500 Mounting plate for NW 400E21100/3
03501 Mounting plate for NS3200-INS2500 401E21002/2, 400E21120/2, 400E21210/2
03506 Measurement CT casing, lead-sealable 401E21002/4
03561 Canalis support 400E21100/2, 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
03570 Plain backplate, 36 modules 400E21600/3
03571 Slotted mounting plate, 4 modules 400E21500/3, 400E21600/4, 100E21060/4
03572 Slotted mounting plate, 6 modules 400E21600/4, 100E21060/4
03574 Slotted mounting plate, 12 modules 400E21600/4
03576 Mounting plate for Tego Power 400E21500/3
03581 2 universal angle brackets 401E21002/4, 400E21600/4, 400E22450/3, 100E21110/3
03584 2 lateral cross-members, W=400mm, for D=400mm 400E21600/2, 400E22450/3, 400E23220/3
03586 2 lateral cross-members, W=200mm, for D=600mm 400E21600/2, 400E23220/3
03587 2 longitudinal cross-members, W=650mm 400E21600/2, 400E23220/3
03590 Rear modular device rail, W=650mm 400E21600/5
03593 2 slide rails + angle brackets 400E21600/3
03595 System G adapter, W=500mm 401E21001/2, 401E21001/3, 401E21001/4, 401E21002/2,
400E21610/2
03596 System G adapter, W=250mm 400E21610/2
03611 Front plate for horizontal NS250 with toggle, 3P 400E21150/2, 400E21150/4
03612 Front plate for horizontal NS250 with toggle, 4P 400E21150/2, 400E21150/4
03613 Front plate for horizontal NS250 with rotary handle or motor mechanism, 3P 400E21150/6
03614 Front plate for horizontal NS250 with rotary handle or motor mechanism, 4P 400E21150/6
03616 Front plate for horizontal NS250 source changeover system with motor
mechanism
400E21160/5
03617 Front plate for horizontal INS250 400E21200/2
03618 Front plate for horizontal withdrawable NS250 400E21150/8
03620 Front plate for 3-4 vertical INS250 devices 400E21200/3
03651 Front plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in NS630 with toggle, 3P 400E21150/2, 400E21150/4
EnglishIXA.fm/4
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
03652 Front plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in NS630 with toggle, 4P 400E21150/2, 400E21150/4
03653 Front plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in NS630 with rotary handle or motor
mechanism, 3P
400E21150/6
03654 Front plate for horizontal fixed or plug-in NS630 with rotary handle or motor
mechanism, 4P
400E21150/6
03656 Front plate for horizontal NS630 source changeover system with motor
mechanism
400E21160/5
03657 Front plate for horizontal withdrawable NS630 400E21150/8
03658 Front plate for horizontal INS630 400E21200/2
03659 Front plate for horizontal NS-INS630 source changeover system with rotary
handles
400E21160/5, 400E21250/2
03661 Front plate for horizontal NS-INS630 complete source changeover assembly 400E21250/3
03663 Front plate for vertical 2NS630 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9
03664 Front plate for vertical fixed or plug-in Vigi 2NS630 with toggle 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/9
03665 Front plate for vertical fixed or plug-in Vigi 2NS630 with rotary handle or motor
mechanism
400E21150/7, 400E21150/9
03671 Front plate for UA or BA 400E21160/3, 400E21160/4, 400E21160/5
03687 Front plate for horizontal fixed NS1600 with toggle or rotary handle, 4P 400E21130/4
03690 Front plate for vertical fixed NS1600 400E21130/3
03691 Front plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3
03692 Front plate for vertical fixed NT 400E21110/3
03693 One-piece "Tarif jaune" front plate, 1250A, 3P 401E21002/2
03694 One-piece "Tarif jaune" front plate, 1250A, 4P 401E21002/2
03695 Front plate for horizontal NS1600 source changeover system with rotary handles 400E21160/4
03710 Front plate for withdrawable NW 400E21100/3
03711 Front plate for fixed NW 400E21100/3
03713 Front plate for INS1600, 3P 400E21210/2
03714 Front plate for INS1600, 4P 400E21210/2
03715 Front plate for INS2500, 3P or 4P 401E21002/2, 400E21210/2
03716 Front plate for NS3200 401E21002/2, 400E21120/2
03801 Plain front plate, 1 module 301E21001/2, 301E21001/3, 300E20150/3, 300E20160/2,
300E20160/3, 300E20160/5, 300E21200/2, 300E21200/3,
300E21510/2, 300E21510/3, 401E21001/2, 401E21001/3,
401E21002/2, 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7,
400E21150/9, 400E21200/3, 400E21500/2, 400E21500/3,
100E21050/2
03802 Plain front plate, 2 modules 301E21001/3, 300E20150/3, 300E20160/3, 300E20160/4,
300E20160/5, 300E21200/3, 300E21210/2, 300E21210/3,
401E21001/3, 401E21002/2, 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3,
400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9,
400E21160/5, 400E21250/2, 400E21250/3, 100E21050/2,
100E21060/4
03803 Plain front plate, 3 modules 301E21001/3, 300E20150/2, 300E20150/3, 300E21200/2,
300E21210/2, 300E21510/2, 300E22450/3, 401E21002/2,
400E21100/3, 400E21110/3, 400E21120/2, 400E21130/3,
400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9,
400E21160/5, 400E21210/2, 400E21500/2, 400E22450/3,
100E21050/2
03804 Plain front plate, 4 modules 301E21001/3, 300E20150/3, 300E21510/3, 401E21002/2,
400E21100/3, 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3, 400E21150/3,
400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21150/9, 400E21210/2,
400E21500/3, 100E21050/2, 100E21060/4
03805 Plain front plate, 5 modules 301E21001/3, 300E22450/3, 400E21100/3, 400E21110/3,
400E21120/2, 400E21130/3, 400E22450/3, 100E21050/2
03806 Plain front plate, 6 modules 300E21200/3, 300E22450/3, 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3,
400E22450/3, 100E21050/2
03807 Plain front plate, 9 modules 100E21050/2
03808 Plain front plate, 12 modules 401E21002/4, 100E21050/2
03811 Plain front plate, 1 module, W=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21900/2, 300E21920/2, 300E21925/2,
100E21050/2
03812 Plain front plate, 2 modules, W=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21900/2, 300E21910/2, 100E21050/2
03813 Plain front plate, 3 modules, W=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21925/2, 100E21050/2
03814 Plain front plate, 4 modules, W=250mm 301E21001/5, 300E21925/3, 100E21050/2
03815 Plain front plate, 5 modules, W=250mm 100E21050/2
03816 Plain front plate, 6 modules, W=250mm 100E21050/2
03817 Plain front plate, 9 modules, W=250mm 100E21050/2
03851 Plain front plate, 1 module, W=750mm 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3, 100E21050/2
03853 Plain front plate, 3 modules, W=750mm 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3, 301E21890/2, 100E21050/2
03854 Plain front plate, 4 modules, W=750mm 301E21890/2, 100E21050/2
03856 Plain front plate, 6 modules, W=750mm 301E21890/2, 100E21050/2
03890 Front plate for fan or grill 100E23010/2
EnglishIXA.fm/5 EnglishIXA.fm/5
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
03891 IP30 ventilated front plate, 1 module 100E23010/3
03895 IP30 ventilated front plate, 3 modules 100E23010/3
03900 Plain mounting plate for 72x72mm meter 100E21060/2
03901 Plain mounting plate for 96x96mm meter 100E21060/2
03902 Mounting plate with cut-out for 72x72mm meter 100E21060/2
03903 Mounting plate with cut-out for 96x96mm meter 100E21060/2
03904 Front plate with cut-outs for meter mounting plates 100E21060/2
03907 Blanking plate, 72x72mm 100E21060/3
03908 Blanking plate, 96x96mm, for meters 100E21060/3
03910 Front plate with cut-outs for 72x72mm meters 100E21060/3
03911 Front plate with cut-outs for 96x96mm meters 100E21060/3, 100E21060/4
03912 Front plate with cut-outs for 144x144mm + 4 72x72mm meters 100E21060/3
03914 Front plate with holes for 22mm dia. pushbuttons and lamps 100E21060/3
03916 Front plate for DMB 300 100E21060/4
03917 Front plate for DMC 300 100E21060/4
03918 Front plate for Powerlogic CM3000-4000 100E21060/4
03928 Visor for human/switchboard interface (HSI) 100E21060/2
03930 Mounting plate for Vigilohm XM200-300C 100E21060/5
03931 Mounting plate for Vigilohm XML308-316 100E21060/5
03932 Front plate for Vigilohm XM200-300C 100E21060/5
03933 Front plate for Vigilohm XML308-316 100E21060/5
03934 Front plate for Vigilohm TR22A+6 72x72mm meters 100E21060/5
03970 Door with cut-outs for power factor correction equipment, W=650mm 450E25000/4
03976 Mounting plate for S or H power factor correction module 450E25000/3
03977 Mounting plate for SAH power factor correction module 450E25000/3
04000
04004 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 80A, 1 row 200E23000/6, 100E22100/2
04008 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 63A, 1/2 row 200E23000/6, 100E22100/2
04012 Multiclip distribution block, 2P, 200A, 1 row 100E22100/3
04013 Multiclip distribution block, 3P, 200A, 1 row 100E22100/3
04014 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 200A, 1 row 100E22100/3
04018 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 160A, 1/2 row 100E22100/3
04021 Powerclip busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block 300E22010/3, 100E22100/3, 100E22100/4
04024 Duct busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block 300E22030/3, 100E22100/3
04026 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 200A, W=800mm 100E22100/4
04029 Rear busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block 300E22020/3, 100E22100/3, 100E22100/4
04031 Polybloc distribution block, 1P, 160A 200E23000/4, 300E22040/3
04033 Polybloc distribution block, 3P, 250A 301E21001/2, 301E21001/4, 301E21001/5, 300E20160/2,
300E20160/3, 300E20160/4, 300E20160/5, 300E21200/2,
300E21200/3, 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3, 300E21900/3,
300E21910/3, 300E22040/2, 401E21001/2, 401E21001/4
04034 Polybloc distribution block, 4P, 250A 301E21001/2, 301E21001/4, 301E21001/5, 300E20160/2,
300E20160/3, 300E20160/4, 300E20160/5, 300E21200/2,
300E21200/3, 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3, 300E21900/3,
300E21910/3, 300E22040/2, 401E21001/2, 401E21001/4
04037 4 Cu spacers for Polybloc 250A distribution block 301E21001/4, 301E21001/5, 300E21200/3, 401E21001/4
04045 Distribloc 125 200E23000/4, 100E22010/2
04046 Distribloc 160+connections 200E23000/4, 100E22010/2
04047 4 NG-INS125 connections for Distribloc 100E22010/3
04052 Multi-stage distribution block, 4P, 160A 100E22050/2
04053 Multi-stage distribution block, 4P, 250A 100E22050/2
04054 Multi-stage distribution block, 4P, 400A 100E22050/2
04055 Multi-stage distribution block, 4P, 630A 100E22050/2
04060 Power supply block for horizontal NS250 301E21001/2, 300E20160/2, 300E21200/2, 301E21800/2,
301E21800/3, 300E22010/3
04061 Universal power supply block, 250A 301E21001/4, 301E21001/5, 300E20160/2, 300E20160/3,
300E20160/4, 300E20160/5, 300E21200/3, 300E21900/3,
300E21910/3, 300E22010/3, 401E21001/2, 401E21001/4
04062 Connection between vertical NS-INS250 and universal power supply block 300E20160/3, 300E20160/5, 300E21200/3, 300E22010/3
04064 Connection between vertical NS-INS250 in duct and universal power supply block 301E21001/5, 300E21900/3, 300E21910/3, 300E22010/3
04065 Connection between vertical NS-INS250 in duct and busbars 301E21001/6, 300E21900/3, 300E21910/3
04066 Incoming connection block for NS-INS250 supplied via the top 300E20160/2, 300E21200/2, 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3
04067 Incoming connection block for NS-INS250 supplied via the bottom 300E20160/2, 300E21200/2, 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3
04070 Power supply block for horizontal NS400 300E20150/2, 300E21200/2, 301E21800/2, 300E22010/3
04071 Power supply block for horizontal NS630 300E20150/2, 300E21200/2, 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3,
300E22010/3
EnglishIXA.fm/6
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
04073 Connection between vertical NS-INS400-630 in duct and universal power supply
block
301E21001/5, 300E21900/3, 300E21910/3, 300E22010/3
04074 Universal power supply block, 400-630A 301E21001/4, 301E21001/5, 300E20150/3, 300E21200/3,
300E21900/3, 300E21910/3, 300E22010/3, 401E21001/4
04075 Connection between vertical NS-INS630 in duct and busbars 301E21001/6, 300E21900/3, 300E21910/3
04076 In-duct incoming connection block for NS630 300E20150/2, 301E21800/2, 301E21800/3
04103 Powerclip busbars, 125A, 3P, L=450mm 200E23000/4, 300E22010/2
04104 Powerclip busbars, 125A, 4P, L=450mm 200E23000/4, 300E22010/2
04107 Powerclip busbars, 125A, 3P, L=750mm 200E23000/4, 300E22010/2
04108 Powerclip busbars, 125A, 4P, L=750mm 200E23000/4, 300E22010/2
04111 Powerclip busbars, 160A, 3P, L=1000mm 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04112 Powerclip busbars, 250A, 3P, L=1000mm 300E22010/3
04113 Powerclip busbars, 400A, 3P, L=1000mm 300E22010/3
04114 Powerclip busbars, 630A, 3P, L=1000mm 300E22010/3
04116 Powerclip busbars, 160A, 3P, L=1400mm 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04117 Powerclip busbars, 250A, 3P, L=1400mm 300E22010/3
04118 Powerclip busbars, 400A, 3P, L=1400mm 300E22010/3
04119 Powerclip busbars, 630A, 3P, L=1400mm 300E22010/3
04121 Powerclip busbars, 160A, 4P, L=1000mm 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04122 Powerclip busbars, 250A, 4P, L=1000mm 300E22010/3
04123 Powerclip busbars, 400A, 4P, L=1000mm 300E22010/3
04124 Powerclip busbars, 630A, 4P, L=1000mm 300E22010/3
04126 Powerclip busbars, 160A, 4P, L=1400mm 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04127 Powerclip busbars, 250A, 4P, L=1400mm 300E22010/3
04128 Powerclip busbars, 400A, 4P, L=1400mm 300E22010/3
04129 Powerclip busbars, 630A, 4P, L=1400mm 300E22010/3
04145 4 connections, 125A 200E23000/4, 300E22010/2, 300E22020/3
04146 4 connections 160 A 300E22020/3
04146 4 connections, 160A 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04150 8 IPxxB covers for Powerclip busbars 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04151 12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 6mm + 10mm terminals 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04152 12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 16mm terminals 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04155 Additional 35mm block, 3P 300E22010/3, 300E22040/3
04156 Additional 35mm block, 4P 300E22010/3, 300E22040/3
04158 20 screws for Powerclip busbars 200E23000/4, 300E22010/3
04161 4 bars with threaded holes, 160A, L=1000mm 300E22020/3, 300E22030/3
04162 4 bars with threaded holes, 250A, L=1000mm 300E22020/3, 300E22030/3
04163 4 bars with threaded holes, 400A, L=1000mm 300E22020/3, 300E22030/3
04171 4 bars with threaded holes, 160A, L=1400mm 300E22020/3, 300E22030/3
04172 4 bars with threaded holes, 250A, L=1400mm 300E22020/3, 300E22030/3
04173 4 bars with threaded holes, 400A, L=1400mm 300E22020/3, 300E22030/3
04174 4 bars with threaded holes, 630A, L=1400mm 300E22030/3
04190 4 copper angle brackets, 250A 300E22020/3
04191 Rear busbar support 300E22020/3
04192 Multi-stage bar support for duct 300E22030/3
04194 20 M6x20mm bolts for 5mm bars 300E22020/3, 300E22030/3
04195 40 M6x16mm screws for bars with threaded holes, less than 630A 300E22020/3, 300E22030/3
04197 Busbar power supply barrier, 630A 300E22030/3
04198 Rear busbar barrier 300E22020/3
04200 Earth bar, 24 modules 200E23000/6, 300E22450/4, 400E22450/4
04201 Earth bar for direct earth blocks, 12x3mm 200E23000/6, 300E22450/4, 400E22450/4
04202 2 earth bars, 12 modules 300E22450/4, 400E22450/4
04203 Auxiliary bus duct, 4P 100E21060/7
04205 2 supports for earth bar on DIN rail 300E22450/5, 400E22450/4
04206 Fixing brackets for vertical earth bar in wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure,
H=15mm
200E23000/6, 300E22450/3, 300E22450/5, 300E22450/6
04207 Fixing brackets for vertical earth bar in wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure,
H=45mm
300E22450/3, 300E22450/5, 300E22450/6
04208 Fixing brackets for vertical earth bar in wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure,
H=80mm
300E22450/3, 300E22450/5, 300E22450/6
04210 Kit for neutral bar 300E22450/7, 400E22450/5
04214 4 earth blocks with 12x4mm spring terminals 200E23000/6, 300E22450/4, 400E22450/4
04215 4 earth blocks with 3x16mm spring terminals 200E23000/6, 300E22450/4, 400E22450/4
04220 Mounting plate for terminal block and earth bar in duct 300E22450/2, 300E22450/6
04223 Mounting plate with 4 vertical DIN rails for terminal blocks 300E22450/3, 300E22450/6
04224 5 Practic raisers 100E21110/2
EnglishIXA.fm/7 EnglishIXA.fm/7
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
04226 Modular device rail, L=1600mm 300E21600/2, 300E21930/2, 300E22450/2, 400E21600/5,
400E22450/3
04228 Terminal block for auxiliaries 100E21060/7, 100E22600/5
04229 20 voltage tap-offs for tab connectors, M10 400E22400/3
04233 Trunking for door, L=2000mm 100E21060/7, 100E22600/5
04234 10 grommets for wiring through front 100E21060/7, 100E22600/5
04235 Flexible trunking for wiring to door 100E21060/7, 100E22600/5
04239 12 horizontal cable straps 200E23000/6, 100E22600/3
04243 4 covers for horizontal cable straps 200E23000/6, 100E22600/3
04255 12 horizontal trunking supports 200E23000/6, 100E22600/4
04257 4 horizontal trunking sections, L=450mm, + supports 200E23000/6, 100E22600/5
04262 12 vertical cable straps 100E22600/2
04263 2 covers for vertical cable straps, L=1000mm 100E22600/2
04264 12 vertical cable straps, System G 100E22600/2
04265 12 vertical trunking supports 100E22600/4
04267 Vertical trunking, L=2000mm 100E22600/5
04330 Vertical partition 300E22900/3
04331 Horizontal partition for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 300E22900/2
04332 Horizontal partition for duct 300E22900/2
04336 Horizontal partition for floor-standing enclosure, W=850mm 301E23800/5
04403 Polypact for fixed devices with toggles, 3P 400E21150/3, 400E22500/2
04404 Polypact for fixed devices with toggles, 4P 400E21150/3, 400E21200/3, 400E22500/2
04405 Polypact for fixed or plug-in devices with flexible connection, 3P 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E22500/2
04406 Polypact for fixed or plug-in devices with flexible connection, 4P 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E22500/2
04407 Polypact for fixed or plug-in devices without connection, 3P 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E22500/2
04408 Polypact for fixed or plug-in devices without connection, 4P 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21200/3,
400E22500/2
04423 250A connection for horizontal fixed NS250 with toggle, 3P 400E21150/2
04424 250A connection for horizontal fixed NS250 with toggle, 4P 400E21150/2
04425 Connection transfer assembly for fixed NS250 with toggle, 3P 400E21150/2
04426 Connection transfer assembly for fixed NS250 with toggle, 4P 400E21150/2
04427 250A connection for horizontal NS-INS250, 3P 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6, 400E21150/8, 400E21200/2
04428 250A connection for horizontal NS-INS250, 4P 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6, 400E21150/8, 400E21200/2
04429 Connection transfer assembly, 250A, 3P 400E21150/2, 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6, 400E21150/8
04430 Connection transfer assembly, 250A, 4P 400E21150/2, 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6, 400E21150/8
04443 Connection for horizontal NS-INV250 301E21001/2, 401E21001/2
04444 Connection for vertical NS-INV250 + horizontal Vigi 301E21001/2, 401E21001/2
04445 Connection for horizontal NS250 and INV400 301E21001/2, 401E21001/2
04446 Connection for horizontal Vigi NS250 and INV400 301E21001/2, 401E21001/2
04453 630A connection for horizontal fixed NS630 with toggle, 3P 400E21150/2
04454 630A connection for horizontal fixed NS630 with toggle, 4P 400E21150/2
04455 Connection transfer assembly for fixed NS630 with toggle, 3P 400E21150/2
04456 Connection transfer assembly for fixed NS630 with toggle, 4P 400E21150/2
04457 630A connection for horizontal NS-INS630, 3P 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6, 400E21150/8, 400E21200/2
04458 630A connection for horizontal NS-INS630, 4P 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6, 400E21150/8, 400E21200/2
04459 Connection transfer assembly, 630A, 3P 400E21150/2, 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6, 400E21150/8
04460 Connection transfer assembly, 630A, 4P 400E21150/2, 400E21150/4, 400E21150/6, 400E21150/8
04473 1000A connection for horizontal fixed NS with toggle or rotary handle, 3P 400E21130/4
04474 1000A connection for horizontal fixed NS with toggle or rotary handle, 4P 400E21130/4
04475 1250A connection for vertical fixed NT, 3P 400E21110/3
04476 1250A connection for vertical fixed NT, 4P 400E21110/3
04477 1250A connection for vertical withdrawable NS1600-NT, 3P 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3
04478 1250A connection for vertical withdrawable NS1600-NT, 4P 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3
04481 1600A connection for INS1600, 3P 400E21210/2
04482 1600A connection for INS1600, 4P 400E21210/2
04483 Connection transfer assembly for horizontal NS1600, 3P 400E21130/4
04484 Connection transfer assembly for horizontal NS1600, 4P 400E21130/4
04485 1250A connection for vertical fixed NS1600, 3P 401E21002/3, 400E21130/3
04486 1250A connection for vertical fixed NS1600, 4P 401E21002/3, 400E21130/3
04487 1600A connection for vertical fixed NS1600, 3P 400E21130/3
04488 1600A connection for vertical fixed NS1600, 4P 400E21130/3
04489 1600A connection for vertical fixed NT, 3P 400E21110/3
04490 1600A connection for vertical fixed NT, 4P 400E21110/3
04491 1600A connection for vertical withdrawable NS1600-NT, 3P 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3
04492 1600A connection for vertical withdrawable NS1600-NT, 4P 400E21110/3, 400E21130/3
EnglishIXA.fm/8
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
04502 Linergy vertical busbar, 630A 400E22210/2, 400E22220/2, 400E22350/2
04503 Linergy vertical busbar, 800A 400E22210/2, 400E22220/2, 400E22350/2
04504 Linergy vertical busbar, 1000A 400E22210/2, 400E22220/2
04505 Linergy vertical busbar, 1250A 400E22210/2, 400E22220/2
04506 Linergy vertical busbar, 1600A 400E22210/2, 400E22220/2
04512 PE bar with holes, 25x5mm 400E22350/2
04515 PE bar with holes, 50x5mm 400E22350/2
04516 Vertical busbar with holes, 60x5mm 400E22310/2, 400E22320/2
04518 Vertical busbar with holes, 80x5mm 400E22310/2, 400E22320/2
04525 Vertical busbar with holes, 50x10mm 400E22310/3, 400E22320/3
04526 Vertical busbar with holes, 60x10mm 400E22310/3, 400E22320/3
04528 Vertical busbar with holes, 80x10mm 400E22310/3, 400E22320/3
04536 Horizontal busbar without holes, 60x5mm 400E22100/2
04538 Horizontal busbar without holes, 80x5mm 400E22100/2
04545 Horizontal busbar without holes, 50x10mm 400E22100/3
04546 Horizontal busbar without holes, 60x10mm 400E22100/3
04548 Horizontal busbar without holes, 80x10mm 400E22100/3
04550 Horizontal busbar without holes, 100x10mm 400E22100/3
04634 1000A connection plate for 5mm horizontal bar to lateral Linergy busbar 400E22210/3
04635 1600A connection plate for 5mm horizontal bar to lateral Linergy busbar 400E22210/3, 400E22220/3, 400E22320/2
04636 1600A connection plate for 10mm horizontal bar to lateral Linergy busbar 400E22210/3, 400E22220/3, 400E22310/3, 400E22320/2,
400E22320/3
04637 3200A connection plate for 10mm horizontal bars to vertical flat bar 400E22310/3
04640 Joint for 50/60mm horizontal busbars 400E22100/2, 400E22100/3
04641 Joint for 80/100mm horizontal busbars 400E22100/2, 400E22100/3
04642 Mounting hardware for joint > 80mm 400E22210/3, 400E22220/3, 400E22310/3, 400E22320/2,
400E22320/3
04651 Support for lateral vertical Linergy busbars 400E22210/3
04652 Support for rear vertical Linergy busbars 400E22220/2
04653 Support for rear vertical 5/10mm busbars 400E22320/2, 400E22320/3
04656 Linergy vertical PEN kit 400E22360/2
04657 3 Linergy vertical PE supports 400E22350/2
04661 Fixed support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars 400E22310/2, 400E22310/3
04662 Free support for 5/10mm busbars 401E21002/3, 401E21002/4, 400E21100/3, 400E21110/3,
400E21120/2, 400E21130/3, 400E21210/2, 400E22100/2,
400E22100/3, 400E22310/2, 400E22310/3, 400E22320/2,
400E22320/3
04663 Bottom support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars 400E22310/2, 400E22310/3
04664 Support for 5/10mm horizontal busbars 400E22100/2, 400E22100/3
04667 2 horizontal PE supports 400E22350/2
04669 100 5mm mounting chocks for busbars 400E22320/2, 400E22320/3, 400E22400/3
04671 Support mounting hardware for bars > 80mm 400E22100/3
04672 2 connection plates for horizontal/vertical PE bars 400E22350/2
04691 Spacing rods for edgewise bars 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04693 Connection support, 70mm between centres 401E21002/2, 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2, 400E21210/2
04694 Connection support, 115mm between centres 401E21002/4, 400E21100/2, 400E21120/2
04703 Canalis interface, 1600A, 3P 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04704 Canalis interface, 1600A, 4P 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04711 Canalis connection for front-connected NS-NT, 3P 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04712 Canalis connection for front-connected NS-NT, 4P 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04713 Canalis connection for rear-connected NS-NT, 3P 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04714 Canalis connection for rear-connected NS-NT, 4P 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04715 Canalis connection, 1600A, NW, 3P 400E21100/2
04716 Canalis connection, 1600A, NW, 4P 400E21100/2
04725 Canalis connection, 2500A, NW, 3P 400E21100/2
04726 Canalis connection, 2500A, NW, 4P 400E21100/2
04735 Canalis connection, 3200A, NW, 3P 400E21100/2
04736 Canalis connection, 3200A, NW, 4P 400E21100/2
04742 Insulated flexible bar 20x2mm, L=1800mm 100E22500/2
04743 Insulated flexible bar 20x3mm, L=1800mm 100E22500/2
04746 Insulated flexible bar 24x5mm, L=1800mm 100E22500/2
04751 Insulated flexible bar 32x5mm, L=1800mm 100E22500/2
04752 Insulated flexible bar 32x6mm, L=1800mm 100E22500/2
04753 Insulated flexible bar 32x8mm, L=1800mm 100E22500/2
04759 20 M8 torque nuts 400E22400/3
04766 20 bolts for lug connection to Linergy busbars 400E22230/2
EnglishIXA.fm/9 EnglishIXA.fm/9
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
04767 20 bolts for bar connection to Linergy busbars 400E22230/2
04772 20 washers for insulated flexible bars, diameter=20mm 400E22230/2, 400E22400/2
04773 20 washers for insulated flexible bars, diameter=24mm 400E22230/2, 400E22400/2
04774 20 washers for insulated flexible bars, diameter=28mm 400E22230/2, 400E22400/2
04782 20 bolts for bars, M8x20mm 400E22400/2
04783 20 bolts for bars, M8x25mm 400E22400/2
04784 20 bolts for bars, M8x30mm 400E22400/2
04785 20 bolts for bars, M8x35mm 400E22400/2
04786 20 bolts for bars, M8x40mm 400E22400/2
04787 20 bolts for bars, M8x45mm 400E22400/2
04788 20 bolts for bars, M8x50mm 400E22400/2
04794 12 Linergy markers 400E22230/3
04809 Polypact tooth-caps 400E21150/3, 400E21150/5, 400E21150/7, 400E21200/3,
400E22500/3
04842 Connection cover for horizontal fixed NS1600 400E21130/4
04844 Rear connection cover for horizontal fixed NS1600 400E21130/4
04851 Front connection cover for vertical fixed NS1600 400E21130/2
04852 Front connection cover for vertical NS1600-NT 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04853 Rear connection cover for vertical fixed NS1600 400E21130/2
04854 Rear connection cover for vertical NS1600-NT 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04861 Front connection cover for NW 400E21100/2
04863 Rear connection cover for NW 400E21100/2
04871 Canalis cover 400E21100/2, 400E21110/2, 400E21130/2
04901 Form 3 horizontal partition 400F22910/3
04902 Form 3 horizontal partition, W=400mm 400F22910/3
04911 Inter-cubicle partition, D=400mm 400E22930/2, 450E25000/5
04913 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=300mm, D=400mm 400E22900/5
04914 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=400mm, D=400mm 400E22900/5
04916 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=650mm, D=400mm 400E22900/5
04918 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=800mm, D=400mm 400E22900/5
04921 Form 2 front barrier for lateral vertical busbars 400E22900/4
04922 Form 2 side barrier for lateral vertical busbars 400E22900/4
04923 Front barrier for NS-INV2500 connection 401E21002/2
04924 Form 2 restoration kit for side barrier cut-out 400E22900/5
04926 Cover for connection to vertical device > 800A, W=650mm 401E21002/3, 400E21100/3, 400E21110/3, 400E21120/2,
400E21130/3, 400E21210/2
04927 Additional cover for connection, L=650mm, D=600mm 400E21100/3, 400E21120/2
04931 Inter-cubicle partition, D=600mm 400E22930/2, 450E25000/5
04933 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=300mm, D=600mm 400E22900/5
04934 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=400mm, D=600mm 400E22900/5
04936 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=650mm, D=600mm 400E22900/5
04938 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=800mm, D=600mm 400E22900/5
04943 Rear support for Form 3 partition 400F22910/3
04944 Rear support for Form 3 partition, W=400mm 400F22910/3
04955 Form 3 vertical partition for rear connection, 3 or 4 modules 400F22910/3
04956 Form 3 vertical partition for rear connection, 5 or 6 modules 400F22910/3
08000
08002 Surface-mount Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 2 rows 200E23000/3
08003 Surface-mount Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 3 rows 200E23000/3
08004 Surface-mount Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 4 rows 200E23000/3
08005 Surface-mount Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 5 rows 200E23000/3
08006 Surface-mount Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 6 rows 200E23000/3
08012 Pack extension enclosure, 2 rows 201E21000/2
08082 Plain door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 2 rows 201E21000/2, 200E23000/3
08083 Plain door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 3 rows 200E23000/3
08084 Plain door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 4 rows 200E23000/3
08085 Plain door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 5 rows 200E23000/3
08086 Plain door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 6 rows 200E23000/3
08092 Transparent door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 2 rows 201E21000/2, 200E23000/3
08093 Transparent door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 3 rows 200E23000/3
08094 Transparent door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 4 rows 200E23000/3
08095 Transparent door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 5 rows 200E23000/3
08096 Transparent door for Pack enclosure, W=550mm, 6 rows 200E23000/3
08102 Wall-mount enclosure, W=600mm, 6 modules 300E23010/2
08103 Wall-mount enclosure, W=600mm, 9 modules 300E23010/2
EnglishIXA.fm/10
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
08104 Wall-mount enclosure, W=600mm, 12 modules 300E23010/2
08105 Wall-mount enclosure, W=600mm, 15 modules 300E23010/2
08106 Wall-mount enclosure, W=600mm, 18 modules 300E23010/2
08107 Wall-mount enclosure, W=600mm, 21 modules 300E23010/2
08108 Wall-mount enclosure, W=600mm, 24 modules 300E23010/2
08109 Wall-mount enclosure, W=600mm, 27 modules 300E23010/2
08122 Plain door for wall-mount enclosure, 6 modules 300E23010/2
08123 Plain door for wall-mount enclosure, 9 modules 300E23010/2
08124 Plain door for wall-mount enclosure, 12 modules 300E23010/2
08125 Plain door for wall-mount enclosure, 15 modules 300E23010/2
08126 Plain door for wall-mount enclosure, 18 modules 300E23010/2
08127 Plain door for wall-mount enclosure, 21 modules 300E23010/2
08128 Plain door for wall-mount enclosure, 24 modules 300E23010/2
08132 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure, 6 modules 300E23010/2
08133 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure, 9 modules 300E23010/2
08134 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure, 12 modules 300E23010/2
08135 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure, 15 modules 300E23010/2
08136 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure, 18 modules 300E23010/2
08137 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure, 21 modules 300E23010/2
08138 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure, 24 modules 300E23010/2
08172 Duct for wall-mount enclosure, W=300mm, 6 modules 300E23010/2
08173 Duct for wall-mount enclosure, W=300mm, 9 modules 300E23010/2
08174 Duct for wall-mount enclosure, W=300mm, 12 modules 300E23010/2
08175 Duct for wall-mount enclosure, W=300mm, 15 modules 300E23010/2
08176 Duct for wall-mount enclosure, W=300mm, 18 modules 300E23010/2
08177 Duct for wall-mount enclosure, W=300mm, 21 modules 300E23010/2
08178 Duct for wall-mount enclosure, W=300mm, 24 modules 300E23010/2
08179 Duct for wall-mount enclosure, W=300mm, 27 modules 300E23010/2
08182 Door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 6 modules 300E23010/2
08183 Door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 9 modules 300E23010/2
08184 Door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 12 modules 300E23010/2
08185 Door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 15 modules 300E23010/2
08186 Door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 18 modules 300E23010/2
08187 Door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 21 modules 300E23010/2
08188 Door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 24 modules 300E23010/2
08197 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 21 modules 300E23010/2
08198 Transparent door for wall-mount enclosure duct, 24 modules 300E23010/2
08202 Floor-standing enclosure, W=600mm, 27 modules 300E23010/4
08203 Floor-standing enclosure, W=600mm, 30 modules 300E23010/4
08204 Floor-standing enclosure, W=600mm, 33 modules 300E23010/4
08212 Floor-standing enclosure extension, W=600mm, 27 modules 300E23010/4
08213 Floor-standing enclosure extension, W=600mm, 30 modules 300E23010/4
08214 Floor-standing enclosure extension, W=600mm, 33 modules 300E23010/4
08222 Plain door for wall-mount and floor-standing enclosure, 27 modules 300E23010/2, 300E23010/4
08223 Plain door for floor-standing enclosure, 30 modules 300E23010/4
08224 Plain door for floor-standing enclosure, 33 modules 300E23010/4
08232 Transparent door for wall-mount and floor-standing enclosure, 27 modules 300E23010/2, 300E23010/4
08233 Transparent door for floor-standing enclosure, 30 modules 300E23010/4
08234 Transparent door for floor-standing enclosure, 33 modules 300E23010/4
08244 Floor-standing enclosure, W=850mm, 33 modules 301E23800/2
08264 Transparent door for floor-standing enclosure, W=850mm, 33 modules 301E23800/2
08272 Duct for floor-standing enclosure, W=300mm, 27 modules 300E23010/4
08273 Duct for floor-standing enclosure, W=300mm, 30 modules 300E23010/4
08274 Duct for floor-standing enclosure, W=300mm, 33 modules 300E23010/4
08282 Door for wall-mount and floor-standing enclosure duct, 27 modules 300E23010/2, 300E23010/4
08283 Door for floor-standing enclosure duct, 30 modules 300E23010/4
08284 Door for floor-standing enclosure duct, 33 modules 300E23010/4
08292 Transparent door for wall-mount and floor-standing enclosure duct, 27 modules 300E23010/2, 300E23010/4
08293 Transparent door for floor-standing enclosure duct, 30 modules 300E23010/4
08294 Transparent door for floor-standing enclosure duct, 33 modules 300E23010/4
08302 IP55 enclosure, 7 modules 300E23110/2
08303 IP55 enclosure, 11 modules 300E23110/2, 300E23110/3
08304 IP55 enclosure, 15 modules 300E23110/2, 300E23110/3
08305 IP55 enclosure, 19 modules 300E23110/2
08306 IP55 enclosure, 23 modules 300E23110/2
EnglishIXA.fm/11 EnglishIXA.fm/11
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
08307 IP55 enclosure, 27 modules 300E23110/2
08309 IP55 enclosure, 33 modules 300E23110/2
08311 IP55 enclosure, W=850mm, 33 modules 301E23800/4
08312 IP55 enclosure extension, 7 modules 300E23110/2
08313 IP55 enclosure extension, 11 modules 300E23110/2, 300E23110/3
08314 IP55 enclosure extension, 15 modules 300E23110/2
08315 IP55 enclosure extension, 19 modules 300E23110/2
08316 IP55 enclosure extension, 23 modules 300E23110/2
08317 IP55 enclosure extension, 27 modules 300E23110/2
08319 IP55 enclosure extension, 33 modules 300E23110/2
08322 IP55 plain door, 7 modules 300E23110/2
08323 IP55 plain door, 11 modules 300E23110/2
08324 IP55 plain door, 15 modules 300E23110/2
08325 IP55 plain door, 19 modules 300E23110/2
08326 IP55 plain door, 23 modules 300E23110/2
08327 IP55 plain door, 27 modules 300E23110/2
08329 IP55 plain door, 33 modules 300E23110/2
08332 IP55 transparent door, 7 modules 300E23110/2
08333 IP55 transparent door, 11 modules 300E23110/2
08334 IP55 transparent door, 15 modules 300E23110/2
08335 IP55 transparent door, 19 modules 300E23110/2
08336 IP55 transparent door, 23 modules 300E23110/2
08337 IP55 transparent door, 27 modules 300E23110/2
08339 IP55 transparent door, 33 modules 300E23110/2
08340 IP55 transparent door, W=850mm, 33 modules 301E23800/4
08342 IP55 duct, W=300mm, 7 modules 300E23110/2
08343 IP55 duct, W=300mm, 11 modules 300E23110/2
08344 IP55 duct, W=300mm, 15 modules 300E23110/2, 300E23110/3
08345 IP55 duct, W=300mm, 19 modules 300E23110/2
08346 IP55 duct, W=300mm, 23 modules 300E23110/2
08347 IP55 duct, W=300mm, 27 modules 300E23110/2
08349 IP55 duct, W=300mm, 33 modules 300E23110/2
08352 IP55 side panels, 7 modules 300E23110/2
08353 IP55 side panels, 11 modules 300E23110/2, 300E23110/3
08354 IP55 side panels, 15 modules 300E23110/2
08355 IP55 side panels, 19 modules 300E23110/2
08356 IP55 side panels, 23 modules 300E23110/2
08357 IP55 side panels, 27 modules 300E23110/2
08359 IP55 side panels, 33 modules 300E23110/2
08362 IP55 side panels with cut-outs, 7 modules 300E23110/4
08363 IP55 side panels with cut-outs, 11 modules 300E23110/4
08364 IP55 side panels with cut-outs, 15 modules 300E23110/4
08365 IP55 side panels with cut-outs, 19 modules 300E23110/4
08366 IP55 side panels with cut-outs, 23 modules 300E23110/4
08367 IP55 side panels with cut-outs, 27 modules 300E23110/4
08369 IP55 side panels with cut-outs, 33 modules 300E23110/4
08371 Top and bottom plates, W=600mm 300E23110/2, 300E23110/3
08372 Top and bottom plates, W=300mm 300E23110/2, 300E23110/3
08374 IP55 4-module partial plain door for 11-27 module enclosures 300E23110/4
08375 IP55 6-module partial plain door for 33-module enclosures 300E23110/4
08376 IP55 4-module partial door with cut-outs for 11-27 module enclosures 300E23110/4
08377 IP55 6-module partial door with cut-outs for 33-module enclosures 300E23110/4
08378 IP55 4-module partial TEGO door for 11-27 module enclosures 300E23110/4
08379 IP55 6-module partial TEGO door for 33-module enclosures 300E23110/4
08381 IP55 horizontal/vertical combination kit 300E23110/3
08382 IP55 L combination kit 300E23110/3
08383 IP55 square combination kit 300E23110/3
08386 Canopy for IP55 enclosures, W=600mm 300E23120/3
08387 Canopy for IP55 duct, W=300mm 300E23120/3
08391 IP55 mounting upright 300E23110/3, 300E23120/2
08392 IP55 plinth gusset 300E23120/2
08393 IP55 plinth cover panels, W=600mm 300E23120/2
08394 IP55 plinth cover panels, W=300mm 300E23120/2
08395 Pole-mount kit for enclosures 300E23120/3
08396 2 IP55 lifting rings 300E23120/3
EnglishIXA.fm/12
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
08403 Framework, W=300mm, D=400mm 400E23100/2
08404 Framework, W=400mm, D=400mm 400E23100/2
08406 Framework, W=650mm, D=400mm 400E23100/2
08407 Framework, W=650+150mm, D=400mm 400E23100/2
08408 Framework, W=800mm, D=400mm 400E23100/2
08433 IP30 plain roof, W=300mm, D=400mm 400E23100/5
08434 IP30 plain roof, W=400mm, D=400mm 400E23100/5
08436 IP30 plain roof, W=650mm, D=400mm 400E23100/5
08438 IP30 plain roof, W=800mm, D=400mm 400E23100/5
08453 IP55 plain roof, W=300mm, D=400mm 400E23100/7
08454 IP55 plain roof, W=400mm, D=400mm 400E23100/7
08456 IP55 plain roof, W=650mm, D=400mm 400E23100/7
08458 IP55 plain roof, W=800mm, D=400mm 400E23100/7
08476 IP30 ventilated roof, W=650mm, D=400mm 450E25000/4, 100E23010/3
08483 IP55 plain gland plate, W=300mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08484 IP55 plain gland plate, W=400mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08486 IP55 plain gland plate, W=650mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08487 IP55 plain gland plate, W=650+150mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08488 IP55 plain gland plate, W=800mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08493 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=300mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08494 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=400mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08496 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08497 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650+150mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08498 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=800mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08506 Hinged front plate support frame, W=650mm 400E23100/2
08513 IP30 plain door, W=300mm 400E23100/4, 400E23100/5
08514 IP30 plain door, W=400mm 400E23100/4, 400E23100/5
08516 IP30 plain door, W=650mm 400E23100/4, 400E23100/5
08518 IP30 plain door, W=800mm 400E23100/4, 400E23100/5
08523 IP55 plain door, W=300mm 400E23100/6, 400E23100/7
08524 IP55 plain door, W=400mm 400E23100/6, 400E23100/7
08526 IP55 plain door, W=650mm 400E23100/6, 400E23100/7
08528 IP55 plain door, W=800mm 400E23100/6, 400E23100/7
08536 IP30 transparent door, W=650mm 400E23100/4
08538 IP30 transparent door, W=800mm 400E23100/4
08546 IP55 transparent door, W=650mm 400E23100/6
08548 IP55 transparent door, W=800mm 400E23100/6
08556 IP30 cover frame, W=650mm 400E23100/4
08558 IP30 cover frame, W=800mm 400E23100/4
08584 Front plate hinge kit 100E21100/2
08593 IP30 door with cut-out for human/switchboard interface (HSI), W=300mm 400E23100/4
08594 IP30 door with cut-out for human/switchboard interface (HSI), W=400mm 400E23100/4
08603 Framework, W=300mm, D=600mm 400E23100/2
08604 Framework, W=400mm, D=600mm 400E23100/2
08606 Framework, W=650mm, D=600mm 400E23100/2
08607 Framework, W=650+150mm, D=600mm 400E23100/2
08608 Framework, W=800mm, D=600mm 400E23100/2
08633 IP30 plain roof, W=300mm, D=600mm 400E23100/5
08634 IP30 plain roof, W=400mm, D=600mm 400E23100/5
08636 IP30 plain roof, W=650mm, D=600mm 400E23100/5
08638 IP30 plain roof, W=800mm, D=600mm 400E23100/5
08653 IP55 plain roof, W=300mm, D=600mm 400E23100/7
08654 IP55 plain roof, W=400mm, D=600mm 400E23100/7
08656 IP55 plain roof, W=650mm, D=600mm 400E23100/7
08658 IP55 plain roof, W=800mm, D=600mm 400E23100/7
08676 IP30 ventilated roof, W=650mm, D=600mm 450E25000/4, 100E23010/3
08683 IP55 plain gland plate, W=300mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08684 IP55 plain gland plate, W=400mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08686 IP55 plain gland plate, W=650mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08687 IP55 plain gland plate, W=650+150mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08688 IP55 plain gland plate, W=800mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08693 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=300mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08694 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=400mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08696 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08697 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650+150mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
EnglishIXA.fm/13 EnglishIXA.fm/13
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
08698 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=800mm, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08700 4 lifting rings 400E23210/2
08701 Stabiliser kit 400E23210/2
08702 Levelling kit 400E23210/3
08703 False floor fixing kit 400E23210/2
08704 Floor/wall fixing kit 400E23210/3
08707 Door stopper 400E23100/9
08711 IP31 sealing kit 400E23100/5
08713 IP30 right-angle kit 400E23100/9
08717 IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations 400E23100/3
08719 Double depth combination kit 400E23100/3
08720 2 side plates for plinth, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08721 2 side plates for plinth, D=600mm 400E23100/8
08723 Plinth, H=100mm, W=300mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08724 Plinth, H=100mm, W=400mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08726 Plinth, H=100mm, W=650mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08728 Plinth, H=100mm, W=800mm, D=400mm 400E23100/8
08733 IP30 rear panel, W=300mm 400E23100/5
08734 IP30 rear panel, W=400mm 400E23100/5
08736 IP30 rear panel, W=650mm 400E23100/5
08738 IP30 rear panel, W=800mm 400E23100/5
08743 IP55 rear panel, W=300mm 400E23100/7
08744 IP55 rear panel, W=400mm 400E23100/7
08746 IP55 rear panel, W=650mm 400E23100/7
08748 IP55 rear panel, W=800mm 400E23100/7
08750 2 IP30 side panels, W=400mm 400E23100/5
08755 2 IP55 side panels, W=400mm 400E23100/7
08756 2 IP55 combination side panels, W=400mm 400E23100/5, 400E23100/7
08760 2 IP30 side panels, W=600mm 400E23100/5
08765 2 IP55 side panels, W=600mm 400E23100/7
08773 4 cable tie supports, W=300mm 400E23220/2
08774 4 cable tie supports, W=400mm 400E23220/2
08776 4 cable tie supports, W=650mm 400E23220/2
08778 4 cable tie supports, W=800mm 400E23220/2
08794 4 cable tie supports, D=400mm 400E23220/2
08796 4 cable tie supports, D=600mm 400E23220/2
08801 2 lifting rings 300E23020/2
08802 IP55 plinth, W=850mm 301E23800/4
08803 4 external wall-mount brackets 200E23000/8, 300E23020/3
08805 100mm plinth raiser for floor-standing enclosures 300E23010/5
08806 100mm plinth raiser, W=850mm 301E23800/3
08807 100mm plinth raiser for ducts 300E23010/5
08808 2 lifting/reinforcement cross-members for floor-standing enclosure, W=850mm 301E23800/5
08809 2 lifting/reinforcement cross-members for combinations of floor-standing
enclosures, W=850mm, and ducts, W=300mm
301E23800/2, 301E23800/5
08810 2 lifting/reinforcement cross-members for single wall-mount or floor-standing
enclosures
300E23020/2
08811 2 lifting/reinforcement cross-members for 2 wall-mount or floor-standing
enclosures
300E23010/3, 300E23010/5, 300E23020/2
08812 2 lifting/reinforcement cross-members for single wall-mount or floor-standing
enclosure and duct
300E23010/3, 300E23010/5, 300E23020/2
08813 2 lifting/reinforcement cross-members for two wall-mount or floor-standing
enclosures and a duct
300E23010/3, 300E23010/5, 300E23020/2
08815 IP30 combination kit for floor-standing enclosures 301E23800/3
08816 Combination kit 300E23010/3
08817 2 combination uprights 201E21000/2, 300E23010/3
08819 Flush-mount kit for wall-mount enclosures, 6-18 modules 300E23010/6
08820 Flush-mount kit for wall-mount enclosures, 21-27 modules 300E23010/6
08821 Trunking spreader for Pack enclosure 200E23000/3
08822 Pack flush-mount kit 200E23000/3
08824 Trunking spreader for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 300E23020/2
08830 IP31 canopy for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 300E23010/6
08831 IP31 canopy for 2 wall-mount or 2 floor-standing enclosures 300E23010/6
08832 IP31 canopy for single wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure and duct 300E23010/6
08833 IP31 canopy for 2 wall-mount or 2 floor-standing enclosures and duct 300E23010/6
08836 IP31 canopy for floor-standing enclosure, W=850mm 301E23800/3
EnglishIXA.fm/14
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
08837 IP31 canopy for floor-standing enclosure and duct, W=850mm 301E23800/3
08840 IP43 door gasket kit, 6-21 modules 300E23010/6
08841 IP43 door gasket kit, 21-33 modules 301E23800/3
08841 IP43 door gasket kit, 24-33 modules 300E23010/6
08850 6-module partial door for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 300E23010/6
08851 6-module partial door with cut-out for human/switchboard interface (HSI) for
wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure
300E23010/6
08861 Plain mounting plate, 210x150mm 300E23110/5
08862 Mounting plate with eight 22mm diameter holes 300E23110/5
08863 Mounting plate with two 70x85mm holes for industrial sockets 300E23110/5
08864 IP55 mounting plate with 70x85mm and 90x100mm holes for industrial sockets 300E23110/5
08865 Mounting plate with 90x180mm hole for industrial sockets 300E23110/5
08866 Cable tie support adapter 300E23220/2
08867 2 cable tie supports for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 200E23000/8, 301E21001/2, 300E23220/2
08868 4 cable tie supports for ducts 300E23220/2
08870 Plain metal gland plate for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 300E23010/7
08871 Interface for FL21 gland plate for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 300E23010/7
08874 Plain metal gland plate for duct 300E23010/7
08875 Interface for FL21 gland plate for duct 300E23010/7
08878 Plastic gland plate and interface for Pack enclosures 200E23000/3
08879 Plain metal gland plate for Pack enclosures 200E23000/3
08880 Plastic gland plate and interface for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 300E23010/7
08881 Plain FL21 gland plate 300E23010/7
08884 Plastic gland plate and interface for ducts 300E23010/7
08887 Gland plate for floor-standing enclosure plinth 300E23010/7
08888 Gland plate for duct plinth 300E23010/7
08889 Gland plate for floor-standing enclosure plinth, W=850mm 301E23800/3
08891 Not yet available 300E23010/7
08892 Not yet available 300E23010/7
08895 FL21 gland plate with 20x16mm diameter entries 300E23010/7
08896 FL21 gland plate with 16/30/47mm diameter entries 300E23010/7
08897 FL21 gland plate with 2x66mm diameter entries 300E23010/7
08898 FL21 gland plate with 39x7-26mm diameter entries 300E23120/3
08899 FL21 IP55 gland plate with 2x33-72mm diameter entries 300E23120/3
08900 Switchboard identification plate 100E21100/3
08903 12 adhesive label holders, H=24mm, W=432mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08904 12 adhesive label holders, H=36mm, W=432mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08905 12 adhesive label holders, H=24mm, W=180mm 100E21100/3
08906 12 adhesive label holders, H=36mm, W=180mm 100E21100/3
08907 12 adhesive label holders, H=24mm, W=650mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08908 12 adhesive label holders, H=36mm, W=650mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08910 Earthing braid, 6mm 200E23000/7, 100E23000/3
08911 Earthing wire, 6mm 200E23000/7, 100E23000/3
08913 12 clip-on labels, 18x35mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08914 12 engraving plates, 18x35mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08915 12 clip-on labels, 18x72mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08916 12 engraving plates, 18x72mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08917 12 clip-on labels, 25x85mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08918 12 engraving plates, 25x85mm 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
08921 20 screws + wing nuts for framework 400E23100/3
08930 Standard handle without insert 100E23000/2
08932 EURO handle without insert 100E23000/2
08933 ASSA handle without insert 100E23000/2
08934 IP55 EURO handle for cylinder 300E23130/2
08935 IP55 handle, L=155mm 300E23130/2
08936 IP55 door latch with lock and 2 no. 405 keys 300E23130/2
08938 Handle padlocking kit 100E23000/2
08939 IP55 handle padlocking kit 300E23130/3
08940 Barrel lock no. 405 100E23000/2
08941 Barrel lock no. 455 100E23000/2
08942 Barrel lock no. 1242E 100E23000/2
08943 Barrel lock no. 3113A 100E23000/2
08944 Barrel lock no. 2433A 100E23000/2
08945 DIN double bar insert 100E23000/2
08946 Screwdriver slot insert 100E23000/2
EnglishIXA.fm/15 EnglishIXA.fm/15
Index
Version 1 du 31/10/03
08947 6.5mm male triangle insert 100E23000/2
08948 7mm male triangle insert 100E23000/2
08949 8mm male triangle insert 100E23000/2
08950 9mm male triangle insert 100E23000/2
08951 6mm male square insert 100E23000/2
08952 7mm male square insert 100E23000/2
08953 8mm male square insert 100E23000/2
08955 6mm female square insert 100E23000/2
08961 Touch-up paint brush 200E23000/7, 100E23000/3
08962 Touch-up spray paint 200E23000/7, 100E23000/3
08963 Adhesive drawing holder 200E23000/7, 100E23000/3
08964 Switchboard lighting 100E21070/2
08965 Switchboard portable lamp 100E21070/2
08986 Roof fan 450E25000/4, 100E23010/3
08987 Fan 100E23010/2
08988 Grill with filter 100E23010/2
08989 5 standard filters 100E23010/2
08990 5 fine filters 100E23010/2
08992 Resistor, 55W 100E23010/4
08993 Resistor, 90W 100E23010/4
08994 Resistor, 250W 100E23010/4
08998 Thermostat 100E23010/4
09000
09931 IP55 screwdriver slot insert 300E23130/2
09932 IP55 3mm double bar insert for handle 300E23130/2
09933 IP55 barrel + 2 no. 2433A keys 300E23130/2
09937 IP55 7mm male triangle insert for handle 300E23130/2
09938 IP55 8mm male triangle insert for handle (CNOMO) 300E23130/2
09939 IP55 9mm male triangle insert for handle (EDF) 300E23130/2
09942 IP55 barrel + 2 no. 1242E keys 300E23130/2
09943 IP55 barrel + 2 no. 3133A keys 300E23130/2
09945 IP55 barrel + 2 no. 455 keys 300E23130/2
09946 IP55 6mm female square insert for handle 300E23130/2
09947 IP55 7mm male square insert for handle 300E23130/2
09948 IP55 8mm male square insert for handle 300E23130/2
09949 IP55 6mm male square insert for handle 300E23130/2
09981 IP55 screwdriver slot insert for door 300E23130/2
09982 IP55 3mm double bar insert for door 300E23130/2
09983 IP55 7mm male triangle insert for door 300E23130/2
09984 IP55 8mm male triangle insert for door (CNOMO) 300E23130/2
09985 IP55 9mm male triangle insert for door (EDF) 300E23130/2
09986 IP55 6mm male square insert for door 300E23130/2
09987 IP55 7mm male square insert for door 300E23130/2
09988 IP55 8mm male square insert for door 300E23130/2
09989 IP55 6mm female square insert for door 300E23130/2
13000
13735 10 self-adhesive label sheets for common symbols 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
13736 10 self-adhesive label sheets for special symbols 200E23000/7, 100E21100/3
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Prisma Plus
Pack wall-mount
enclosures
Catalogue numbers
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
200E_31_10_03TDM.fm/ Version 1 du 31/10/03
Contents Pack wall-mount
enclosures
Catalogue numbers
Functional units
Enclosure extension for separate components 201E21000/2
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures 200E23000/2
Dimensions
Pack wall-mount enclosures 200E31000/2
201E21000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Enclosure extension for separate
components
"Tarif bleu" service connection

Installation
Enclosure extension with two rows for separate components
D
D
3
8
2
4
0
4
D
D
3
8
2
4
0
5
D
D
3
8
2
4
0
6
No. of rows Height of
enclosure
Enclosure Plain door Transparent
door
2 480 08012 08082 08092
Reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle (without barrel lock).
For barrel locks and inserts, See page 100E23000.fm/2.
DB90 + meter
D
D
3
8
1
8
0
9 Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate + metering panel
+ front plate
DB90
DB90 U + N + meter 6 03140

DB90 + meter
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
0
DB90 + relay
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate + control panel
+ front plate
DB90
DB90 U + N + relay 6 03141
DB90 3P + relay 6 03141
DB90 + relay.
Combination uprights
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is mandatory to
use a set of combination uprights secured to the rear of the switchboard.
D
D
3
8
2
4
0
3 Designation Cat. no.
2 combination uprights 08817
Accessories
See page 200E23000.fm/7.
Catalogue numbers
System G
201E21000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Enclosure extension for separate
components
"Tarif bleu" service connection
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E23000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures

Presentation
Pack electrical-distribution enclosures are specially
designed for modular devices up to 160 A.
The design, based on the System G wall-mount and
floor-standing enclosures, offers a number of
advantages:
b easy device access and mounting
b distribution using 125 and 160 A Powerclip insulated
busbars as well as Distribloc and Polybloc distribution
blocks
b supply of devices using 63/80 A Multiclip distribution
blocks or comb busbars
b horizontal cable straps and trunking
b earth and neutral bars
b identification labels
b closing accessories including barrel locks and
inserts.
The optimised depth and extra-thin door ensure perfect
integration in all environments.
In addition, Pack enclosures are specially equipped for
easy on-site installation.
Supplied with modular rails and front plates already
mounted, they can also be fitted with blanking plates
and plastic gland plates.
They can be equipped with plain or transparent doors.
Characteristics
b rated operational current: 160 A
b degree of protection: IP30 (with or without door)
b degree of protection against mechanical impacts:
IK07 (without door), IK08 (with door)
b insulation: class 1
b compliance with standards: IEC 60439-1
b dimensions:
v H: see the table on the next page
v W: 555 mm
v D: 157 mm without door
186 mm without door
b Capacity per row: 48 width modules (9 mm each).
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
0
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
1
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
6
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E23000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures

Enclosures
D
D
3
8
1
8
0
0
D
D
3
8
1
8
0
1
D
D
3
8
1
8
0
2
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
1
No. of rows Height of
enclosure
Enclosure Plain door Transparent
door
2 480 08002 08082 08092
3 630 08003 08083 08093
4 780 08004 08084 08094
5 930 08005 08085 08095
6 1080 08006 08086 08096
Reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle (without barrel
lock).
For barrel locks and inserts, See page 100E23000.fm/2.
Gland plates
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
2 Designation Cat. no.
Top or bottom plate with additional plastic gland plate 08878
Plain metal gland plate 08879
08878.
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
3
08879.
Trunking spreader
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
4 Designation Cat. no.
Trunking spreader 08821
Flush-mount kit
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
6 Designation Cat. no.
Flush-mount kit 08822
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E23000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures
Distribution
Cable running

160 A Powerclip busbars
See page 300F22010.
Available in two lengths (450 and 750 mm) in three and four-pole versions.
The busbars can be cut to length every 150 mm.
They are supplied with clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can
be cut as needed.
Cat. no. selection D
D
3
8
1
8
1
5
125 A Powerclip busbars Cat. no.
Three-pole L = 450 mm 04103
L = 750 mm 04107
Four-pole L = 450 mm 04104
L = 750 mm 04108
160 A Powerclip busbars Cat. no.
Three-pole L = 1000 mm 04111
L = 1400 mm 04116
Four-pole L = 1000 mm 04121
L = 1400 mm 04126
Busbar connection
Four 125 A connections
(for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals)
04145
Four 160 A connections 04146
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
9
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
6 Powerclip tap-off blocks
For connection of one 6 mm and one 10 mm cable.
Equipped with spring terminals.
Designation Cat. no.
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 6mm + 10mm terminals 04151
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 16 mm terminals 04152
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
7 Connection cover
Clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can be cut as needed.
They maintain the IPxxB value for cables up to 25 mm with 90angle lugs.
Designation Cat. no.
8 IPxxB covers for Powerclip busbars 04150
8.8 class mounting hardware
Used for electrical connections to the copper bars.
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 CHC M6 x 12 mm screws for Powerclip busbars 04158
160 A Polybloc distribution block
See page 300F22040.
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
0 Designation Cat. no.
160 A Polybloc distribution block, 1P 04031
125/160 A Distribloc distribution
block
See page 100F22010.
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
8 Designation Cat. no.
125 A Distribloc distribution block 04045
160 A Distribloc distribution block 04046
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E23000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures
Device on a modular rail
Device on a slotted plate
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
Installation on a modular rail
D
D
3
8
1
8
0
6
Depth behind
front plate (mm)
Useful length
(mm)
Designation Cat. no.
Rear modular rail 79 432 03004
Installation on a slotted mounting
plate
D
D
3
8
1
8
0
7
No. of
vertical
modules
Useful height
(mm)
Useful width
(mm)
Depth behind
front plate
Designation Cat. no.
Recessed slotted
mounting plate
6 300 420 112 03172
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
D
D
3
8
1
8
0
8
No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail (adjustable) Modular front plate
Designation
NSA125/160 circuit
breaker
Vigi circuit breaker
NSA125/160
5 03008 03205
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
Note: To mix an NSA125/160 circuit breaker with Multi 9 modular devices, order (with the device)
the symmetrical rail + raiser set (28041).
Note: Width of devices: NSA125/160 3P: 10 modules
NSA125/160 4P: 14 modules
Vigi NSA125/160 3P: 24 modules
Vigi NSA125/160 4P: 27 modules
Other solutions
See page 300E21600.fm/2
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E23000.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures
Distribution
Cable running

Multiclip distribution block
See page 100F22100.
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
5 Designation Cat. no.
80 A Multiclip, 4P 04004
63 A Multiclip, 4P, 1/2 row 04008
Comb busbars
See page 120F5050.
D
D
3
8
1
8
0
3
Cable running
See page 100F22600.
D
D
3
8
1
8
1
9 Designation Cat. no.
Cable straps
12 horizontal cable straps 04239
4 covers for horizontal cable straps, L = 430 mm 04243
Trunking
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, L = 450 mm + supports 04257
12 horizontal trunking supports 04255
2 fixing brackets, H = 15 mm (for vertical trunking) 04206
Earth bar
See page 300F22450.
Presentation
The earth bar can be:
b a bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with a 35
mm tunnel terminal and on which earth blocks with spring terminals can be clipped
b an earth bar (200 or 450 mm long), equipped with clamps with captive screws.
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
0
Earth bar with spring terminals Cat. no.
Bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with
a 35 mm tunnel terminal (for earth blocks with spring terminals)
04201
4 earth blocks with 12 x 4 mm spring terminals (L = 75 mm) 04214
4 earth blocks with 3 x 16 mm spring terminals (L = 37 mm) 04215
2 fixing brackets, H = 15 mm (for vertical earth bar) 04206
04215.
Earth bar with clamps Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
6 Earth bar with 40 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (L = 450 mm) 04200
04200.
04201.
04214.
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E23000.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures
Accessories

Blanking plates
See page 100F21100.
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
5 Designation Cat. no.
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, L = 1 m 03220
4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, L = 90 mm 03221
Identification labels
See page 100F21100.
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
3 Designation Cat. no.
Clip-on labels
12 clip-on labels 18 x 35 08913
18 x 72 08915
25 x 85 08917
12 engraving plates 18 x 35 08914
18 x 72 08916
Clip-on labels. 25 x 85 08918
Adhesive labels
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
7
12 adhesive label holders, W = 432 mm H = 24 mm 08903
H = 36 mm 08904
12 divisible label holders, W = 650 mm H = 24 mm 08907
H = 36 mm 08908
Symbol sheets
Set of ten adhesive symbol sheets standard 13735
special 13736
Adhesive labels.
Enclosure accessories
See page 100F23000.
D
D
3
8
0
1
2
0
6 Designation Cat. no.
Earthing braid, 6 mm 08910
Earthing wire, 6 mm 08911
D
D
3
8
0
1
9
2
2 Designation Cat. no.
Touch-up spray paint, RAL 9001 08962
Touch-up paint brush, RAL 9001 08961
D
D
3
8
0
1
9
2
3
D
D
3
8
0
1
2
0
8 Designation Cat. no.
Adhesive drawing holder 08963
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E23000.fm/8 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures
Accessories

Cable-tie supports
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
0 Designation Cat. no.
2 cable-tie supports 08867
Wall mounting
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
1 Designation Cat. no.
4 external wall-mount brackets 08803
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E23000.fm/9 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Pack wall-mount enclosures
Accessories
Catalogue numbers
System G
200E31000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
Pack wall-mount enclosures

Wall-mount enclosure Door
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
0
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
1
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
2
No. of rows
2 3 4 5 6
H 480 630 780 930 1080
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
3
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
6
Gland plates
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
4
Wall mounting
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
5 No. of rows
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
9
2 3 4 5 6
H1 396 546 696 846 996
H2 546 696 846 996 1146
Depth behind front plate
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
7
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
8
D
D
3
8
1
7
9
0
D
D
3
8
1
7
9
1
Dimensions
System G
200E31000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
Pack wall-mount enclosures
Dimensions
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Prisma Plus
System G
Presentation
Catalogue numbers
Dimensions
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
300E_31_10_03TDM.fm/1 Version 1 du 31/10/03
Contents system G
Presentation
General presentation
Electrical switchboards up to 630 A 300E10020/2
Examples of switchboard configurations 300E10040/2
The functions of an electrical switchboard 300E10050/2
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Typical configuration with catalogue numbers 300E20030/2
Determining catalogue numbers 300E20040/2
Functional units
"Tarif bleu" service connection 301E21000/2
"Tarif jaune" service connection 301E21001/2
Compact NS400/630 300E21150/2
Compact NS100/250 300E21160/2
Interpact INS-INV250/630 300E21200/2
Manual source changeover system 300E21210/2
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors 300E21400/2
Industrial control devices 300E21510/2
Other devices 300E21600/2
850 mm wide functional units
Horizontal Compact NS100/630 301E21800/2
Horizontal Interpact INS250/630 301E21800/3
Modular devices
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors 301E21820/2
Other devices
Reserve space 301E21890/2
300 mm wide functional units
Compact NS100/630 300E21900/2
Interpact INS-INV250/630 300E21910/2
Modular devices
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors 300F21920/2
Industrial control devices 300E21925/2
Other devices 300E21930/2
Distribution
Main distribution 300E22000/2
630 A Powerclip busbars 300E22010/2
400 A rear busbars 300E22020/2
630 A multi-stage busbars 300E22030/2
Polybloc distribution block 300E22040/2
Terminal blocks 300E22450/2
Earth bars 300E22450/4
Neutral bars 300E22450/7
Partitioning 300E22900/2
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 wall-mount enclosures Presentation 300E23000/2
IP30/IP31/IP43 floor-standing enclosures Presentation 300E23000/4
IP30/IP31/IP43 wall-mount enclosures 300E23010/2
IP30/IP31/IP43 floor-standing enclosures 300E23010/4
IP30/IP31/IP43 enclosures 300E23010/6
IP30/IP31/IP43 enclosures 300E23020/2
IP55 enclosures Presentation 300E23100/2
IP55 enclosures 300E23110/2
IP55 enclosures 300E23120/2
IP55 enclosures 300E23130/2
IP30/31/43/55 enclosures 300E23220/2
IP30/31/43 floor-standing enclosures 850 mm wide 301E23800/2
IP55 enclosures 850 mm wide 301E23800/4
IP30/55 enclosures 301E23800/5
Dimensions
Enclosures
IP30/31/43 wall-mount enclosures 300E31000/2
IP30/31/43 floor-standing enclosures 300E31010/2
IP55 enclosures 300E31050/2
IP30/31/43 floor-standing enclosures 850 mm wide 301E31800/2
IP55 enclosures 850 mm wide 301E31800/4
300E10020.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Electrical switchboards
up to 630 A

The Prisma Plus functional
system
The Prisma Plus functional system can be used for all types of low-voltage
distribution switchboards up to 630 A, in commercial and industrial environments.
Switchboard design is very simple.
A functional structure for devices
made up of wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures that can be used alone or
combined.
A distribution system
made up of centralised distribution blocks and vertical busbars installed on the side
or in the rear of the switchboard.
Complete functional units
Each device is part of a functional unit comprising:
b a dedicated mounting plate for device installation
b a front plate to block direct access to live parts
b prefabricated busbar connections
b systems for on-site connections and running of auxiliary wires.
The functional units are modular and are arranged rationally, one on top of another,
within the enclosure.
The system includes everything required for functional unit mounting, supply and on-
site connection.
The components of the Prisma Plus system and those of the functional units in
particular have been designed and tested taking into account device characteristics.
This design approach ensures a high degree of reliability in system operation and
optimum safety for personnel.
P
D
3
9
5
2
8
P
D
3
9
0
4
4
1
Functional units are arranged rationally, one on top of another.
Presentation
System G
300E10020.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Electrical switchboards
up to 630 A

Prisma Plus enclosures
b steel sheet metal
b electrophoresis treatment + hot-polymerised polyester epoxy powder, white colour
RAL 9001.
b IP30 / 31 / 43 wall-mount enclosures
v degree of protection:
- IP30: with or without door
- IP31: with door + canopy
- IP43: with door + canopy + IP43 gasket
v IK07 (without door), IK08 (with door)
v can be dismantled
v can be combined side by side and one on top of another
v eight heights from 330 to 1380 mm
v width: 595 mm
v width of duct: 305 mm, can be combined side by side
v depth: 250 mm with door (205 mm without door)
b IP30 / 31 / 43 floor-standing enclosures
v degree of protection:
- IP30: with or without door
- IP31: with door + canopy
- IP43: with door + canopy + IP43 gasket
v IK07 (without door), IK08 (with door)
v can be dismantled
v can be combined side by side
v three heights: 1530, 1680 and 1830 mm
v width: 595 mm
v width of duct: 305 mm, can be combined side by side
v depth: 250 mm with door (205 mm without door)
b IP55 enclosures
v IK10
v can be dismantled
v can be combined side by side and one on top of another
v width: 600 mm
v seven heights: 450 to 1750 mm
v widths: 325 and 575 mm, can be combined side by side and one on top of another
v depth: 260 mm with door + 30 mm (handle).
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
0
Advantages of Prisma Plus
switchboards
A dependable electrical installation
The total compatibility of Schneider devices with the Prisma Plus system is a key
advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability.
System design has been validated by type tests and benefits from the combined
experience of Schneider customers over many years.
An upgradeable electrical installation
Thanks to modular design, Prisma Plus switchboards can be modified easily to
integrate new functional units as needed.
Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and
straight-forward due to easy access to devices and the use of standard components.
Total safety for personnel
Devices are installed behind protective front plates; only the operating handles are
accessible.
The electrical installation and operating personnel are fully protected.
In addition, all distribution components are protected by an IPxxB degree of
protection.
Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NS and INS/INV devices
in Prisma Plus enclosures.
Electrical switchboards built using the Prisma Plus functional system and
Schneider recommendations fully comply with international standard IEC
60439-1.
Electrical characteristics
Prisma Plus components comply with standard IEC 60439-1 and have the following
electrical characteristics:
b rated insulation level of main busbars at rear of enclosure: 1000 V
b rated operational current Ie (40C): 630 A
b rated peak withstand current Ipk: 53 k
b rated short-time withstand current Icw: 25 kA rms / 1 second
b frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Presentation
System G
300E10040.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Presentation
System G
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
4
4
4
Compact NS250 4P
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Incoming cables via bottom
to incoming connection block
Distribution
Polybloc distribution block
Outgoing devices
Multi 9 devices
Supply 80 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable running Straps + cover
Connection Terminal block at top of
switchboard
Motor circuit breakers
Supply Comb busbars
Cable running Straps + cover
Connection Terminal block at top of
switchboard
IP30 enclosure
Wall-mount enclosure, W = 595 mm, H = 930 mm
Plain door
Partial plain door
P
D
3
9
0
4
4
3
300E10040.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
4
4
6
Interpact INS160 4P
Incoming cables via top
Distribution
160 A Powerclip busbars
Outgoing devices
Multi 9 devices
Supply 80 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable running Straps + cover
Connection Terminal block in duct,
W= 300 mm
Motor circuit breaker + contactor combinations
Supply Cable wiring
Cable running Straps + cover
Connection Terminal block in duct,
W= 300 mm
IP30 enclosure
Wall-mount enclosure,
W= 595 mm, H = 1230 mm
Transparent door
Duct, W = 305 mm,
H = 1230 mm
Plain door
P
D
3
9
0
4
4
5
Presentation
System G
300E10040.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
5
2
7
Compact NS250
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Incoming cables via top to incoming connection block
Distribution
Powerclip busbars
Outgoing devices
Multi 9 devices
Supply 80/200 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable running Straps + cover
Trunking
Connection Terminal block in duct,
W= 300 mm
Motor circuit breakers
Supply Cable wiring
Cable running Trunking
Connection Terminal block in duct,
W= 300 mm
IP30 enclosure
Wall-mount enclosure,
W= 595 mm, H = 1230 mm
Transparent door
Duct, W = 305 mm,
H = 1230 mm
Plain door
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
1
Presentation
System G
300E10040.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
4
5
1
Interpact INS160
Lateral handle
Incoming cables via bottom, directly to device
Distribution
Distribloc distribution block
Outgoing devices
Multi 9 devices
Supply Comb busbars
Cable running Straps + cover
Connection Terminal block at bottom of
enclosure
Motor control and protection devices
Supply Comb busbars
Cable running Trunking
Connection Terminal block at bottom of
enclosure
IP55 enclosure
Wall-mount enclosure, W =
595 mm, H = 1250 mm
Transparent door
P
D
3
9
0
4
5
0
Presentation
System G
300E10040.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
4
4
9
Compact NS400
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Incoming cables via bottom in duct (W = 300 mm) to incoming
connection block
Distribution
Powerclip busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NS250
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Powerclip busbars with power
supply block
Multi 9 devices
Supply Comb busbars
200 A Multiclip
Cable running Trunking
Connection Vertical terminal block at bottom of
floor-standing enclosure
Motor control and protection devices
Supply 200 A Multiclip
Cable running Trunking
Connection Vertical terminal block at bottom of
floor-standing enclosure
IP30 enclosure
Floor-standing enclosure,
W = 595 mm, H = 1830 mm
Transparent door
Duct, W = 305 mm,
H = 1830 mm
Plain door
Presentation
System G
300E10040.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

P
D
3
9
0
5
9
8
Presentation
System G
300E10050.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
The functions of an electrical
switchboard

P
D
3
9
0
5
4
1
NS250 functional units See page 300E21160.fm/2
Main distribution using Powerclip busbars See page 300E22010.fm/2
Modular device functional units See page 300E21400.fm/2
Distribution using 80 A Multiclip distribution blocks See page 100E22100.fm/2
Horizontal cable running using straps See page 100E22600.fm/3
Modular device functional units See page 300E21400.fm/2
Distribution using comb busbars
Horizontal cable running using straps See page 100E22600.fm/3
Modular device functional units See page 300E21400.fm/2
Distribution using 200 A Multiclip distribution
blocks
See page 100E22100.fm/3
Horizontal cable running using trunking See page 100E22600.fm/4
Motor control and protection functional
units
See page 300E21510.fm/2
Horizontal cable running using trunking See page 100E22600.fm/4
Vertical cable running using trunking See page 100E22600.fm/4
Terminal block See page 300E22450.fm/2
Earth bar See page 300E22450.fm/4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Presentation
System G
300E10050.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
The functions of an electrical
switchboard

P
D
3
9
0
6
7
4
Device compartment See page 300E23000.fm/2
Connection compartment See page 300E23000.fm/2
Front plate See page 300E23000.fm/2
Transparent door See page 300E23010.fm/2
Plain door See page 300E23010.fm/2
1
2
3
4
5
Presentation
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
850 mm wide functional units
Units fonctionnelles en largeur 300 mm300
mm wide functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
300E20030.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Cat. no. selection
Typical configuration with
catalogue numbers

P
D
3
9
0
6
7
5
Mounting plate for horizontal
Compact NS100/250 with toggle
03030 See page
300E21160.fm/2
4 covers for horizontal cable
straps
04243 See page
100E22600.fm/3
Front plate for horizontal
Compact NS100/250 with toggle
03230 See page
300E21160.fm/2
4 horizontal trunking sections,
60 x 30 mm
04257 See page
100E22600.fm/5
Incoming connection block 04066 See page
300E21160.fm/2
12 vertical trunking supports 04265 See page
100E22600.fm/4
250 A power supply block 04060 See page
300E21160.fm/2
Vertical trunking section,
60 x 80 mm
04267 See page
100E22600.fm/5
Powerclip busbars
250 A, 4P, L=1000 mm
04122 See page
300E22010.fm/2
Support for terminal block
and earth bar
04220 See page
300E22450.fm/2
Modular rail 03001 See page
300E21400.fm/3
Modular rail, L=1600 mm 04226 See page
300E22450.fm/2
Modular rail (adjustable) 03002 See page
300E21510.fm/2
Terminal block See page
100E22200.fm/2
Modular front plate, 3 modules 03203 See page
300E21400.fm/3
Earth bar with 40 clamps 04200 See page
300E22450.fm/4
Plain front plate, 4 modules 03804 See page
100E21050.fm/2
Wall-mount enclosure,
24 modules
08108 See page
300E23010.fm/2
80 A Multiclip distribution block,
4P
04004 See page
100E22100.fm/2
Duct, 24 modules 08178 See page
300E23010.fm/2
200 A Multiclip distribution block,
4P
04014 See page
100E22100.fm/3
Transparent door for wall-mount
enclosure, 24 modules
08138 See page
300E23010.fm/2
12 horizontal cable straps 04239 See page
100E22600.fm/3
Plain door for duct, 24 modules 08188 See page
300E23010.fm/2
1 13
2 14
3 15
4 16
5 17
6 18
7 19
8 20
9 21
10 22
11 23
12 24
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E20030.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Cat. no. selection
Typical configuration with
catalogue numbers
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E20040.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Catalogue numbers
Determining catalogue numbers

Starting with the electrical
diagram: IP30 switchboard D
D
3
8
0
8
8
7
Install the incomer
Installation/connection
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
4
see page 300E21160.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
7
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
8 b order the mounting
plates and the front
plates
b the incoming
connection block
b the power supply block
for the Powerclip busbars.
Distribution using
Powerclip busbars
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
5
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
8
Install the modular devices
Multi 9
see page 300E21400.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
6
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
8 Order the mounting
plates and front plates
taking into account:
b supply to the rows
b cable running.
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
9
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
1
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
7
TeSys "U"
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
8
see page 300E21510.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
0
b Multiclip distribution block see page 100E21100.fm/2
b cable running see page 100E22600.fm/2
Determine the size of the switchboard
b count the number of
occupied modules
19 modules
b determine the
corresponding wall-
mount enclosure
21 modules
b order the additional
plain front plate.
Plain front plate
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
9
see page 100E21050.fm/2
1
2
1
2



Presentation
System G
300E20040.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Catalogue numbers
Determining catalogue numbers

Plan the distribution system
Powerclip busbars
see page 300E22010.fm/3
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
0
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
0
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
2
Select the terminal blocks and the earth bar
see page 300E22450.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
3
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
1
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
1
Select the enclosures
see page 300E23010.fm/2 IP wall-mount enclosure
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
2
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
2
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
4
Duct, W = 300 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
3
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
5
Canopy
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
4
D
D
3
8
1
8
8
6
Cable tie supports
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
5
Accessories for
lifting, handling, wall
mounting, finishing parts,
etc.
1
Wall-mount enclosure (IP30)
2

3
4
5
Presentation
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
850 mm wide functional units
Units fonctionnelles en largeur 300 mm300
mm wide functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
301E21000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif bleu" service connection

Installation
DB90 + meter
D
D
3
8
2
3
6
4
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate + control panel
+ front plate
DB90
DB90 1P + N + meter 6 03140
D
D
3
8
2
3
6
5 DB90 + relay
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate + control panel
+ front plate
DB90
DB90 + 1P + N + relay 6 03141
DB90 3P + relay 6 03141
D
D
3
8
2
3
6
6 DDI
Device No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail
+ mounting plate
Front plate
DDI
DDI 2P 5 03001 + 15820 03205
DDI 4P 5 03001 + 15821 03205
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif bleu" service connection

125 A Powerclip busbars
See page 300E22010.fm/3.
D
D
3
8
2
3
6
7
160 A Polybloc distribution block
See page 300E22040.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
0
Distribloc distribution block
See page 100E22010.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
8
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide
functional units
"Tarif bleu" service connection

Installation
DB90 + meter
D
D
3
8
2
3
9
3
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate + control panel
+ front plate
DB90
DB90 3P + meter 14 03142
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
"Tarif bleu" service connection

125 A Powerclip busbars
See page 300E22010.fm/3.
D
D
3
8
2
3
6
7
160 A Polybloc distribution block
See page 300E22040.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
0
Distribloc distribution block
See page 100E22010.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
8
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21001.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection
Horizontal circuit breakers

Installation/connection
Device alone
D
D
3
8
2
3
8
7
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Cable tying Long terminal
shields
Horizontal, fixed Compact NS circuit breaker, front connection with toggle
NS100/250
(1)
5 03143 03230
+ 03801
08867 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi NS100/250
(1)
5 03143 03238 08867 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
(1) It is not possible to use an incoming connection block.
Two devices
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
4
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Connection
between
devices
Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Vertical Interpact INV switch-disconnector
Horizontal, fixed Compact NS circuit breaker, front connection with toggle
INV250
+ NS100/250
10 03143 x 2 03248
+ 03801
+ 03230
04443 29324
INV250
+ Vigi NS100/250
10 03143 x 2 03248
+ 03801
+ 03238
04444 29324
INV320/400
+ NS100/250
15 03146
+ 03143
03274
+ 03801
+ 03230
04445 32565
INV320/400
+ Vigi NS100/250
15 03146
+ 03143
03274
+ 03801
+ 03238
04446 32565
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
5
Device 250 A Polybloc
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 and
Vigi
3P 04033
4P 04034
Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Power supply
block
Short terminal
shields (set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS (1 device centred on mounting plate)
NS100/250 and
Vigi
04060 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
See page 300E22010.fm/3.
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
6
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Rear busbars,
See page 300E22020.fm/2.
Busbars in a duct,
See page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21001.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection
Vertical circuit breaker

Installation/connection
Device alone
D
D
3
8
2
3
8
8
Device No. of
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Long terminal
shields
Vertical, fixed Compact NS circuit breaker, front connection with toggle
NS400 11 03146 03273
+ 03802
32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
Vigi NS400 13 03146 03276
+ 03802
32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
7 Two devices mounted side-by-side
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front
plates
Connection
between
devices
Long
terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Short
terminal
shields
Vertical Interpact INV switch-disconnector
Vertical, fixed Compact NS circuit breaker, front connection with toggle
INV250
+ NS100/250
(1)
8 03145 03242
+ 03801
31071 29324 29322
INV250
+ Vigi NS100/250
(2)
10 03145 03242
+ 03803
31071 29324 29322
INV320/400
+ NS320/400
14 03146 03278
+ 03805
31072 32565 32563
INV320/400
+ Vigi NS320/400
16 03146 03278
+ 03802
+ 03805
31072 32565 32563
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
8 Two devices joined one above the other
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front
plates
Connection
between
devices
Long terminal shields
(set of 2)
Assembled fixed devices, vertically mounted
INV250
+ NS100/250
(3)
9 03145 x 2 03246 31066 29324
INV250
+ Vigi NS100/250
(3)
11 03145 x 2 03246
+ 03803
31066 29324
INV320/400
+ NS320/400
17 03146 x 2 03279
+ 03802
31068 32565
INV320/400
+ Vigi NS320/400
19 03146 x 2 03279
+ 03804
31068 32565
(1) For distribution via Powerclip busbars, add a 4-module plain front plate (03804).
(2) For distribution via Powerclip busbars, add a 2-module plain front plate (03802).
(3) If a Polybloc distribution block is used, add a 1-module plain front plate (03801).
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21001.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection
Vertical circuit breaker

Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
9
Device 250 A Polybloc
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/250 3P 04033 + 04037
4P 04034 + 04037
Device 250 A Polybloc Modular rail (adjustable)
Fixed Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/250 3P 04033 03002
4P 04034 03002
Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Univ. power
supply block
(w/o conn.)
Connection Short terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS (1 device centred on mounting plate)
NS100/250 and
Vigi
04061 must be
made
29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
See
page 300E22010.fm/3.
NS400 and Vigi 04074 must be
made
32562 (3P)
32563 (4P)
See
page 300E22010.fm/3.
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
0
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21001.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide
functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection

Installation/connection
Device alone
D
D
3
8
2
3
8
9
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Long terminal
shields
Vertical, fixed Compact NS circuit breaker, front connection with toggle
NS100/250 9 03144 03250 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi NS100/250 11 03144 03252 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
NS400 11 03147 03280
+ 03811
+ 03812
32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
Vigi NS400 14 03147 03282
+ 03812
+ 03812
32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
1 Two devices mounted one above the other
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Connection
between
devices
Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Assembled fixed devices, vertically mounted
INV250
+ NS100/250
15 03144 x 2 03254
+ 03813
31066 29324
INV250
+ Vigi NS100/250
16 03144 x 2 03254
+ 03814
31066 29324
INV320/400
+ NS400
16 03147 x 2 03284
+ 03811
31068 32565
INV320/400
+ Vigi NS400
18 03147 x 2 03284
+ 03813
31068 32565
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
2
Device 250 A Polybloc
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/250 3P 04033 + 04037
4P 04034 + 04037
Device 250 A Polybloc Modular rail (adjustable)
Fixed Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/250 3P 04033 03011
4P 04034 03011
Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Univ. power supply
block (w/o conn.)
+ conn. Short terminal
shields (set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS (1 device centred on mounting plate)
NS100/250 and
Vigi
04061 + 04064 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
See
page 300E22010.fm/3.
NS400 and Vigi 04074 + 04073 32562 (3P)
32563 (4P)
See
page 300E22010.fm/3.
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
3
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21001.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide
functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection

Distribution
Multi-stage busbars
D
D
3
8
2
3
6
3
Device Connection Short terminal
shields (set of 2)
Multi-stage busbars
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 and Vigi 04065 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
See page 300E22030.fm/2
NS400 and Vigi 04075 32562 (3P)
32563 (4P)
See page 300E22030.fm/2
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
Rear busbars,
See page 300E22020.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21001.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide
functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21150.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS400/630
Horizontal
Fixed
Toggle
Installation
Connection to the in-duct incoming connection block
D
D
3
8
0
7
8
2
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Incoming
connection
block
Compact NS installed at top of switchboard
NS400/630
(cables
via top)
9 03070 03270 03803 04076
NS400/630
(cables
via bottom)
6 03070 03270 04076
Compact NS installed at bottom of switchboard
NS400/630
(cables
via bottom)
9 03070 03270 03803 04076
NS400/630
(cables
via top)
6 03070 03270 04076
Cables via top to in-duct incoming connection block.
D
D
3
8
0
7
8
1
Cables via bottom to in-duct incoming connection block.
Distribution
Powerclip insulated busbars
D
D
3
8
0
7
8
3 Device Power supply block Powerclip insulated busbars
Compact NS
NS400 04070 see page 300E22010.fm/3
NS630 04071 see page 300E22010.fm/3
Powerclip insulated busbars, supplied by 400 A power supply
block (04070).
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Rear busbars
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Multi-stage busbars
see page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21150.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS400/630
Vertical
Fixed
Toggle or direct rotary handle
Installation
Toggle
D
D
3
8
0
7
8
4 Device No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
frontplate
Long
terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS400 11 03073 03273 03802 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
NS630 12 03073 03273 03802 03801 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
Vigi NS400 13 03073 03276 03802 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
Vigi NS630 14 03073 03276 03802 03801 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
(1) With or without spreaders.
D
D
3
8
0
7
8
5
Direct rotary handle
Device No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Long
terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS400 14 03074 03275 03802 03803 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
NS630 14 03074 03275 03802 03803 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
Vigi NS400 17 03074 03277 + 03802 03804 32564 (3P)
29285
(collar)
32565 (4P)
Vigi NS630 17 03074 03277 + 03802 03804 32564 (3P)
29285
(collar)
32565 (4P)
(1) With or without spreaders.
Distribution
Powerclip insulated busbars
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
5 Device Power supply block
(without connection)
Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Powerclip insulated
busbars
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS400/630 and Vigi 3P 04074 32562 see
page 300E22010.fm/3
4P 04074 32563
Powerclip insulated busbars, supplied by power supply block
(04074) (supplied without connection).
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Rear busbars
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Multi-stage busbars
see page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21160.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100/250
Horizontal
Fixed or plug-in
Toggle
Installation
Without cable duct: with incoming connection block
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
6
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Connection block
cables via
top
cables via
bottom
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/250 5 03030 03230 03801 04066 or 04067
Compact circuit breaker with incoming connection block
(04066).
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
5 With cable duct: direct connection to the device
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 4 03030 03230 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
NS100/250 4 03033 03236 29323 (3P)
with ammeter module 29324 (4P)
Vigi NS100/250 4 03033 03238 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Compact NS, plug-in
NS100/250 4 03032 03233 29332 (3P)
29333 (4P)
Direct connection to the Compact circuit breaker.
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
7
Device Polybloc 250 A
Compact NS, Vigicompact NS, Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Vigi NS100/250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Compact NS, plug-in
NS100/250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Distribution using Polybloc (04034).
D
D
3
8
0
5
2
2 Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Power supply block Terminal shields
(set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 04060 see
page 300E22010.fm/3
NS100/250 with
ammeter module
04060 29321 (3P) see
page 300E22010.fm/3
29322 (4P)
Vigi NS100/250 04060 29321 (3P) see
page 300E22010.fm/3
29322 (4P)
Compact NS, plug-in
(1)
NS100/250 04061 (without
connection)
29332 (3P) see
page 300E22010.fm/3
29333 (4P)
(1) Two additional modules are required; add a lower plain front plate (03802).
Distribution via Powerclip insulated busbars and NS250 power
supply block (04060). Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Rear busbars, see page 300E22020.fm/2. Busbars in a duct, see page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21160.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100/250
Vertical
Fixed
Toggle
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
2
Device No. of
devices
per row
No. of
vert.
mod.
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Long
terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/160 1
4 x 3P, 3 x 4P
7 03040 03243 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
NS250 1
4 x 3P, 3 x 4P
9 03040 03243 03802 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi
NS100/160
1
4 x 3P, 3 x 4P
8 03040 03241 03801 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi NS250 1
4 x 3P, 3 x 4P
11 03040 03241 03802 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
(1) With or without spreaders, whatever the distribution solution (Powerclip insulated busbars,
Polybloc distribution block, etc.).
D
D
3
8
0
6
6
6 Accessories
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
9
Blanking plate for vertical NS100/250 (03249): see page 100E21100.fm/2.
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
0
7
8
0 Device Polybloc 250 A Modular rail
(adjustable)
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04033 03002
4P 04034 03002
Vigi NS100/250 3P 04033 03002
4P 04034 03002
Distribution using a Polybloc distribution block (04034)
on an adjustable modular device rail (03002).
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
3 Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Univ. power
supply block
(w/o connection)
+ connection Short terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS (1 device centred on mounting plate)
NS100/250 04061 + 04062 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
see
page 300E22010.fm/
3
Vigi NS100/250 04061 must
be made
29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
see
page 300E22010.fm/
3
Distribution via Powerclip insulated busbars and a 250 A
universal power supply block (04061) (without connection)
+ connection (04062).
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Rear busbars, see page 300E22020.fm/2. Busbars in a duct, see page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21160.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100/250
Horizontal, fixed
Direct rotary handle or motor
mechanism
Installation
Without cable duct
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
4 Device No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Long
terminal
shields
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250
Dir. rotary handle
8 03031 03232 03802 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
NS100/250
Motor mech.
8 03032 03234 03802 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi NS100/250
Dir. rotary handle
8 03031 03237 +
29285
(collar)
03802 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
(1) Distribution using Polybloc.
Size reduced two modules, lower front plate (03802) not needed.
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
9
With cable duct
Device No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Long terminal shields
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250
Dir. rotary handle
6 03031 03232 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
NS100/250
Motor mech.
6 03032 03234 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi NS100/250
Dir. rotary handle
6 03031 03237 +
29285
(collar)
03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
(1) Distribution using Polybloc.
Size reduced two modules, lower front plate (03802) not needed.
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
0 Device Polybloc 250 A
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Vigi NS100/250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Distribution using Polybloc (04034).
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
1
Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Univ. power supply
block
(w/o connection)
Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 04061 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
see
page 300E22010.fm/3
Vigi NS100/250 04061 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
see
page 300E22010.fm/3
Other distribution solutions
Distribution via Powerclip insulated busbars and a 250 A
universal power supply block (04061) (supplied without
connection).
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Rear busbars, see page 300E22020.fm/2. Busbars in a duct, see page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21160.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100/250
Vertical
Fixed
Direct rotary handle
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
5
Device No. of
devices
per row
No. of
vert.
mod.
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Long
terminal
shields
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/
160
1
4 x 3P, 3 x 4P
7 03041 03243 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
NS250 1
4 x 3P, 3 x 4P
9 03041 03243 03802 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi
NS100/
160
1
4 x 3P, 3 x 4P
8 03041 03244 +
29285
(collar)
03801 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi
NS250
1
4 x 3P, 3 x 4P
11 03041 03244 +
29285
(collar)
03802 03802 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
(1) With or without spreaders,whatever the distribution solution (Powerclip insulated busbars,
Polybloc distribution block, etc.).
Accessories
D
D
3
8
0
7
8
8
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
9
Blanking plate for vertical NS100/250 (03249): see page 100E21100.fm/2.
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
6
Device Polybloc
250 A
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04033 03002
4P 04034 03002
Vigi NS100/250 3P 04033 03002
4P 04034 03002
Distribution using a Polybloc distribution block (04034) on an
adjustable modular device rail (03002).
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
4 Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Univ. power
supply block
(w/o connection)
connection Short terminal
shields (set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS (1 device centred on mounting plate)
NS100/250 04061 + 04062 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
see
page 300E22010.fm/3
Vigi
NS100/250
04061 must be made 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
see
page 300E22010.fm/3
Distribution via Powerclip insulated busbars and a 250 A
universal power supply block (04061) (supplied without
connection) + connection (04062).
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Rear busbars, see
page 300E22020.fm/2.
Busbars in a duct, see
page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21200.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Interpact INS-INV250/630
Horizontal
Direct front handle

Installation
Without cable duct: with connection block
D
D
3
8
0
6
6
9 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Connection block
cables via
top
cables
via bottom
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 5 03030 03231 03801 04066 or 04067
Interpact INS-INV250 with incoming connection block (04066).
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
0
With cable duct: direct connection to the device
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 4 03030 03231 29324
INS-INV320/630
cables via top
9 03070 03271 03803 32565
INS-INV320/630
cables via bottom
6 03070 03271 32565
Direct connection to Interpact INS-INV250.
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
6 Device Polybloc
250 A
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Distribution using Polybloc (4P).
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
9
Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Power supply block Powerclip busbars
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 04060 see page 300E22010.fm/3
INS-INV320/400 04070 see page 300E22010.fm/3
INS-INV500/630 04071 see page 300E22010.fm/3
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Distribution via Powerclip insulated busbars and NS250 power
supply block (04060).
Rear busbars,
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Multi-stage busbars,
see page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21200.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Interpact INS-INV250/630
Vertical
Direct front handle
Lateral handle
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
1 Device No. of
vertical
modules
(1)

Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Long
terminal
shield
(set of 2)
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 front
handle
8 03040 03248 03801 03802 29324
INS-INV250 lateral
handle
8 03032 03806 03802 29324
INS-INV320/400 front
handle
10 03073 03274 32565
INS-INV500/630 front
handle
12 03073 03274 03802 32565
(1) With or without spreaders.
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
7 Device Polybloc Modular rail
250 A adjustable
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250
front handle
3P 04033 03002
4P 04034 03002
INS-INV250
lateral handle
3P 04033 + 04037 03003
4P 04034 + 04037 03003
04037: copper spacer.
Distribution using a Polybloc distribution block (04034) on an
adjustable modular device rail (03002)..
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
8
Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Power supply
block
(w/o
connection)
+ connection Short terminal
shield
(set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 04061 + 04062 29322 see
page 300E22010.fm/3
INS-INV320/630 04074 must be made 32563 see
page 300E22010.fm/3
Distribution via Powerclip insulated busbars and a 250 A
universal power supply block (04061) (without connection) +
connection (04062).
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
1
Rear busbars,
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Multi-stage busbars,
see page 300E22030.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21210.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Manual source changeover
system
Fixed NS100/250, front connection
Direct rotary handle
Source changeover system with
mechanical interlocking
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
5 Compact NS with direct rotary handle
NS100/250 10 03043 03245 03802 03803
Designation Cat. no.
Interlock 29369
Coupling accessory 29358 (for 3P device)
29359 (for 4P device)
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
ON
I
OOFF
ON
I
OOFF
ON
I
OOFF
ON
I
OOFF
ON
I
OOFF
ON
I
OOFF
O
reset
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21210.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Manual source changeover
system
INS250
Front direct rotary handle
Source changeover system with
mechanical interlocking
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
6
Source changeover system with mechanical interlocking
INS250 changeover
system
9 03043 +
31064 x 2
03235 03802 03802
Designation Cat. no.
Mechanical interlock 31073
Long terminal shields
(set of 2)
29324
Complete source changeover
assembly
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
7 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Complete source changeover assembly
INS250 changeover
system
9 03043 03247 03802 03802
Designation Rating For 3P
device
For 4P
device
Complete source
changeover assembly
100 A 31140 31141
160 A 31144 31145
200 A 31142 31143
250 A 31146 31147
Designation Cat. no.
Coupling accessory 29358 (for 3P device)
29359 (for 4P device)
Long terminal shields
(set of 2)
29324
ON I
OFF
O
ON I ON I ON I
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21400.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Presentation
General
A rigid modular rail
Made using an aluminium alloy, the rail design is extremely rigid. The rail supports
are crimp mounted.
Fast mounting
The pre-mounted rail supports have positioning studs to guide the rail at the rear of
the enclosure.
Only two mounting screws are required.
Multiple functions
A number of devices clip directly onto the rear of the rails, including 80 A and 200 A
Multiclip distribution blocks, all horizontal cable-running accessories such as cable
straps and trunking supports, as well as the supports for earth bars.
Supply from all directions
Supply to the rows, using comb busbars or Multiclip distribution blocks, can be via:
b a Polybloc distribution block installed on the incoming device
b Powerclip insulated busbars installed behind the devices
b multi-stage busbars installed in a lateral duct
b flat busbars installed at the rear of the enclosure.
Distribution blocks
Multiclip distribution blocks
Fast and secure front connection using spring terminals.
Particularly reliable connections, will not loosen over time, insensitive to vibrations
and thermal variations.
All types of modular devices can be mixed.
Easy balancing of phases.
Interchangeable devices.
Easy installation upgrades.
Fully insulated.
Comb busbars
Direct connection to device terminals or via a connector.
Fully insulated.
Can be cut to length.
Cable running
Cable straps
Easy and fast to install.
Low cost.
Trunking
Perfectly integrated cable running.
Attractive.
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
2
Distribution using Powerclip busbars:
see page 300E22010.fm/3.
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
3
Distribution using Distribloc in a Pack wall-mount enclosure:
see page 100E22010.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21400.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Multi 9 devices
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
3
Device No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail Modular front
plate
All Multi 9 devices
All supply systems (comb busbars,
Multiclip) with cable straps and trunking
sections
4 03001 03204
Multi 9 devices y 40 A
Supply via 63/80 A Multiclip or comb
busbars with cable straps
3 03001 03203
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
Note: For a modular row with a 160 A (half row) and 200 A Multiclip distribution block positioned
directly below a non-modular mounting plate (Compact, Interpact, etc.), or at the top of a
switchboard, add one vertical module (i.e. 4 + 1) and a plain upstream front plate (03801).
Supply: 200 A Multiclip.
Cable running: trunking.
Mounting requires 4 vertical modules.
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
8
Supply: 80 A Multiclip.
Cable running: cable straps.
Mounting requires 3 vertical modules.
NG125 circuit breaker
Device No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail Modular front
plate
D
D
3
8
2
4
1
7 NG125 circuit breaker
NG125, Vigi NG125 5 03001 03205
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
Width of NG125 circuit breakers: NG125 3P : 9 Multi 9 modules
NG125 4P : 12 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NG125 3P : 18 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NG125 4P : 21 Multi 9 modules
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
D
D
3
8
0
6
8
6
Device No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular front
plate
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
NSA125/160
Vigi NSA125/160
5 03002 03205
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
Note: To mix an NSA125/160 circuit breaker with Multi 9 modular devices, order (with the device)
the symmetrical rail + raiser set(28041).
Width of devices: NSA125/160 3P: 10 Multi 9 modules
NSA125/160 4P: 14 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NSA125/160 3P: 24 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NSA125/160 4P: 27 Multi 9 modules
INS switch-disconnector
D
D
3
8
0
6
8
5
Device No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail Modular front
plate
INS40/160
INS40/160 4 03001 03204
INS100/160
with long terminal shields
5 03001 03205
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
Width of devices: INS40/80: width 10 Multi 9 modules
INS100/160: width 15 Multi 9 modules
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21400.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Powerclip insulated busbars
Busbar selection
see page 300E22010.fm/3.
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
9
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
4
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
2
Tap-off blocks for insulated busbars (04151). Supply to a 200 A Multiclip distribution block
(04021).
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
0
Connection 04145. Cover for connection
04150.
Rear busbars
Busbar selection
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
3
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
4
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
5
200 A Multiclip connection (04029). 125 A connection to a comb busbar (04145).
Busbars in a duct
Busbar selection
see page 300E22030.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
6
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
7
Supply to a 200 A Multiclip distribution block
(04024).
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21400.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Distribloc distribution block
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
8 Designation
125 A Distribloc distribution block (04045)
160 A Distribloc distribution block (04046)
see
page 100E22010.fm/2
Multiclip distribution blocks
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
5 Designation
Multiclip, 80 A, 4P (04004)
Multiclip, 63 A, 4P, 1/2 row (04008)
Multiclip, 200 A, 2P (04012)
Multiclip, 200 A, 3P (04013)
Multiclip, 200 A, 4P (04014)
Multiclip, 160 A, 4P, 1/2 row (04018)
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and Powerclip insulated busbars
(04021)
see
page 100E22100.fm/2
Comb busbars
D
D
3
8
0
7
5
5 Designation
Comb busbars see
page 120E50050.fm/2
Cable running
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
2 Designation
Cable straps12 vertical cable straps (04264)
2 covers, 1-meter long, for vertical cable straps (04263)
12 horizontal cable straps (04239)
4 covers, 430 mm long, for horizontal cable straps (04243)
see
page 100E22600.fm/2
Trunking
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, L = 450 mm (04257)
Vertical section, 80 x 60 mm, L = 2 m (04267)
12 horizontal trunking supports (04255)
12 vertical trunking supports (04265)
Blanking plates
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
5 Designation
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, L = 1 m (03220)
4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, L = 90 mm (03221)
see
page 100E21100.fm/2
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21510.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Industrial control devices

Series D and K contactors
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
3 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length (mm)
Rear modular
rail
Plain front plate
Series D and K contactors
Series D and K
contactors y 40 A
3 432 03004 03803
GV2/GV3 circuit breakers
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
7 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful length
of rail
(mm)
Modular rail Cut-out front
plate
GV2/GV3 circuit breakers
GV2 3 432 03001 03203
GV3 5 432 03002 03205
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
Accessories
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
6
Modular blanking plates: see page 100E21100.fm/2.
GV2 + contactor combination
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
8 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful length
of rail
(mm)
Rear modular
rail
Transparent
front plate
Plain
front plate
GV2 + contactor combination
GV2 + Series D or
K contactor y 40 A
5 432 03004 03342 03801
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
TeSys U model
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
9 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful length
of rail
(mm)
Rear modular
rail
Transparent
front plate
TeSys U model
TeSys U model 4 432 03004 03342
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21510.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Industrial control devices


LH4 soft starters
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
1 Device No. of vertical
modules
Useful length
of rail
(mm)
Rear
modular rail
Plain front
plate
LH4 soft starters
LH4 N1
LH4 N2
4 432 03004 03804
Width of devices:
LH4 N1: 45 mm.
LH4 N2: 90 mm.
Tego Power
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
0 Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Transparent
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Tego Power
Tego Power 2 to 8
feeders
8 03168 03343 03801 03801
LV/LV transformer
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
2 Device No. of vertical
modules
Recessed slotted mounting
plate
Plain
front plate
LV/LV transformer
ABL6 up to 400 VA 4 03171 03804
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21510.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Industrial control devices

Cable running and distribution
Multiclip distribution blocks
see page 100E21100.fm/2
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
5
Comb busbars
see the Telemecanique catalogue
D
D
3
8
0
7
5
5
Cable running
see page 100E22600.fm/2
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
2
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21510.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Industrial control devices

Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21600.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Other devices
On a modular rail
On a slotted plate

Installation on a modular rail
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
1 Designation Depth behind front
plate (mm)
Useful length
(mm)
Cat. no.
Modular rail
Modular rail (adjustable) 47 to 114 432 03002
Recessed modular rail 158 432 03003
Rear modular rail 128 432 03004
Modular rail, with 4 holes,
dia. 6.4 mm, 450 mm between
centres
1600 04226
Modular rail (adjustable) (03002).
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
5
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
2
Plain and transparent front plates:
see page 100E21050.fm/2.
Recessed modular device rail (03003).
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
3
Rear modular rail (03004).
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
0
Modular rail, L = 1600 mm (04226).
Installation on a slotted plate
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
6 Designation No. of
vertical
modules
Useful
height
(mm)
Useful
width
(mm)
Depth behind
front plate
Cat. no.
Slotted mounting plate
Flat slotted mounting
plate
4 200 440 140 03170
Recessed slotted
mounting plate
4 200 420 160 03171
6 300 420 160 03172
9 450 450 160 03173
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
5
Flat slotted mounting plate (03170).
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
7
Plain and transparent front plates:
see page 100E21050.fm/2.
Recessed slotted mounting plate (03171).
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21600.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Other devices
Accessories

M5 self-tapping screws
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
6 Designation Cat. no.
20 M5 self-tapping screws for mounting on functionnal uprights 03183
Clip-nuts for slotted mounting
plates
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
2 Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates
M4 (03180)
M5 (03181)
M6 (03182)
see
page 100E21110.fm/2
Clip-nuts for modular rails
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
3 Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for modular rails
M4 (03164)
M5 (03165)
M6 (03166)
see
page 100E21110.fm/2
Pratic raiser
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
4 Designation Cat. no.
5 Pratic raisers (04224) see
page 100E21110.fm/2
Hexagonal spacers
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
5 Designation Cat. no.
M5 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 9 mm (03185)
H = 23 mm (03186)
H = 55 mm (03187)
see
page 100E21110.fm/2
M6 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 9 mm (03195)
H = 23 mm (03196)
H = 25 mm (03198)
H = 55 mm (03197)
M8 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 10 + 40 mm (03199)
Universal angle bracket
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
1 Designation Cat. no.
2 universal angle brackets (03581) see
page 100E21110.fm/2
Catalogue numbers
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
850 mm wide functional units
Units fonctionnelles en largeur 300 mm300
mm wide functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
301E21800.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
850 mm wide
functional units
Horizontal Compact NS100/630
Fixed
Toggle

Installation
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
4 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Incoming connection block
cables via
top
or cables via
bottom
Compact NS100/630
NS100/250 5 03030 03256 03851 04066 or 04067
NS400 9 03070 03286 03853 04076 or 04076
NS630 9 03070 03286 03853 04076 or 04076
Vigicompact NS100/250
Vigi NS100/250 4 03033 03257
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
5 Device 250 A Polybloc
Compact NS
NS250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Powerclip insulated busbars
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
6 Device Power supply block Powerclip insulated busbars
Compact NS100/630
NS100/250 04060 see page 300E22010.fm/2
NS400 04070 see page 300E22010.fm/2
NS630 04071 see page 300E22010.fm/2
Vigicompact NS100/250
Vigi NS100/250 04060 see page 300E22010.fm/2
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
6
Rear busbars,
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21800.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
850 mm wide
functional units
Horizontal Interpact INS250/630

Installation
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
7 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Incoming connection block
cables via
top
or cables via
bottom
Interpact INS250
INS250 5 03030 03239 03851 04066 or 04067
INS400/630 9 03070 03287 03853 04076 or 04076
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
8 Device 250 A Polybloc
Interpact INS250
INS250 3P 04033
4P 04034
Powerclip insulated busbars
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
9 Device Power supply block Powerclip insulated busbars
Interpact INS250
INS250 04060 see page 300E22010.fm/2
INS400/630 04071 see page 300E22010.fm/2
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
6
Rear busbars,
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21820.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
850 mm wide
functional units
Modular devices
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors

Multi 9 devices
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
2 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail Modular front plate
All Multi 9 devices
All supply systems (comb busbars,
Multiclip) with cable straps or trunking
4 03006 03217
Multi 9 devices y 40 A
Supply via 63/80 A Multiclip or comb
busbars with cable straps
3 03006 03216
Note: For a modular row with a 160 A (half row) and 200 A Multiclip distribution block positioned
directly below a non-modular mounting plate (Compact, Interpact, etc.), or at the top of a
switchboard, add one vertical module (i.e. 4 + 1) and a plain upstream front plate.
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
3 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular front plate
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
NSA125/160 5 03007 03218
INS40/160 switch-disconnector
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
4 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail Modular front plate
INS160
INS40/160 4 03006 03217
INS100/160
with long terminal shields
5 03006 03218
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21820.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
850 mm wide
functional units
Modular devices
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Powerclip insulated busbars
see page 300E22010.fm/3.
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
5
Rear busbars
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
6
Distribloc distribution blocks
see page 100E22010.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
7
Multiclip distribution blocks
see page 100E22100.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
8
36-mod. Multiclip dist. blocks
see page 100E22100.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
9
Comb busbars
see page 120E50050.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
0
Cable running
see page 100E22600.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
1
Blanking plates
see page 100E21100.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
5
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21890.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
850 mm wide
functional units
Other devices
Reserve space

Slotted mounting plate
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
2 Designation No. of
vertical
modules
Useful
height
(mm)
Useful
width
(mm)
Depth behind
front plate
Cat. no.
Slotted mounting plate
Flat slotted mounting
plate
4 200 440 140 03170
Reserve space
D
D
3
8
1
9
4
3 750 mm wide plain front plate Cat. no.
3 modules (H = 150 mm) 03853
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03854
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03856
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E21890.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
850 mm wide
functional units
Other devices
Reserve space
Catalogue numbers
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
850 mm wide functional units
300 mm wide functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
300E21900.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Compact NS100/630
Vertical
Fixed
Toggle or direct rotary handle
Installation
Toggle
D
D
3
8
0
7
4
4 Device No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Long terminal
shields
Compact NS
NS100/250 9 03050 03250 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
NS400 11 03080 03280 03812 03811 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
NS630 12 03080 03280 03812 03812 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
Vigi Compact NS
Vigi NS100/250 11 03050 03252 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi NS400/630 14 03080 03282 03812 03812 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
(1) With or without spreaders.
D
D
3
8
0
7
4
3
Direct rotary handle
Device No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting plate Cut-out front plate Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Compact NS
NS100/250 9 03051 03253 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
NS400/630 12 03081 03283 32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
(1) With or without spreaders.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21900.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Compact NS100/630
Vertical
Fixed
Toggle or direct rotary handle
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
0
7
4
5
Device 250 A Polybloc Modular rail (adjustable)
Compact NS and Vigi Compact NS
NS100/250 3P 04033 03011
and Vigi 4P 04034 03011
Distribution via a Polybloc distribution block (04034) on a
modular device rail (03011).
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
5 Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Univ. power supply
block (w/o conn.)
+ connection Short terminal
shields (set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Compact NS and Vigi Compact NS
NS100/250
and Vigi
04061 + 04064 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
see
page 300E22010.fm/3
NS400/630
and Vigi
04074 + 04073 32562 (3P)
32563 (4P)
Distribution via Powerclip insulated busbars and a 250 A
universal power supply block (04061) (without connection) +
connection (04064).
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
5
Multi-stage busbars
Device Connection Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Multi-stage busbars
Designation
NS100/250
and Vigi
04065 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
see
page 300E22030.fm/2.
NS400/630
and Vigi
04075 32562 (3P)
32563 (4P)
see
page 300E22030.fm/2.
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
Rear busbars, see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21910.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Interpact INS-INV250/630
Vertical
Front, direct rotary handle

Installation
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
3 Device No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Long terminal
shields
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 9 03050 03251 29324
INS-INV320/400 10 03080 03281 32565
INS-INV500/630 12 03080 03281 03812 32565
(1) With or without spreaders.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21910.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Interpact INS-INV250/630
Vertical
Front, direct rotary handle

Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
4
Device Polybloc
250 A
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 3P 04033 03011
4P 04034 03011
Distribution via a Polybloc distribution block (04034) on an
adjustable modular device rail (03011).
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
6 Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Univ. power
supply block
(w/o conn.)
+ connection Short terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Powerclip busbars
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV250 04061 + 04064 29322 see
page 300E22010.fm/3
INS-INV320/630 04074 + 04073 32563
Distribution via Powerclip insulated busbars and a 250 A
universal power supply block (04061) (without connection) +
connection (04064).
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
6 Multi-stage busbars
Device Connection Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Multi-stage busbars
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 04065 29322 see
page 300E22030.fm/2.
INS-INV320/630 04075 32563 see
page 300E22030.fm/2.
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
7
Rear busbars, see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21920.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Modular devices
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors

Multi 9 devices
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
5 Device No. of
modules
Modular rail Modular front plate
All Multi 9 devices
All supply systems with cable straps or
trunking
4 03010 03214
Multi 9 devices y 40 A
Supply via 63 A Multiclip or comb
busbars with cable straps
3 03010 03213
Capacity of modular rail: 20 Multi 9 modules.
Width of NG125 circuit breakers: NG125 3P: 9 Multi 9 modules
NG125 4P: 12 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NG125 3P: 18 Multi 9 modules
Supply via comb busbars.
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
4
Supply via 63 A Multiclip.
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
7 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular
front plate
Downstream
front plate
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
NSA125/160 5 03011 03214 03811
Capacity of modular rail: 20 Multi 9 modules.
Note: To mix an NSA125/160 circuit breaker with Multi 9 modular devices, order (with the device)
the symmetrical rail + raiser set (28041).
Width of devices: NSA125/160 3P: 10 Multi 9 modules
NSA125/160 4P: 14 Multi 9 modules
INS switch-disconnector
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
8 Device No. of
modules
Modular rail Modular
front plate
Downstream
front plate
INS160
INS40/160 4 03010 03214
INS100/160
with long terminal shields
5 03010 03214 03811
Capacity of modular rail: 20 Multi 9 modules.
Width of devices: INS40/80: width 10 Multi 9 modules
INS100/160: width 15 Multi 9 modules
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21920.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Modular devices
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Powerclip insulated busbars
see page 300E22010.fm/3.
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
1
Rear busbars
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
3
Multi-stage busbars
see page 300E22030.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
6
Distribloc distribution blocks
see page 100E22010.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
8
Multiclip distribution blocks
see page 100E22100.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
7
Comb busbars
see page 120E50050.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
0
Cable running
see page 100E22600.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
8
Blanking plates
see page 100E22100.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
5
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21925.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Industrial control devices


Series D and K contactors
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
8
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
(mm)
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front plate
Series D and K contactors
Series D and K
contactors y 40 A
3 180 03011 03813
GV2/GV3 circuit breakers
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
8
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
(mm)
Modular
rail
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front
plate
Downstream
front plate
GV2/GV3 circuit breakers
GV2 3 180 03010 03213
GV3 5 180 03011 03213 03811 03811
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
Accessories
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
6
Modular blanking plates, see page 100E21100.fm/2
GV2 + contactor combination
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
9
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length (mm)
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Transparent
front plate
Plain front plate
GV2 + contactor combination
GV2 + Series D or K
contactor y 40 A
5 180 03011 03352 03811
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
TeSys U model
D
D
3
8
1
1
9
0
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail length (mm) Modular rail
(adjustable)
Transparent
front plate
TeSys U model
TeSys U model 4 180 03011 03352
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21925.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Industrial control devices

LH4 soft starters
D
D
3
8
1
1
9
1 Device No. of vertical
modules
Useful rail length (mm) Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front
plate
LH4 soft starters
LH4 N1
LH4 N2
4 180 03011 03814
Width of devices:
LH4 N1 : 45 mm LH4 N1: 45 mm
LH4 N2: 90 mm.
LV/LV transformer
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
9 Device No. of vertical
modules
Slotted mounting plate Plain front
plate
LV/LV transformer
ABL6
up to 400 VA
4 03175 03814
Cable running and distribution
Multiclip distribution blocks
see page 100E21100.fm/2
D
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
9
Comb busbars
see the Telemecanique catalogue
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
0
Cable running
see page 100E22600.fm/2
D
D
3
8
0
6
8
8
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21930.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Other devices
On a modular rail
On a slotted mounting plate

Installation on a modular rail
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
0 Designation Cat. no.
Modular rail
Modular rail 03010
Adjustable modular rail 03011
Modular rail, L = 1600 mm
with 4 holes, dia. 6.4 mm, 450 mm between centres
04226
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
2
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
1
Modular rail (03010). Adjustable modular rail (03011).
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
0
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
5
Modular rail, L = 1600 mm (04226). Plain and transparent front plates, see
page 100E21050.fm/2.
Installation on a slotted mounting
plate
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
4 Designation No. of
modules
Useful
height (mm)
Useful width
(mm)
Depth behind
front plate
Cat. no.
Slotted mounting plate
Flat slotted mounting
plate
4 200 mm 172 140 03175
Recessed slotted
mounting plate
4 200 mm 172 160 03176
6 300 mm 172 160 03177
9 450 mm 172 160 03178
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
5
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
9
Recessed slotted
mounting plate.
Flat slotted mounting plate.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E21930.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
300 mm wide functional
units
Other devices
Accessories
M5 self-tapping screws
Designation Cat. no.
20 M5 self-tapping screws for mounting on functional uprights 03183
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
6
Clip-nuts for slotted mounting
plates
Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates
M4 (03180)
M5 (03181)
M6 (03182)
see
page 100E21110.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
2
Clip-nuts for modular rails
Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for modular rails
M4 (03164)
M5 (03165)
M6 (03166)
see
page 100E21110.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
3
Pratic raiser
Designation Cat. no.
5 Pratic raisers (04224) see
page 100E21110.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
4
Hexagonal spacers
Designation Cat. no.
M5 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 9 mm (03185)
H = 23 mm (03186)
H = 55 mm (03187)
see
page 100E21110.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
5
M6 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 9 mm (03195)
H = 23 mm (03196)
H = 25 mm (03198)
H = 55 mm (03197)
M8 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 10 + 40 mm (03199)
Universal angle bracket
Designation Cat. no.
2 universal angle brackets (03581) see
page 100E21110.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
1
Catalogue numbers
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
850 mm wide functional units
Units fonctionnelles en largeur 300 mm300
mm wide functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
300E22000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Main distribution
Powerclip busbars

Powerclip busbars
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
4
Powerclip busbars are compact and fully insulated
(IPxxB).
They are supplied ready for installation in the
switchboard.
There are three and four-pole versions with ratings
from 125 to 630 A.
Available in four lengths, they can by cut every 150 or
200 mm, depending on the rating (see
page 300E22010.fm/3).
P
D
3
9
0
4
5
4
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
5
Additional 35 mm blocks installed on the
connection between the device and the busbars.
Powerclip tap-off blocks for 6 and 10 mm
cables.
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
6
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
7
Clip-on covers insulate the cable lugs. 200 A connection for a Multiclip distribution
block.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Main distribution
Polybloc centralised distribution block
400 A rear busbars
630 A multi-stage busbars
Polybloc centralised distribution
block
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
4
The Polybloc distribution block is designed for optimum
installation directly downstream of horizontal Compact
NS100/250 and Interpact INS250 devices.
Mounting is very fast. It simply hooks onto the device
mounting plate. Electrical connections are made
directly to the device terminals.
It has the same width as the devices and does not
require extra space in the switchboard.
The connection terminals are slanted to facilitate cable
entry and reduce the space required behind the front
plate (see page 300E22040.fm/2)
400 A rear busbars
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
2
The rear busbars are mounted directly on the rear of
enclosures.
There are three and four-pole versions with ratings
from 160 to 400 A.
Available in two lengths, 1000 and 1400 mm, they can
be cut as needed (see page 300E22020.fm/2).
630 A multi-stage busbars
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
3
The multi-stage busbars are installed in a 300 mm wide
duct.
They are particularly useful for distribution to two
enclosures on each side of the duct.
All connection points are easily accessible from the
front.
The inclination of the bars facilitates connections and
improves cable running.
There are three and four-pole versions with ratings
from 160 to 630 A.
Available in two lengths, 1000 and 1400 mm, they can
be cut as needed (see page 300E22030.fm/2).
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
630 A Powerclip busbars

Presentation
P
D
3
9
0
4
6
1
Powerclip busbars are compact and fully
insulated (IPxxB).
They are supplied ready for installation in
the switchboard.
There are three and four-pole versions with
ratings from 125 to 630 A.
Available in four lengths, they can be cut
every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the
rating.
Composition
Powerclip busbars are made up of ETP H12 channelled copper bars with threaded
M6 holes every 25 mm.
They are mounted on insulated bases and can be cut every 150 or 200 mm,
depending on the rating.
The ends of the busbars are plugged.
Clip-on covers protect against direct contact from the front. The covers can be easily
cut for the connections to the devices.
Installation
The busbars are supplied with supports that screw to the functional uprights of
enclosures or to an adapter in a cubicle.
They can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating.
Electrical characteristics
Permissible current of
the busbars (A)
Rated short-time withstand
current Icw (kA rms / 1
second)
Rated peak withstand current Ipk
(k)
125 8.5 20
160 10 30
250 13 30
400 20 52.5
630 25 52.5
125 A Powerclip busbars
Available in two lengths (450 and 750 mm) in three and four-pole versions.
The busbars can be cut to length every 150 mm.
They are supplied with clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can
be cut as needed.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
8
Powerclip busbars 125 A Cat. no.
Three-pole L = 450 mm 04103
L = 750 mm 04107
Four-pole L = 450 mm 04104
L = 750 mm 04108
Busbar connection
Four 125 A connections
(for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals)
04145
95 mm tunnel terminals for INS : cat. no. 28947 (set of 3)
cat. no. 28948 (set of 4)
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
630 A Powerclip busbars

160/630 A Powerclip busbars
Available in two lengths (1000 and 1400 mm) in three and four-pole versions. The
busbars can be cut to length every 200 mm.
Prefabricated connections are available for the devices.
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
0
Powerclip busbars 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A
Three-pole L = 1000 mm 04111 04112 04113 04114
L = 1400 mm 04116 04117 04118 04119
Four-pole L = 1000 mm 04121 04122 04123 04124
L = 1400 mm 04126 04127 04128 04129
Connection between incoming device and Powerclip busbars Cat. no.
Power supply block (with connection) NS250 04060
NS400 04070
NS630 04071
Universal power supply block
(without connection)
100/250 A 04061
400/630 A 04074
Connection for universal power supply block Vertical NS100/250 04062
Vertical NS100/250 in duct 04064
Vertical NS400/630 in duct 04073
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
1
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
2
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
5
NS400 power supply block (04070) between
incoming device and busbars.
NS250 power supply block (04060) between
busbars and Compact NS250.
250 A universal power supply block (04061) +
250 A connection (04062) between incoming
device and busbars.
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and Powerclip busbars Cat. no.
200 A 4P connection for Multiclip (supplied with mounting hardware) 04021
35 mm additional blocks Cat. no.
35 mm additional blocks 3P 04155
4P 04156
Busbar connection Cat. no.
4 160 A connections (for NSA160) 04146
35 mm 4P additional blocks (04156).
Accessories
Powerclip tap-off blocks
Each block can be used to connect:
b one 6 mm and one 10 mm cable (04151)
b one 16 mm cables (04152).
Equipped with spring terminals.
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
4
Designation Cat. no.
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 6 mm + 10 mm terminals 04151
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 16 mm terminals 04152
Connection cover
Clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can be cut
as needed.
They maintain IPxxB with 90angle lugs and/or cable sizes u 16 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
5
Designation Cat. no.
8 IPxxB covers for Powerclip busbars 04150
8.8 class mounting hardware
Used for electrical connections to the copper bars.
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 CHC M6 x 12 mm screws for Powerclip busbars 04158
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22020.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
400 A rear busbars

Presentation
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
8
The rear busbars are mounted directly on
the uprights of the framework.
There are three and four-pole versions with
ratings from 160 to 400 A.
Available in two lengths, 1000 and
1400 mm, they can be cut as needed.
The connection with a Compact or Interpact
incoming device occupies two vertical
modules (50 mm each).
Composition
Flat, copper bars with threaded M6 holes every 25 mm for connection along the
entire length of the busbars.
The insulating supports can receive a fifth bar, 15 x 5 mm or 20 x 5 mm, to create an
earth bar.
Installation
The busbars are mounted directly on the functional uprights of enclosures or on an
adapter (03595) in a cubicle.
Connection
b 16 mm to 50 mm flexible cables, with crimped lugs
b insulated flexible bars (see page 100E22500.fm/2).
Electrical characteristics
b rated peak withstand current Ipk (k)
- 30 k for 160 A busbars
- 40 k for 250 A busbars
- 55 k for 400 A busbars
b rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V
Busbar calculation
Busbar size and distance between supports
The table below indicates:
b the size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the
busbars
b the distance between supports, depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw).
Rating
(A)
Size of bars
(mm)
Distance between support centres
(mm)
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
10 13 15 20 25
160 15 x 5
250 20 x 5
400 32 x 5 450 300 225
Note: For a detailed calculation of the busbars, see page 100E42220.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22020.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
400 A rear busbars

Busbar selection
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
7 Copper bars Rating (A) Size of bars (mm) Cat. no.
Four copper bars, L = 1000 160 15 x 5 04161
250 20 x 5 04162
400 32 x 5 04163
Four copper bars, L = 1400 160 15 x 5 04171
250 20 x 5 04172
400 32 x 5 04173
Busbar supports
Rear busbar support 04191
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
8
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
9
Copper bars. Busbar supports.
Accessories
Rear busbar barrier
Protects against direct contact with the busbar connections.
Supplied with mounting hardware.
D
D
3
8
1
1
9
2
Designation Cat. no.
Rear busbar barrier, H = 100 mm 04198
04198.
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
6 125 A connection
For direct supply to comb busbars from the rear busbars in the switchboard.
Designation Cat. no.
Set of four flexible 125 A connections, L = 230 mm 04145
A male ferrule for a tunnel terminal is crimped on one end.
A 90angle lug with a hole is crimped on the other end.
160 A connection
For direct supply to an NSA160 from the rear busbars in the switchboard.
Designation Cat. no.
4 160 A connections 04146
04145. A cylindrical ferrule is crimped on one end and a 45lug on the other. L = 250 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
7 200 A connection
For supply of a 200 A Multiclip distribution block from the rear busbars in the
switchboard.
Designation Cat. no.
Rear busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block 04029
Connection between busbars
For electrical connections between two sets of rear busbars.
Designation Cat. no.
04029. 4 copper angle brackets, 250A 04190
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
8
8.8 class mounting hardware
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 M6 x 20 bolts (20 bolts + 20 nuts +40 contact washers) 04194
Set of 40 M6 x 16 screws (40 screws + 40 contact washers) 04195
04190.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22030.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
630 A multi-stage busbars

Presentation
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
5
The multi-stage busbars are installed in a
300 mm wide duct.
They are particularly useful for distribution to
two enclosures on each side of the duct.
All connection points are easily accessible
from the front.
The inclination of the bars facilitates
connections and improves cable running.
There are three and four-pole versions with
ratings from 160 to 630 A.
Available in two lengths, 1000 and
1400 mm, they can be cut as needed.
Composition
Flat, copper bars with threaded M6 holes every 25 mm for connection along the
entire length of the busbars. There are 8.2 mm diameter holes at each end for supply.
The staggered supports are made of an insulating material.
An optional, insulating, front barrier is available to protect against direct contact from
the front.
Installation
The busbars are installed in a 300 mm wide duct for the enclosures.
Connection
b 16 mm to 50 mm flexible cables, with crimped lugs
b insulated flexible bars (see page 100E22500.fm/2).
Electrical characteristics
b rated peak withstand current Ipk (k)
- 30 k for 160 A busbars
- 40 k for 250 A busbars
- 55 k for 400 A busbars
- 55 k for 630 A busbars
b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V.
Busbar calculation
Busbar size and distance between supports
The table below indicates:
b the size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the
busbars
b the distance between supports, depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw).
Rating (A) Size of bars (mm) Distance between support centres
(mm)
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
10 13 15 20 25
160 15 x 5
250 20 x 5
400 32 x 5 450 300
630 32 x 8
Note: For a detailed calculation of the busbars, see page 100F42230.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22030.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
630 A multi-stage busbars

Busbar selection
Copper bars
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
3 Copper bars Rating (A) Size of bars (mm) Cat. no.
Four copper bars,
L = 1000 mm
160 15 x 5 04161
250 20 x 5 04162
400 32 x 5 04163
Four copper bars,
L = 1400 mm
160 15 x 5 04171
250 20 x 5 04172
400 32 x 5 04173
630 32 x 8 04174
Busbar supports
Multi-stage busbar support 04192
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
8
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
5
04192.
Accessories
Multi-stage busbar barrier
Protects against direct contact with the busbar connections from the front.
Supplied with mounting hardware.
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
6
Designation Cat. no.
Multi-stage busbar barrier, L = 1500 mm 04197
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
7
Multiclip connection
For supply to a 200 A Multiclip.
Designation Cat. no.
Multi-stage busbar 4P connection for 200 A Multiclip distribution block 04024
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
8
8.8 class mounting hardware
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 M6 x 20 bolts (20 bolts + 20 nuts +20 contact washers) 04194
Set of 40 M6 x 16 screws (40 screws + 40 contact washers) 04195
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22040.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Polybloc distribution block

General
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring
terminals. Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor
(minimum size = 1 mm
2
). Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal
variations.
Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring
terminal.
Degree of protection: IPxxB.
Advantages of spring terminals
b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required
b the fast connections make phase balancing very easy.
b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified.
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
9
250 A Polybloc distribution block
Applications
The Polybloc distribution block is designed for installation directly downstream of
Compact circuit breakers and Interpact switch-disconnectors devices up to 250 A.
It can be rapidly mounted in the horizontal position. Electrical connections are made
directly to the device terminals.
It has the same width as the devices and does not take up any additional space in
the switchboard.
The connection terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and not exceed the
bending radius of the flexible and rigid cables.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
9
Designation Cat. no.
Polybloc distribution block, 3P, 250 A 04033
Polybloc distribution block, 4P, 250 A 04034
Electrical characteristics
The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices.
Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit
breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered.
b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V
b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been
tested.
impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
Supply
Directly to the terminals of the Compact NS and Interpact INS devices up to 250 A.
Distribution
Via cables, up to six 10 mm cables and three 16 mm cables per phase.
Installation
Directly on the mounting plates of horizontally mounted Compact NS100/250 and
Interpact INS250 devices in the enclosures.
It can also be mounted downstream of vertically mounted Compact NS100/250 and
Interpact INS250 devices in the enclosures. In this case, the Polybloc is mounted on
a depth-adjustable modular rail (03002 System G) or (03402 System P).
Dimensions
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
7
Horizontally mounted Polybloc in a wall-mount enclosure
(System G).
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
2
H (mm) L (mm) P (mm)
Polybloc, 3P 105 138 63
Polybloc, 4P 140 138 63
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
6
Vertically mounted Polybloc on a depth-adjustable modular rail
(03402) in a cubicle (System P).
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22040.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Polybloc distribution block

35 mm additional blocks
These blocks with screw terminals can be mounted on the 250 A Polybloc for
connection of two 35 mm cables per phase.
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
3 Designation Cat. no.
35 mm 3P additional blocks (3 blocks) 04155
35 mm 4P additional blocks (4 blocks) 04156
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
4
Additional blocks with a Polybloc distribution block.
160 A Polybloc distribution block
The 160 A Polybloc is made up of individual elements that can be used alone or with
others to make two-pole, three-pole or four-pole distribution blocks.
Mounting is very fast. It clips onto a modular rail and is supplied by cables via a tunnel
terminal.
The connection spring terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and bending of
the flexible and rigid cables.
It is supplied with a cover that also guides the cables.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
0
Designation Cat. no.
Polybloc distribution block, 1P, 160 A 04031
Electrical characteristics
b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V
b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations were tested.
The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices.
Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit
breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered.
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
Supply
Direct to a tunnel terminal, for cables up to 70 mm.
Distribution
Via cables, up to six 16 mm cables.
Installation
The blocks clip onto a modular rail.
Dimensions
Three 160 A Polybloc distribution blocks in the vertical position
on a modular rail, supplied by an NG125.
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
2
160 A Polybloc distribution block in a front plate cut-out.
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
4
38
70
95
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22450.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Terminal blocks

Terminal-block layout
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
7
In Prisma Plus wall-mount and floor-
standing enclosures, terminal blocks are
installed:
b in a duct, which may be a dedicated zone,
totally separate from the devices
b in the device compartment, at the top or
bottom.
Installation in the 300 mm wide
duct
A mounting plate, made up of two supports, is equipped with:
b a modular rail for the terminal blocks, that is 1600 mm long, can be cut to length
and has 6.4 mm holes every 450 mm
b an earth bar.
The supports have cut-outs that can be used to easily tie down the connection wires.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
9
Designation Cat. no.
Mounting brackets for terminal block and earth bar 04220
Modular rail, L = 1600 mm 04226
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22450.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Terminal blocks

Top or bottom installation
The terminal blocks are grouped on a modular rail:
b that is depth adjustable (03002)
b or mounted at the rear of the switchboard (03004). In this case, it can be raised on
supports or spacers, or turned 45on special supports.
D
D
3
8
1
4
1
0 Installation directly on the functional uprights
Designation Cat. no.
Depth-adjustable modular rail, L = 432 mm 03002
Rear modular rail, L = 432 mm 03004
Space required in switchboard
Max. cable CSA Width of terminal
block
No. of vertical
modules required
Corresponding
plain front plate
4 mm 6 mm 3 03803
Depth-adjustable modular device rail. 6 mm 8 mm 3 03803
10 mm 10 mm 5 03805
16 mm 12 mm 6 03806
D
D
3
8
1
4
1
1 Installation of the rail on 45supports
Designation Cat. no.
Two 45supports for modular rail 03005
D
D
3
8
1
4
1
2 Installation of the rail on fixing brackets
Designation Cat. no.
Two fixing brackets on functional uprights
H = 15 mm 04206
H = 45 mm 04207
H = 80 mm 04208
D
D
3
8
1
4
1
3 Installation of the rail on hexagonal spacers
Designation Cat. no.
Set of four M6 hexagonal spacers
H = 9 mm 03195
H = 23 mm 03196
H = 55 mm 03197
Installation on a dedicated
mounting assembly
This mounting assembly is used to easily install and connect a large number of
terminal blocks in a minimum amount of space. It is particularly useful when a duct
is not warranted or cannot be installed.
Presentation
Mounting brackets, fixed to the functional uprights at the top or bottom of the
enclosure, is equipped with four 200 mm symmetrical rails. They are installed
vertically to facilitate cable running.
To facilitate mixing of different size terminal blocks and ensure convenient
connections from the front or the side, the distance between rails and the depth of
each rail can be adjusted.
The assembly has cut-outs that can be used to easily tie down the connection wires.
Earth bars, supplied separately, can be installed between the rows of terminal blocks
to form different configurations, e.g.:
b four sets of terminal blocks
b 3 sets of terminal blocks + one or two earth bars (L = 290 mm)
The mounting assembly occupies a height of 250 mm, i.e. five 50 mm vertical
modules.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
4
1
4
Designation Cat. no.
Mounting plate with 4 vertical DIN rails for terminal blocks 04223
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22450.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Earth bars

Position of the earth bar in the
switchboard D
D
3
8
1
4
0
8
In Prisma Plus wall-mount and floor-
standing enclosures, the earth bar is
installed:
b in a duct, which may be a dedicated zone,
totally separate from the devices
b in the device compartment, at the top or
bottom.
Earth bar
Presentation
The earth bar can be:
b a bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with a 35
mm tunnel terminal and on which earth blocks with spring terminals can be clipped
b an earth bar (200 or 450 mm long), equipped with a 35 mm
2
tunnel terminal and
clamps with captive screws.
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
0
Designation Cat. no.
Bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with
a 35 mm tunnel terminal (for earth blocks with spring terminals)
04201
4 earth blocks with 12 x 4 mm spring terminals (L = 75 mm) 04214
4 earth blocks with 3 x 16 mm spring terminals (L = 37 mm) 04215
04215.
Earth bar with clamps Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
6 Earth bar with 40 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (L = 450 mm) 04200
2 earth bars with 20 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (L = 200 mm) 04202
04200.
04201.
04214.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22450.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Earth bars

Top or bottom installation
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
1 Earth bar mounted on rear of modular rail
Designation Cat. no.
2 supports for earth bar on modular rail 04205
Earth bar used:
b 450 mm earth bar with clamps or spring terminals in an enclosure
b 200 mm earth bar with clamps in the 300 mm wide duct.
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
6 Earth bar mounted at rear of enclosure
Earth bar used:
b 450 mm earth bar with clamps or spring terminals in an enclosure
b 200 mm earth bar with clamps in the 300 mm wide duct.
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
2 Earth bar mounted on 45supports
Designation Cat. no.
Two 45supports for modular rail 03005
Earth bar used:
b 450 mm earth bar with clamps or spring terminals in an enclosure
b 200 mm earth bar with clamps in the 300 mm wide duct.
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
3 Earth bar mounted on fixing brackets
Designation Cat. no.
2 fixing brackets for the earth bar on the functional uprights
H = 15 mm 04206
H = 45 mm 04207
H = 80 mm 04208
Earth bar used:
b 450 mm earth bar with clamps or spring terminals in an enclosure
b 200 mm earth bar with clamps in the 300 mm wide duct.
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
4 Earth bar mounted on hexagonal spacers
Designation Cat. no.
Set of four M6 hexagonal spacers
H = 9 mm 03195
H = 23 mm 03196
H = 55 mm 03197
Earth bar used:
b 450 mm earth bar with clamps or spring terminals in an enclosure
b 200 mm earth bar with clamps in the 300 mm wide duct.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22450.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Earth bars
Installation on the side
The earth bar can be installed vertically on two fixing brackets secured to a functional
upright.
This solution saves considerable space in the device zone and avoids the need for
the 300 mm wide duct.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
5
Designation Cat. no.
2 fixing brackets for the earth bar on the functional uprights
H = 15 mm 04206
H = 45 mm 04207
H = 80 mm 04208
Earth bar used:
b earth bar with clamps or spring terminals.
Installation in the 300 mm wide
duct
A mounting plate (04220), made up of two supports, is equipped with:
b a 1600 mm modular rail (04226) for terminal blocks
b an earth bar.
The supports have cut-outs that can be used to easily tie down the connection wires.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
8
Designation Cat. no.
Mounting plate for terminal block and earth bar 04220
Earth bar used:
b earth bar with clamps or spring terminals.
Installation on a dedicated
mounting plate
The mounting plate for terminal blocks (04223) can be equipped with two 200 mm
earth bars with clamps.
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
3 Designation Cat. no.
Mounting plate with 4 vertical DIN rails for terminal blocks 04223
Earth bar used:
b 200 mm earth bar with clamps.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22450.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Neutral bars

Neutral bar
A neutral bar is created by inserting insulating spacers behind an earth bar.
Designation Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
1
4
1
7 Kit for neutral bar 04210
Catalogue numbers
System G
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22900.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Partitioning

Horizontal partitioning
Presentation
The partition is a metal barrier installed in a wall-mount enclosure, a floor-standing
enclosure or a 300 mm wide duct.
It is used to:
b separate the functional units from one another
b create a physical separation between devices and a terminal block, for example.
It is mounted directly on the functional uprights.
Lateral and rear knock-outs are available for cable running or the installation of
busbars at the rear of the switchboard.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
4
1
8
Designation Cat. no.
Horizontal partition
for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 04331
for a duct, W = 300 mm 04332
D
D
3
8
1
4
1
9
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E22900.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Partitioning

Vertical partitioning
Presentation
The metal partition creates a physical separation between the device compartment
and the 300 mm wide duct of a wall-mount enclosure or a floor-standing enclosure.
It is used to:
b separate the devices from busbars or a distribution block installed in the duct
b set up a special zone for terminal blocks in the duct.
There are knock-outs for cable running.
It can be cut to length every 150 mm and can be used for partitioning in a 33-module
floor-standing enclosure (H = 1830 mm).
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
0
Designation Cat. no.
Vertical partition 04330
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
1
Catalogue numbers
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
850 mm wide functional units
Units fonctionnelles en largeur 300 mm300
mm wide functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
300E23000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 wall-mount
enclosures
Presentation

Carefully designed in every detail,
Prisma Plus wall-mount enclosures are
the solution for all common switchboard
configurations up to 630 A:
b a wide range with eight heights from 330
to 1380 mm, in 150 mm steps
b two widths:
v 595 mm for devices
v 305 mm for cables, terminal blocks,
busbars or devices
b can be combined side-by-side and one on
top of another
b a standard degree of protection IP30 (with
or without a door) that can be upgraded to
IP43
b a structure designed to facilitate fast and
total access at all times to the devices and
all the connection points in the switchboard
b a discreet appearance that blends well in
commercial settings, including entry halls or
passageways
b colour RAL9001.
Prisma Plus wall-mount enclosures comply
with standard EN 50298.
P
D
3
9
0
4
6
3
Combination of a wall-mount enclosure with a 300 mm wide duct.
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
4
The entire front can be removed for fast, direct access to all the devices.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 wall-mount
enclosures
Presentation

P
D
3
9
0
5
5
2
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
3
The structure is made up of a rigid rear panel
with four screw-on, metal, corner struts.
The enclosures are easily mounted on the wall
using a practical system based on a hinged
fork.
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
5
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
6
The sides slip naturally into place with the help
of the positioning guides.
Only four screws are required to secure the
cover panels.
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
7
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
8
Wall-mount enclosures and the 300 mm wide ducts can be easily combined using metal gussets.
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
9
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
0
Door handles are equipped with keylocks (405 keys) and can be fitted with other locks or inserts.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 floor-standing
enclosures
Presentation

Carefully designed in every detail,
Prisma Plus floor-standing enclosures are
the solution for all common switchboard
configurations up to 630 A:
b three heights from 1530 to 1830 mm,
including a 150 mm plinth
b two widths:
v 595 mm for devices
v 305 mm for cables, terminal blocks,
busbars or devices
b side-by-side combinations
b a standard degree of protection IP30 (with
or without a door) that can be upgraded to
IP43
b a structure designed to facilitate fast and
total access at all times to the devices and
all the connection points in the switchboard
b a discreet appearance that blends well in
commercial settings, including entry halls or
passageways
Prisma Plus floor-standing enclosures
comply with standard EN 50298.
P
D
3
9
0
4
7
6
Combination of a basic floor-standing enclosure with a 300 mm wide duct.
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
4
The entire front can be removed for fast, direct access to all the devices.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 floor-standing
enclosures
Presentation
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
5
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
3
The sides slip naturally into place with the help
of the positioning guides.
The enclosures are easily mounted on the wall
using a practical system based on a hinged
fork.
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
6
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
1
Only four screws are required to secure the
cover panels.
The front of the plinth can be removed to
facilitate spreading of cables and fixing to the
floor.
P
D
3
9
0
5
5
9
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
0
The comfortable handles drive the door locking bolts. They are equipped with keylocks (405
keys) and can be fitted with other locks or inserts.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 wall-mount
enclosures

Wall-mount enclosure (IP30)
D
D
3
8
0
6
2
2
D
D
3
8
0
6
2
3
D
D
3
8
0
6
2
4
D
D
3
8
0
6
1
8
No. of vertical
modules
Height of
enclosure
Enclosure Plain door Transparent
door
Wall-mount enclosure (IP30)
6 330 08102 08122 08132
9 480 08103 08123 08133
12 630 08104 08124 08134
15 780 08105 08125 08135
18 930 08106 08126 08136
21 1080 08107 08127 08137
24 1230 08108 08128 08138
27 1380 08109 08222 08232
b reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and keylock
(key 405). For other possibilities, see page 100E23000.fm/2.
Duct, W = 300 mm (IP30)
D
D
3
8
0
6
2
5
D
D
3
8
0
6
2
6
D
D
3
8
0
6
2
7
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
8
No. of vertical
modules
Height of duct Duct, W = 300
mm
Plain door Transparent
door
Duct (IP30)
6 330 08172 08182
9 480 08173 08183
12 630 08174 08184
15 780 08175 08185
18 930 08176 08186
21 1080 08177 08187 08197
24 1230 08178 08188 08198
27 1380 08179 08282 08292
b the duct is supplied with a combination kit for the enclosure
b reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and keylock
(key 405). For other possibilities, see page 100E23000.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
8
Duct front plate, see page 100E21050.fm/2.
Canopy (IP31)
The addition of a canopy over the wall-mount enclosure (and the duct) equipped with
a door ensures compliance with the degree of protection IP31 (see
page 300E23010.fm/2).
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
7
Gasket (IP43)
When the wall-mount enclosure (and the duct) is equipped with a canopy, a gasket
for the door of the wall-mount enclosure (and the duct) ensures compliance with
the degree of protection IP43 (see page 300E23010.fm/6).


Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 wall-mount
enclosures

Side-by-side combination
Enclosure + 300 mm wide duct
The combination kit (two combination brackets) is supplied with the duct.
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is advised to use
a set of cross-members secured to the rear of the switchboard.
Catalogue numbers for ordering
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
9
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting/reinforcement cross-members for single wall-mount
enclosure and 300 mm wide duct
08812
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
0
Enclosure + enclosure
A combination kit (must be ordered) ensures the mechanical connection between the
two wall-mount enclosures.
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is mandatory to
use a set of cross-members secured to the rear of the switchboard.
Catalogue numbers for ordering
Designation Cat. no.
Combination kit 08816
Set of two lifting/reinforcement cross-members for two wall-mount enclosures 08811
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
1
Enclosure + 300 mm wide duct + enclosure
A combination kit is supplied with the duct. Only one additional combination kit must
be ordered for the mechanical connection between the two wall-mount enclosures
and the duct.
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is mandatory to
use a set of cross-members secured to the rear of the switchboard.
Catalogue numbers for ordering
Designation Cat. no.
Combination kit 08816
Set to two lifting/reinforcement cross-members for two wall-mount enclosures
and a duct
08813
Vertical combination
A combination kit (must be ordered) ensures the mechanical connection between the
two wall-mount enclosures.
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is mandatory to
use a set of combination uprights secured to the rear of the switchboard.
Catalogue numbers for ordering
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
2
Designation Cat. no.
Combination kit 08816
Two combination uprights 08817
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23010.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 floor-standing
enclosures

Floor-standing enclosure (IP30)
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
4
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
5
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
6
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
7
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
1
No. of vertical
modules
Height of
enclosure
Basic
enclosure
Enclosure
extension
Plain door Transparent
door
Floor-standing enclosure (IP30)
27 1530 08202 08212 08222 08232
30 1680 08203 08213 08223 08233
33 1830 08204 08214 08224 08234
b two basic floor-standing enclosures cannot be combined
b to create a switchboard comprising a number of enclosures, use a basic floor-
standing enclosure and one or more floor-standing enclosure extensions
b floor-standing enclosure extensions are supplied with a combination kit for the
basic floor-standing enclosure.
b reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and keylock
(key 405). For other possibilities, see page 100E23000.fm/2.
Basic floor-standing enclosure.
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
4
Floor-standing enclosure extension.
Duct, W = 300 mm (IP30)
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
8
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
9
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
0
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
2
No. of vertical
modules
Height of duct Duct, W =
300 mm
Plain door Transparent
door
Duct, W = 300 mm (IP30)
27 1530 08272 08282 08292
30 1680 08273 08283 08293
33 1830 08274 08284 08294
b the duct is supplied with a combination kit for the basic enclosure
b reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and keylock
(key 405). For other possibilities, see page 100E23000.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
8
Duct front plate, see page 100E21050.fm/2.
Canopy (IP31)
The addition of a canopy over the floor-standing enclosure (and the duct) equipped
with a door ensures compliance with the degree of protection IP31 (see
page 300E23010.fm/6).
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
7
Gasket (IP43)
When the floor-standing enclosure (and the duct) is equipped with a canopy, a
gasket for the door of the floor-standing enclosure (and the duct) ensures compliance
with the degree of protection IP43 (see page 300E23010.fm/6).
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23010.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 floor-standing
enclosures

Floor-standing enclosure
combinations
Basic enclosure + 300 mm wide duct
The combination kit (two mechanical combination brackets) is supplied with the duct.
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is advised to use
a set of cross-members secured to the rear of the switchboard.
Catalogue numbers for ordering
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
3
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting/reinforcement cross-members for basic floor-standing
enclosure and 300 mm wide duct
08812
Basic floor-standing enclosure + duct.
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
4
Basic enclosure + enclosure extension
A combination kit for mechanical connection is supplied with the floor-standing
enclosure extension.
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is mandatory to
use a set of cross-members secured to the rear of the switchboard.
Catalogue numbers for ordering
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting/reinforcement cross-members for basic floor-standing
enclosure and extension
08811
Basic floor-standing enclosure + extension.
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
5
Basic enclosure + 300 mm wide duct + extension
A combination kit for mechanical connection is supplied with the duct and the floor-
standing enclosure extension.
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is mandatory to
use a set of cross-members secured to the rear of the switchboard.
Catalogue numbers for ordering
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting/reinforcement cross-members for basic floor-standing
enclosure, 300 mm wide duct and extension
08813
Basic floor-standing enclosure + duct + extension.
Plinth raiser
D
D
3
8
0
6
3
3 Designation Cat. no.
Plinth raiser, H = 100 mm
for basic floor-standing enclosure or extension 08805
for a duct, W = 300 mm 08807
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23010.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 enclosures
Partial doors
Canopy
Partial door
b plain door or with cut-outs (for the interface with 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 mm
measurement devices, see page 100E21060.fm/2)
b height: 6 modules
b installation:
v on a wall-mount enclosure at least 12 modules high (H u 630 mm)
v on a basic floor-standing enclosure or extension
b reversible (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405).
Note: Each wall-mount enclosure and basic floor-standing enclosure or extension can be
equipped with only one partial door. The front must be completed with another door.
The useful height behind a partial door is five modules.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
6
Designation Cat. no.
Partial plain door 08850
Partial door with cut-outs for 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 mm devices 08851
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
7
24-module wall-mount enclosure with a 6-module partial plain
door and an 18-module plain door.
Interface for 96 x 96 mm measurement devices on a partial door with cut-outs.
Canopy (IP31)
The addition of a canopy over a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure equipped with
a door ensures compliance with the degree of protection IP31.
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
7 Designation Cat. no.
Canopy for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure alone 08830
for wall-mount encl. + duct or floor-standing encl. + duct 08832
for 2 wall-mount or 2 floor-standing enclosures 08831
for 2 wall-mount encl. + duct or 2 floor-standing encl. + duct 08833
Gasket (IP43)
When the switchboard is equipped with a canopy, a gasket for the doors ensures
compliance with the degree of protection IP43.
For combinations, order one gasket per door.
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
8
Designation Cat. no.
Gasket for one wall-mount encl./one floor-standing encl./one duct
6 to 21 modules (L = 3300 mm) 08840
24 to 33 modules (L = 5300 mm) 08841
Flush-mount kit
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
6 Designation Cat. no.
Flush-mount kit for wall-mount enclosures, 6 to 18 modules 08819
Flush-mount kit for wall-mount enclosures, 21 to 27 modules 08820
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23010.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 enclosures
Gland plates

Gland plates
Metal gland plates
Enclosures (wall-mount, floor-standing, 300 mm wide ducts) are supplied with a
plastic gland plate installed on the top or bottom panel.
To cover all connection needs, the plastic gland plate can be replaced by a plain
metal gland plate supplied separately.
D
D
3
8
1
2
6
9
Designation Cat. no.
Plain metal gland plate
for wall-mount and basic floor-standing enclosure or extension 08870
for a duct, W = 300 mm 08874
D
D
3
8
1
2
7
0 Special gland plates
Enclosures (wall-mount, floor-standing, 300 mm wide ducts) are supplied with a
plastic gland plate installed on the top or bottom panel.
This gland plate can be replaced by an interface plate with cut-outs for special cable
entry systems (membranes, FL21, etc.).
Designation Cat. no.
Interface plate with FL21 cut-outs
for wall-mount and basic floor-standing enclosure or extension 08871
for a duct, W = 300 mm 08875
Special FL21 gland plate
plain 08881
4 x 29/48 mm 08891
15 x 21/23 mm 08892
20 x 16 mm entries 08895
16/30/47 mm entries 08896
2 x 66 mm entries 08897
D
D
3
8
1
2
7
1
Gland plate for floor-standing enclosure plinth
Designation Cat. no.
Gland plate for plinth
for basic floor-standing enclosure or extension 08887
for a duct, W = 300 mm 08888
Top or bottom plate with plastic
gland plate
b top or bottom plate with cut-outs and a plastic gland plate
b can be installed:
v at the top or bottom of a wall-mount enclosure (or duct)
v at the top of a floor-standing enclosure (or duct).
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
1
Designation Cat. no.
Plate with cut-outs + plastic gland plate
for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 08880
for a duct, W = 300 mm 08884
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23020.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 enclosures
Installation accessories

Lifting accessories
Lifting rings
The lifting rings are used to move a single wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure.
For combined enclosures, use the lifting/reinforcement cross-members (see below).
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
9
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting rings for single wall-mount or floor-standing enclosures 08801
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
0
Lifting/reinforcement cross-members
The lifting cross-members, already installed to reinforce combined enclosures, have
holes for lifting.
Cat. no. selection
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting/reinforcement cross-members
for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure alone 08810
for two wall-mount or two floor-standing enclosures 08811
for a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure + 300 mm wide duct 08812
for two wall-mount or floor-standing enclosures + 300 mm wide duct 08813
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
3
Trunking spreader
For a professional-looking connection between the trunking and the enclosure.
Can be installed at the top or bottom.
The spreader is marked for cut-outs for standard trunking sizes.
The maximum capacity is two 250 x 80 mm trunking sections.
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
6
Designation Cat. no.
Trunking spreader 08824
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23020.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/IP31/IP43 enclosures
Installation accessories

Wall mounting
Switchboards can be mounted on a wall in three manners:
b through the rear of the switchboard
b using the lifting/reinforcement cross-members
b using external wall-mount brackets.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
2
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting/reinforcement cross-members See previous
page.
Four external wall-mount brackets 08803
Mounting through the rear.
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
3
Mounting using the lifting/reinforcement cross-members.
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
4
Mounting using the external wall-mount brackets (08803).
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23100.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
Presentation

Prisma Plus IP55 enclosures are designed
for indoor switchboards in severe
environments such as industrial and
agricultural buildings, basements, kitchens,
etc.
All System G components can be used to
form switchboards that:
b have heavy-duty IP55 / IK10
characteristics
b can be dismantled and combined to
facilitate installation, on-site connections
and later modifications
b offer functional installation of control and
indication devices (lights, pushbuttons, etc.)
on the front of the switchboard, on a plain or
partial door
b offer functional installation of Schneider
industrial sockets
b can be installed anywhere in a building (on
a wall, on a pole, on free-standing
structures, etc.).
P
D
3
9
0
5
9
6
P
D
3
9
0
6
6
6
Installation on a wall structure.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23100.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
Presentation

P
D
3
9
0
5
3
7
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
8
Sockets on a partial door. Sockets on the side.
P
D
3
9
0
5
3
9
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
0
Lights and pushbuttons on a partial door. Extended rotary handle on a door.
P
D
3
9
0
4
9
9
P
D
3
9
0
5
0
1
Gland plates on an enclosure and a duct. Gland plates on an enclosure.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23110.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures

Enclosure
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
1
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
2
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
3
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
9
No. of vertical
modules
Height
(mm)
Enclosure Plain door Transparent
door
Basic enclosure
7 450 08302 08322 08332
11 650 08303 08323 08333
15 850 08304 08324 08334
19 1050 08305 08325 08335
23 1250 08306 08326 08336
27 1450 08307 08327 08337
33 1750 08309 08329 08339
b reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and keylock
(key 405). For other possibilities, see page 300E23130.fm/2.
Duct, W = 300 mm
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
7
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
8
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
1
No. of vertical
modules
Height
(mm)
Rear + door,
W= 300 mm
Top and
bottom
plates
Duct, W = 300 mm
7 450 08342 08372
11 650 08343 08372
15 850 08344 08372
19 1050 08345 08372
23 1250 08346 08372
27 1450 08347 08372
33 1750 08349 08372
b reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and keylock
(key 405). For other possibilities, see page 300E23130.fm/2.
Enclosure extension
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
4
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
5
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
4
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
6
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
0
No. of vertical
modules
Height
(mm)
Side-by-side combination Vertical combination
Rear + Top and bottom
plates
Rear + Side panels
Enclosure extension
7 450 08312 08371 08312 08352
11 650 08313 08371 08313 08353
15 850 08314 08371 08314 08354
19 1050 08315 08371 08315 08355
23 1250 08316 08371 08316 08356
27 1450 08317 08371 08317 08357
33 1750 08319 08371 08319 08359
b the enclosure extension uses the same doors as the basic enclosure.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23110.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures

Combination kits
IP55 enclosures can be combined side-by-side and vertically.
To make a combination, start with a basic enclosure and add a duct or one (or more)
enclosure extensions using the corresponding combination kits.
Cat. no. selection D
D
3
8
1
4
3
2
Designation Cat. no.
Combination kit
horizontal/vertical (two double struts) 08381
"L" shape (one triple strut and one single strut) 08382
square shape (one quadruple strut) 08383
Note: For combinations of more than two enclosures, the switchboard must be reinforced using
mounting uprights (08391), see page 300E23120.fm/2.
Examples of combinations
Vertical combination
A basic enclosure is positioned above an enclosure extension, whatever its height.
Use the horizontal/vertical combination kit with two double struts.
Catalogue numbers for the configuration opposite
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
4
Item Designation Cat. no.
1 1 basic enclosure 08304
2 1 rear plate for enclosure extension 08313
3 1 set of two side panels 08353
4 1 horizontal/vertical combination kit 08381
See previous page for plain and transparent doors for basic enclosures and
extensions.
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
5 "L" combination
The "L" shape is created by combining two enclosures (extension or duct) with a
basic enclosure.
Catalogue numbers for the configuration opposite
Item Designation Cat. no.
1 1 basic enclosure 08304
2 1 rear + door for duct, W = 300 mm 08344
3 1 set of two top and bottom plates for duct 08372
4 1 rear plate for enclosure extension 08313
5 1 set of two side panels 08353
6 1 "L" combination kit 08382
7 1 horizontal/vertical combination kit 08381
See previous page for plain and transparent doors for basic enclosures and
extensions.
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
6 Square combination
The square shape is created by combining three enclosures (extension or duct) with
a basic enclosure.
Catalogue numbers for the configuration opposite
Item Designation Cat. no.
1 1 basic enclosure 08303
2 3 rear plates for enclosure extensions 08313
3 1 set of two top and bottom plates for enclosure extensions 08371
4 1 set of two side panels 08353
5 1 square combination kit 08383
6 2 horizontal/vertical combination kits 2 x 08381
7 3 mounting uprights (to reinforce the switchboard) 3 x 08391
See previous page for plain and transparent doors for basic enclosures and
extensions.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23110.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
Partial doors
Side panels with cut-outs

Partial doors
Whether plain or with cut-outs, they can be mounted on basic enclosures or
extensions at least eleven modules high (H = 650 mm).
They are equipped with:
b hinges that open 170
b a 8 mm male triangle insert (key not supplied).
The front can be completed with a standard door, either plain or transparent.
Each basic enclosure or extension can be equipped with only one partial door.
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
7
Partial plain door
Designation Cat. no.
Partial plain door
4 modules (H = 200 mm) for enclosures from 11 to 27 modules high 08374
6 modules (H = 300 mm) for enclosures 33 modules high 08375
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
8
Partial door with cut-outs
Designed for two mounting plates with 22 mm diameter devices or Schneider
industrial sockets.
Designation Cat. no.
Partial door with cut-outs
4 modules (H = 200 mm) for enclosures from 11 to 27 modules high 08376
6 modules (H = 300 mm) for enclosures 33 modules high 08377
They are supplied with an insulating plain mounting plate that can be used to blank
off a reserve hole or to install all types of devices (sockets, EPO devices,
measurement devices).
The dimensions of the two holes are 200 mm x 112 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
9
Tego Dial partial door
Designed for "Tego Dial" mounting plates (H = 100 mm) on which it is possible to
mount control, monitoring, measurement and indication devices.
Designation Cat. no.
Tego Dial partial door
4 modules (H = 200 mm) for enclosures from 11 to 27 modules high 08378
6 modules (H = 300 mm) for enclosures 33 modules high 08379
The cut-out is 375 mm wide (five 75 mm modules).
For selection of Tego Dial mounting plates, see the Schneider industrial control
catalogue.
Side panel with cut-out
Side panel with two cut-outs (only one for 7 and 11-module panels) for mounting
plates intended for 22 mm diameter devices and those for industrial sockets.
These panels simply replace a standard side panel.
Can be mounted on the left or right-hand side.
Supplied with one blanking plate (except for the 7 and 11-module panels).
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
0
Designation Cat. no.
1 side panel with cut-out
7 mod. 08362
11 mod. 08363
15 mod. 08364
19 mod. 08365
23 mod. 08366
27 mod. 08367
33 mod. 08369
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23110.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
Functional mounting plates

Mounting plates for 22 mm
diameter devices or industrial
sockets
Plastic mounting plates are used for 22 mm diameter devices or industrial sockets
on the outside of the switchboard.
They can be installed:
b horizontally on the partial doors with cut-outs
b vertically on the side panels with cut-outs
horizontally vertically at any point on a door or side panel.
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
1
Plain mounting plate
A plain plate is used to blank off partial doors or side panels with cut-outs.
Designation Cat. no.
Plain mounting plate, 210x150 mm 08861
Can be used to mount any type of device (EPO devices, measurement devices,
sockets).
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
2
Mounting plate for 22 mm diameter devices
For installation of eight 22 mm diameter devices (lights, switches, pushbuttons, etc.).
Designation Cat. no.
Mounting plate with eight 22 mm diameter holes 08862
D
D
3
8
1
4
3
8
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
3
Mounting plate for Schneider industrial sockets
Mounting plate with two 70 x 85 mm holes.
Intended for the installation of:
b 10/16 A residential sockets
b inclined 16 A IP44 and IP67 sockets.
Designation Cat. no.
Mounting plate with two 70 x 85 mm holes 08863
Supplied with a 70 x 85 mm blanking plate.
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
4
Mounting plate with two holes, 70 x 85 mm and 90 x 100 mm
Intended for the installation of:
b inclined 16 and 32 A IP44 and IP67 sockets in the 90 x 100 mm hole (1)
b residential sockets (< 10/16 A) in the 70 x 85 mm hole (1a)
b inclined 16 A IP44 and IP67 sockets in the 70 x 85 mm hole (1b).
Designation Cat. no.
Mounting plate with two holes, 70 x 85 mm and 90 x 100 mm 08864
Supplied with a 70 x 85 mm blanking plate.
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
5
Mounting plate with a 90 x 180 mm hole
Intended for the installation of:
b interlocked 16 and 32 A IP44 and IP66 sockets (1)
b very low-voltage 16 A-2P-160 VA, IP44 and IP66 sockets (2).
Designation Cat. no.
Mounting plate with a 90 x 180 mm hole 08865
For VLV sockets, order a raiser (83930).
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23120.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
Installation accessories

Mounting supports
Mounting uprights
The uprights are used to mount on a wall one or more enclosures combined
horizontally or vertically.
The uprights leave space behind the switchboard for cable running and to improve
ventilation.
Colour RAL7016.
For one enclosure, order two uprights.
For each enclosure extension or duct, order one additional upright.
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
6
Designation Cat. no.
1 mounting upright 08391
Supplied with:
b two adjustable fixing brackets
b one joint for combination with a plinth or another upright.
Note: To create the configuration opposite, order:
three mounting uprights (08391 x 3).
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
7
Plinth, H = 150 mm
The plinth, installed in the factory or on-site, raises the switchboard to protect it and
facilitate spreading of cables arriving from a trough.
Colour RAL7016.
The wall-fixing brackets supplied with the plinth ensure that the switchboard cannot
topple over.
For the basic enclosure, order two gussets and one 600 mm wide plinth cover panel.
For each enclosure extension or duct, order one additional gusset and the
corresponding cover panel.
Designation Cat. no.
Plinth gusset 08392
Plinth cover panel, W = 600mm (for enclosure) 08393
Plinth cover panel, W = 300 mm (for duct) 08394
Note: To create the configuration opposite, order:
three plinth gussets (08392 x 3)
one plinth cover panel, W = 600 mm (08393)
one plinth cover panel, W = 300 mm (08394).
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
8
Wall structure
The switchboard can be mounted on the structure in the factory or on site.
Two wall-fixing brackets supplied with the basic enclosure ensure that the
switchboard cannot topple over.
Colour RAL7016.
Designation Cat. no.
1 mounting upright 08391
1 plinth gusset 08392
Plinth cover panel, W = 600mm (for enclosure) 08393
Plinth cover panel, W = 300 mm (for duct) 08394
Note: To create the configuration opposite, order:
three mounting uprights (08391 x 3)
three plinth gussets (08392 x 3)
one plinth cover panel, W = 600 mm (08393)
one plinth cover panel, W = 300 mm (08394).
D
D
3
8
1
4
4
9
Free-standing structure
The free-standing structure is simply two wall structures combined back-to-back.
The switchboard can be positioned anywhere.
It can be fixed to the floor and moved easily using the lifting rings (08396).
It can be equipped with one or more enclosures with Schneider sockets.
Colour RAL7016.
Designation Cat. no.
1 mounting upright 08391
1 plinth gusset 08392
Plinth cover panel, W = 600mm (for enclosure) 08393
Plinth cover panel, W = 300 mm (for duct) 08394
Note: To create the configuration opposite, order:
four mounting uprights (08391 x 4)
four plinth gussets (08392 x 4)
two plinth cover panels, W = 600 mm (08393 x 2).
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23120.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
Installation accessories

Mounting on a pole
The kit is used to mount an enclosure or an enclosure + duct combination, without
drilling, to an I-beam or concrete pole that can be rectangular or cylindrical.
The maximum circumference of the pole is 580 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
0
Designation Cat. no.
Pole-mount kit for enclosures 08395
The kit is made up of:
b two reinforcement cross-members to support the enclosure
b mounting components and hardware.
Canopies
Installed on the mounting uprights or directly on the wall, canopies improve
switchboard protection against vertically falling water and objects.
Colour RAL7016.
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
1
Designation Cat. no.
Canopy, W = 600 (for enclosure) 08386
Canopy, W = 300 (for duct) 08387
Supplied with:
b the hardware required for mounting on the uprights
b the components required for combination with another canopy.
Membrane-type gland plates
(IP55)
These gland plates are made of an insulating material and simply replace the
standard steel gland plates supplied with the enclosure (two plates) or the duct (one
plate).
Different size cables can enter the switchboard through the bottom without using
cable glands while maintaining the degree of protection IP55.
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
2
Designation Cat. no.
Gland plate with 39 entries 08898
for three 14 to 26 mm diameter cables +
four 10 to 20 mm diameter cables +
thirty-two 7 to 16 mm diameter cables
Gland plate with 2 entries 08899
for two 33 to 72 mm diameter cables
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
3
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
4
Lifting rings
The lifting rings are secured directly to the switchboard or to the mounting uprights.
Supplied with mounting hardware.
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
5
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting rings 08396
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23130.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
Closing accessories

Presentation
The small plain and transparent doors (7 to 23 modules) are supplied with a small
handle comprising a barrel lock no. 405.
The large plain and transparent doors (27 to 33 modules) are supplied with a large
handle comprising a barrel lock no. 405.
The partial doors are supplied with an 8 mm male triangle insert.
All doors can receive as optional equipment:
b a large or small handle with a barrel lock no. 405. The latter can be replaced by
other barrel locks or special inserts
b a large EURO handle, supplied without a barrel lock
b door inserts (squares, triangles, double bars, screwdriver slots).
Handles
Replacement handles
Designation Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
4 Door latch with lock and 2 no. 405 keys 08936
Handle L = 155 mm) with lock and 2 no. 405 keys 08935
EURO handle without a barrel lock 08934
Door insert
These inserts simply replace a standard handles.
Designation Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
5 Screwdriver slot insert 09981
3 mm double bar insert 09982
7 mm male triangle insert 09983
8 mm male triangle insert (CNOMO) 09984
9 mm male triangle insert (EDF) 09985
6 mm male square insert 09986
7 mm male square insert 09987
8 mm male square insert 09988
6 mm female square insert 09989
Handle barrel locks and inserts
Barrel locks
These components may equip handles after removing the standard barrel lock no.
405.
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
6
Designation Cat. no.
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 2433A 09933
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 455 09945
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 1242 E 09942
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 3113 A 09943
Other A and E combinations are available from Ronis, please consult us.
Inserts
Designation Cat. no.
Screwdriver slot insert 09931
6 mm female square insert 09946
6 mm male square insert 09949
7 mm male square insert 09947
8 mm male square insert 09948
7 mm male triangle insert 09937
8 mm male triangle insert (CNOMO) 09938
9 mm male triangle insert (EDF) 09939
3 mm double bar insert 09932

Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23130.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
Closing accessories


Padlocking
Kit designed for three padlocks.
Designation Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
7 IP55 handle padlocking kit 08939
The kit can be installed on all IP55 doors, except those equipped with an EURO lock.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23220.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/43/55 enclosures
Connection accessories


Cable-tie supports in IP30 to IP55
enclosures
Cable tying in wall-mount or floor-standing enclosures
Designation Cat. no.
2 cable-tie supports for wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure 08867
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
0 Cable-tie support adapter 08866
Supplied with hardware for mounting on the functional uprights of the enclosure.
Cable tying in wall-mount or floor-standing enclosures
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
1
The adapter makes it possible to tie down the cables next to the
gland plate and gain one module in height.
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
2
Cable tying in the 300 mm wide duct
Designation Cat. no.
4 cable-tie supports for 300 mm wide ducts 08868
Supplied with hardware for mounting on the functional uprights of the duct.
Cable tying in a duct.
Catalogue numbers
System G
300E23220.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/43/55 enclosures
Connection accessories

Captive nuts
The captive nuts clip onto the functional uprights of wall-mount and floor-standing
enclosures.
They can also be mounted on slotted mounting plates.
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
7
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 M6 captive nuts 03194
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E23800.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/43 floor-standing
enclosures
850 mm wide

Floor-standing enclosure (IP30)
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
3
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
4
D
D
3
8
1
9
2
4
No. of vertical modules Height of enclosure
(mm)
Floor-standing
enclosure
Transparent
door
33 1830 08244 08264
b reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and lock
(no. 405 key)
b for other combinations, see page 100E23000.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
9
2
5
Side-by-side combination
Floor-standing enclosure + 300 mm wide duct
The combination kit (two combination brackets) is supplied with the duct.
To make the combination more rigid, particularly during transport, it is mandatory to
use a set of cross-members secured to the rear of the switchboard. D
D
3
8
1
9
2
6
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lifting/reinforcement cross-members for floor-standing enclosure,
W = 850 mm + duct, W = 300 mm
08809
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E23800.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/43 floor-standing
enclosures
850 mm wide

Side-by-side combination
Two floor-standing enclosures
D
D
3
8
1
1
9
3 Designation Cat. no.
IP30 combination kit for floor-standing enclosures 08815
Canopy (IP31)
D
D
3
8
1
9
2
7 Designation Cat. no.
Canopy for floor-standing enclosure 08836
Canopy for floor-standing enclosure and duct 08837
Gasket (IP43)
D
D
3
8
1
9
2
8 Designation Cat. no.
Door gasket for 33-module floor-standing module 08841 x 2
Plinth raiser
D
D
3
8
1
9
2
9 Designation Cat. no.
Plinth raiser, H = 100 mm 08806
Gland plates for plinth
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
0 Designation Cat. no.
Gland plate for plinth 08889
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E23800.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP55 enclosures
850 mm wide

Enclosure (IP55)
D
D
3
8
1
3
8
6
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
0
D
D
3
8
1
3
6
1
No. of vertical modules Height of enclosure
(mm)
Enclosure Transparent
door
33 1680 08311 08340
b reversible doors (opening to left or right), equipped with a handle and lock
(no. 405 key).
Plinth
D
D
3
8
1
3
7
7 Designation Cat. no.
IP55 plinth, W = 850, H = 150 mm 08802
Catalogue numbers
System G
301E23800.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/55 enclosures
Accessories

Horizontal partitioning
D
D
3
8
1
9
3
1 Designation Cat. no.
Horizontal partition 04336
Lifting accessories
Lifting/reinforcement cross-members
The cross-members have holes for lifting.
D
D
3
8
1
1
9
4
Designation Cat. no.
2 lifting/reinforcement cross-members, W = 850 mm, IP30/31 08808
2 lifting/reinforcement cross-members for floor-standing enclosure, W = 850
mm + duct, W = 300 mm
(1)
08809
(1) IP30/31.
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
8
Catalogue numbers
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G
Dimensions
300E31000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP30/31/43 wall-mount enclosures

Wall-mount enclosures Door
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
4
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
5
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
7
No. of modules
6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27
H 330 480 630 780 930 1080 1230 1380
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
6
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
8
300 mm wide duct Door
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
9
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
0
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
1
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
2
Cable entry
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
3
Dimensions
System G
300E31000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP30/31/43 wall-mount enclosures

Wall mounting
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
2 No. of modules
6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27
H1 246 396 546 696 846 996 1146 1296
H2 430 580 730 880 1030 1180 1330 1480
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
9
Depth behind front plate
Functional uprights Modular rail
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
4
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
5
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
6
03001/03010. 03002/03011.
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
7
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
8
03003. 03004.
Slotted mounting plate
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
0
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
1
03171/03172/03173/
03176/03177/03178.
03170/03175.
Dimensions
System G
300E31010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP30/31/43 floor-standing
enclosures

Floor-standing enclosure Door
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
9
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
5
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
4
No. of modules
27 30 33
H 1530 1680 1830
H1 1380 1530 1680
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
6
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
8
300 mm wide duct Door
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
5
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
6
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
1
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
2
Top cable entry Cable entry for plinths
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
3
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
7
Dimensions
System G
300E31010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP30/31/43 floor-standing
enclosures

Wall mounting
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
2 No. of modules
27 30 33
H1 1488 1638 1788
H2 1580 1730 1880
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
9
Fixing to floor
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
8
Depth behind front plate
Functional uprights Modular rail
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
4
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
5
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
6
03001/03010. 03002/03011.
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
7
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
8
03003. 03004.
Slotted mounting plate
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
0
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
1
03171/03172/03173/
03176/03177/03178.
03170/03175.
Dimensions
System G
300E31050.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP55 enclosures

Enclosures
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
6
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
7
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
8
Useful depth
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
1
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
2
Gland plates
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
3 (1) Multifix rail.
(2) Recessed slotted mounting
plate.
(3) Transparent door.
(4) Plain door.
(5) Front plate.
(6) Door.
Duct
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
9
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
0
No. of modules H1 A B
7 425 375 475
11 625 575 675
15 825 775 875
19 1025 975 1075
23 1225 1175 1275
27 1425 1375 1475
33 1725 1675 1775
Dimensions
System G
300E31050.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP55 enclosures

Door
Useful door surface
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
4
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
5
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
6
7 to 23 modules.
No. of modules C E H
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
7
7 420 284 450
11 620 484 650
15 820 684 850
19 1020 884 1050
23 1220 1084 1250
27 1420 1284 1450
33 1720 1584 1750
27/33 modules.
Dimensions
System G
300E31050.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP55 enclosures

Enclosure combinations
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
8
(1) Side panel.
Wall structure
D
D
3
8
1
7
3
9
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
0
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
1
Canopy
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
2
Dimensions
System G
300E31050.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP55 enclosures

Partial door with cut-outs
Side panels with cut-outs
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
3
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
4
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
5
(1) 7 to 23 modules.
(2) 27 to 33 modules.
7 modules.
11 to 33 modules.
Functional mounting plates
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
6
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
7
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
8
07345. 07344.
07341.
D
D
3
8
1
7
4
9
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
0
07343. 07342.
Dimensions
System G
301E31800.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP30/31/43 floor-standing
enclosures
850 mm wide

Enclosure Door
D
D
3
8
0
5
2
4
D
D
3
8
0
5
2
6
D
D
3
8
0
5
2
7
D
D
3
8
0
5
2
5
D
D
3
8
0
5
2
8
300 mm wide duct Door
D
D
3
8
0
5
2
9
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
1
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
0
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
2
Dimensions
System G
301E31800.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP30/31/43 floor-standing
enclosures
850 mm wide

Top cable entry Cable entry for plinths
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
3
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
4
Wall mounting Fixing to floor
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
8
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
9
Depth behind front plate
Functional uprights Modular rail
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
4
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
5
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
6
03001/03010. 03002/03011.
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
7
D
D
3
8
1
9
0
8
03003. 03004.
Slotted mounting plate
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
0
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
1
03171/03172/03173/03176/03177/03178. 03170/03175.
Dimensions
System G
301E31800.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP55 enclosures
850 mm wide

Enclosure Door
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
2
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
3
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
4
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
8
300 mm wide duct Door
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
9
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
1
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
2
Dimensions
System G
301E31800.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
IP55 enclosures
850 mm wide

Cable entry
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
5
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
3
Wall mounting
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
6
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
0
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
7
Enclosure. Enclosure and duct.
Fixing to floor Depth behind front plate
Functional uprights Modular rail
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
4
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
6
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
7
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
0
03001. 03002.
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
8
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
1
03003. 03004.
Slotted mounting plate
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
9
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
2
D
D
3
8
2
2
9
5
03171/03172/03173/03176/
03177/03178.
03170/03175.
Dimensions
System G
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Prisma Plus
System P
Presentation
Catalogue numbers
Dimensions
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
400E_31_10_03TDM.fm/ Version 1 du 31/10/03
Contents systeme P
Presentation
General presentation
Electrical switchboards up to 3200 A 400E10020/2
Examples of switchboard configurations 400E10040/2
The functions of an electrical switchboard 400E10050/2
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Typical configuration with catalogue numbers 400E20030/2
Determining catalogue numbers 400E20040/2
Functional units
Tarif jaune" service connection 401E21001/2
Tarif vert" service connection 401E21002/2
Masterpact NW08 to NW32 400E21100/2
Masterpact NT06 to NT16 400E21110/2
Compact NS1600b to 3200 400E21120/2
Compact NS630b to NS1600 400E21130/2
Compact NS100 to NS630 400E21150/2
Source-changeover systems Compact / Masterpact 400E21160/2
Source-changeover system Compact NS630b to 1600 400E21160/4
Source-changeover system Compact NS100 to 630 400E21160/5
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630 400E21200/2
Interpact INS-INV630b to 2500 400E21210/2
Source-changeover systems
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630 400E21250/2
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors 400E21400/2
Industrial control devices 400E21500/2
Other devices 400E21600/2
System G adapter 400E21610/2
Distribution
Busbar presentation 400E22000/2
Horizontal busbars 400E22100/2
Presentation of Linergy busbars 400E22200/2
Lateral Linergy busbars up to 3200 A 400E22210/2
Rear Linergy busbars up to 1600 A 400E22220/2
Linergy accessories 400E22230/2
Vertical flat busbars 400E22300/2
Lateral flat busbars up to 1600 A 400E22310/2
Lateral flat busbars up to 3200 A 400E22310/3
Rear flat busbars up to 1600 A 400E22320/2
PE conductor 400E22350/2
PEN conductor 400E22360/2
Busbar accessories 400E22400/2
Terminal blocks 400E22450/2
Earth bar 400E22450/4
Neutral bar 400E22450/5
Polypact distribution block 400E22500/2
Form 2 partitioning 400E22900/2
Form 3 partitioning 400F22910/2
Other partitions 400E22930/2
Enclosures
IP30/31/55 cubicles Presentation 400E23000/2
Cover panels 400E23010/2
Cubicles 400E23100/2
Installation accessories 400E23210/2
Connection accessories 400E23220/2
CEF
Power factor correction equipment 450E25000/2
Dimensions
Cubicles 400E31000/2
400E10020.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Electrical switchboards
up to 3200 A

The Prisma Plus functional
system
The Prisma Plus functional system can be used for all types of low-voltage
distribution switchboards (main, subdistribution and final) up to 3200 A, in
commercial and industrial environments.
Switchboard design is very simple.
A metal structure
The switchboard is made up of one or more frameworks combined side-by-side or
back-to-back, on which a complete selection of cover panels and doors can be
mounted.
A distribution system
Horizontal busbars or vertical busbars positioned in a lateral compartment or at the
rear of the cubicle are used to distribute electricity throughout the switchboard.
Complete functional units
Each device is part of a functional unit comprising:
b a dedicated mounting plate for device installation
b a front plate to block direct access to live parts
b prefabricated busbar connections
b devices for on-site connections.
Each functional unit contributes to a function in the switchboard.
The functional units are modular and are arranged rationally, one on top of another,
within the enclosure.
The system includes everything required for functional unit mounting, supply and on-
site connection.
The components of the Prisma Plus system and those of the functional units in
particular have been designed and tested taking into account device characteristics.
This design approach ensures a high degree of reliability in system operation and
optimum safety for personnel.
P
D
3
9
0
3
4
2
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
1
Functional units are arranged rationally, one on top of another.
Presentation
System P
400E10020.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Electrical switchboards
up to 3200 A

Prisma Plus enclosures
b steel sheet metal
b electrophoresis treatment + hot-polymerised polyester epoxy powder, white colour
RAL 9001.
b can be dismantled
b can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b degree of protection:
v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame
v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket
v IP55: with IP55 cover panels
b degree of protection against mechanical impacts:
v IK07: with cover frame
v IK08: with IP30 door
v IK10: with IP55 door
b framework dimensions:
v four widths:
- W = 300: cable compartment
- W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment
- W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment
- W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment or cable compartment
v two depths: 400, 600 mm
v height: 2000 mm.
P
D
3
9
0
3
3
8
Advantages of Prisma Plus
switchboards
A dependable electrical installation
The total compatibility of Schneider devices with the Prisma Plus system is a key
advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability.
System design has been validated by type tests as per standard IEC 60439-1 and
benefits from the combined experience of Schneider customers over many years.
An upgradeable electrical installation
Thanks to modular design, Prisma Plus switchboards can be modified easily to
integrate new functional units as needed.
Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and
straight-forward due to easy access to devices.
Total safety for personnel
Work in a switchboard must be carried out by authorised persons in compliance with
all applicable safety regulations.
To increase the safety of personnel, devices are installed behind protective front
plates; only the operating handles are accessible. Additional internal protection
(partitions, barriers) is available to create form 2, 3 or 4 separation to protect against
direct contacts with live parts.
Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NS and INS/INV devices
in Prisma Plus enclosures.
Electrical switchboards built using the Prisma Plus functional system and
Schneider recommendations fully comply with international standard
IEC 60439-1.
Electrical characteristics
Use of the components in the Prisma Plus functional system ensures the creation of
switchboards complying with standards IEC 50298, EN 50298, IEC 60439-1 and
EN 60439-1, as well as local versions with the following electrical characteristics:
b rated insulation level of main busbars: 1000 V
b rated operational current Ie: 3200 A
b rated peak withstand current Ipk: 187 k
b rated short-time withstand current Icw: 85 kA rms / 1 second
b frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Presentation
System P
400E10040.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Presentation
System P
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
3
4
2
Compact NS1000 4P
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply via cables
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NS250
Horizontal
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Prefabricated connection
Connection Transferred to cable compartment,
W = 300 mm
Compact NS250
Vertical
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Polypact distribution block
Connection Direct via cables
Multi 9 devices
Supply 80 A Multiclip
200 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable running Cable straps
Trunking
Connection Terminal block in the cable
compartment, W = 300 mm
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 800 mm
D = 400 mm
Cable compartment W = 300 mm
D = 400 mm
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
2
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
3
Fixed Compact NS1000, front connected with
cables.
Prefabricated connection between an
incoming device and Linergy busbars.
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
4
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
5
Prefabricated connection between Linergy
busbars and an NS250.
Connection transfer assembly for connection
in a cable compartment.
400E10040.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations
P
D
3
9
0
3
3
8
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
6
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
7
Two vertically mounted Compact NS250
devices supplied by a Polypact.
Supply of a row of Multi 9 devices by a 200 A
Multiclip.
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
8
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
9
A device supplying a group of outgoers
via an 80 A Multiclip.
Terminal block for Multi 9 devices in the cable
compartment.
Presentation
System P
400E10040.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
3
6
8
Compact NS630 4P
Fixed, front connection
Motor mechanism
Direct supply via cables
Distribution
Powerclip busbars
Outgoing devices
Multi 9 devices
Supply 80 A Multiclip
200 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable running Cable straps
Trunking
Connection Terminal block + earth bar at
bottom of the switchboard
Enclosure
Cubicle, W = 650 mm, D = 400 mm
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
2
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
3
Presentation
System P
400E10040.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations
P
D
3
9
0
3
6
7
Presentation
System P
400E10040.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
3
7
4
Compact NS1000 4P
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NS250
Horizontal
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Prefabricated connection
Connection Transferred to cable compartment,
W = 300 mm
Compact NS400
Horizontal
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Prefabricated connection
Connection Transferred to cable compartment,
W = 300 mm
Multi 9 devices
Supply Comb busbars
Cable running Cable straps
Trunking
Connection Terminal block at bottom of cubicle
Motor protection devices
Supply Comb busbars
Cable running Cable straps
Trunking
Connection Terminal block in the cable
compartment, W = 300 mm
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 800/650 mm
D = 400 mm
P
D
3
9
0
3
7
3
Cable compartment W = 300 mm
D = 400 mm
Presentation
System P
400E10040.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
3
7
6
Masterpact NT1000 3P
Drawout, front connection
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NS250
Vertical
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Polypact distribution block
Connection Direct via cables
Compact NS250
Horizontal
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Prefabricated connection
Connection Transferred to cable compartment,
W = 400 mm
Compact NS400
Horizontal
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Prefabricated connection
Connection Transferred to cable compartment,
W = 400 mm
Multi 9 devices
Supply 80 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable running Cable straps
Trunking
Connection Terminal block in the cable
compartment, W = 300 mm
Motor protection devices
Supply Comb busbars
P
D
3
9
0
3
7
5
Cable running Cable straps
Trunking
Connection Terminal block in the cable
compartment, W = 300 mm
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 800/650 mm
D = 400 mm
Cable compartment W = 300/400 mm
D = 400 mm
Presentation
System P
400E10040.fm/8 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

D
D
3
8
2
2
7
4
Presentation
System P
Incomer
Masterpact NW/20 4P
Drawout, front connection
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Double vertical flat 10 mm busbars
Horizontal flat 10 mm busbars
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 800/800 mm
D = 600 mm
Cable compartment W = 300 mm
D = 600 mm
Outgoing devices
Compact NS
Horizontal
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Flexible bars
Connection Direct via cables
Compact NS250
Vertical
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply Polypact distribution block
Connection Direct via cables
Compact NS400
Horizontal
Fixed, front connection
Rotary handle
Supply Flexible bars
Connection Transferred to cable compartment, W = 300 mm
Multi 9 devices
Supply 200 A Multiclip
Cable running Trunking
Connection Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm
Motor protection devices
Supply Comb busbars
Cable running Cable straps
400E10040.fm/9 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Examples of switchboard
configurations

D
D
3
8
2
2
7
8
Presentation
System P
Incomer
Masterpact NW32 4P
Drawout, rear connection
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Vertical Linergy busbars
Double horizontal flat 10 mm busbars
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 800/800 mm
D = 1000 mm
Outgoing devices
Compact NS250
Vertical
Fixed, rear connection
Toggle
Supply Polypact distribution block
Connection Direct via cables
Compact NS250
Horizontal
Fixed, rear connection
Toggle
Supply Prefabricated connection
Connection Direct via cables
Compact NS400
Horizontal
Fixed, rear connection
Toggle
Supply Prefabricated connection
Connection Direct via cables
Multi 9 devices
Supply 200 A Multiclip
Cable running Trunking
Motor protection devices
Supply Comb busbars
Cable running Cable straps
400E10050.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Presentation
System P
General presentation
The functions of an electrical
switchboard

P
D
3
9
0
5
6
4
Incoming function
Connection via Canalis
See page 400E21110.fm/2
Distribution function
Linergy busbars in busbar compartment,
W = 150 mm
See page 400E22200.fm/2
Horizontal busbars See page 400E22100.fm/2
Powerclip busbars See page 300E22010.fm/2
Device compartment, W = 650 mm See page 400E23100.fm/2
Connection compartment, W = 300 mm See page 400E23100.fm/2
Connection compartment, W = 400 mm See page 400E23100.fm/2
1
2
3
4
5
400E10050.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
The functions of an electrical
switchboard

P
D
3
9
0
6
6
8
Hinged front plate support frame See page 400E23100.fm/2
Roof See page 400E23100.fm/4
Rear panels See page 400E23100.fm/4
Front doors See page 400E23100.fm/4
Gland plates See page 400E23100.fm/8
Side panels See page 400E23100.fm/4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Presentation
System P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
Systme PSystem P
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
CEF
400E20030.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Cat. no. selection
Typical configuration with
catalogue numbers

P
D
3
9
0
6
6
9
Framework, W = 800, D = 400 08407 See page
400E23100.fm/2
Front plate for vertical NS630b/
1600
03690 See page
400E21130.fm/2
Framework, W = 300, D = 400 08403 See page
400E23100.fm/2
Connection for fixed NS630b/
1250, 4P
04486 See page
400E21130.fm/2
Side panel, D = 400 08750 See page
400E23100.fm/4
Connection for horizontal
NS250
04424 See page
400E21150.fm/2
Rear panel, W = 800 08738 See page
400E23100.fm/4
Connection transfer assembly
for NS250
04426 See page
400E21150.fm/2
Rear panel, W = 300 08733 See page
400E23100.fm/4
Polypact for 4P fixed NS250
devices with toggles
04404 See page
400E21150.fm/3
Roof, W = 800, D = 400 08438 See page
400E23100.fm/4
Powerclip busbars, 250 A, 4P,
L = 1000
04122 See page
300E22010.fm/2
Roof, W = 300, D = 400 08433 See page
400E23100.fm/4
200 A Multiclip, 4P 04014 See page
100E22100.fm/2
IP30 gland plate, W = 800,
D = 400
08497 See page
400E23100.fm/8
80 A Multiclip, 4P 04004 See page
100E22100.fm/2
IP30 gland plate, W = 300,
D = 400
08493 See page
400E23100.fm/8
12 horizontal cable straps 04239 See page
100E22600.fm/2
Hinged front plate support frame 08506 See page
400E23100.fm/2
4 covers for horizontal cable
straps
04243 See page
100E22600.fm/2
Transparent door, W = 800 08538 See page
400E23100.fm/2
4 horizontal trunking sections,
60 x 30
04257 See page
100E22600.fm/5
Plain door, W = 300 08513 See page
400E23100.fm/2
1000 A Linergy busbars 04504 See page
400E22210.fm/2
Mounting plate for vertical fixed
NS630b/1600
03482 See page
400E23100.fm/2
Linergy busbar supports 04651 See page
400E22210.fm/2
1 14
2 15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11 24
12 25
13 26
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E20030.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Cat. no. selection
Typical configuration with
catalogue numbers

P
D
3
9
0
3
3
6
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E20040.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Catalogue numbers
Determining catalogue numbers

Starting with the electrical
diagram: IP30 switchboard D
D
3
8
0
8
8
6
Install the incomer
Front conn. using cables
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
6
see page 400E21130.fm/2
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
2 Order:
b connection
components
b mounting plates and
front plates
b busbar connections.
Device installation
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
7
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
0
Linergy BB connection
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
1
Install the Compact devices
Installation
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
9
see page 400E21150.fm/2
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
3 Order:
b mounting plates and
front plates
b busbar connections
b connection
accessories.
Linergy BB connection
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
0
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
3
Connection
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
1
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
4 Order:
b mounting plates and
front plates
b distribution block
b connection
accessories.
Installation
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
5
Linergy BB connection
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
3
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
6
Connection
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
7
NS250 NS250 NS250
NS1000
INS
C60 GV2 C60
1
2

Device No of
vert.
mod
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
front conn.
H
HH
3
Front
connectors
Prefabricated
connection
Capot for BB
connectors
Fixed device
1


Device No of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front plate
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
2
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
Device Prefabricated connection
3



Front connection Rear connection
or Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
1
2
3




Presentation
System P
400E20040.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Catalogue numbers
Determining catalogue numbers

Install the modular devices
Multi 9
see page 400E21400.fm/3
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
5
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
5 Order the mounting
plates and front plates
taking into account:
b supply to the rows
b cable running.
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
9
GV2 circuit breaker
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
6
see page 400E21500.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
9
1
9
b Multiclip distribution block, see page 100E22100.fm/2
b cable running, see page 100E22600.fm/2
Determine the size of the switchboard
b count the number
of modules occupied
b determine the number
of cubicles
b order the additional
plain front plate.
32 modules
The capacity of a cubicle is 36 modules.
1 cubicle
Plain front plate
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
7
see page 100E21050.fm/2
Plan the distribution system
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
8
0
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
0
Powerclip busbars
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
0
1
see page 300E22010.fm/2
D
D
3
8
0
8
8
1
Select the enclosures
Frameworks
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
7
Hinged front plate support
frame
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
3
Doors
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
4
Rear panels
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
5
Side panels
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
6
Rooves
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
7
Plinth, gland plates,
finishing parts, etc.
1

2





1

6mm 2 10mm 2 6mm 2 10mm 2 6mm 2 10mm 2 6mm 2 10mm 2 2
1
2
3


4



5


6

7
Presentation
System P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
Systme PSystem P
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
CEF
401E21001.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Tarif jaune" service connection
Horizontal circuit breakers

Installation/connection
Device alone
D
D
3
8
2
3
9
4
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Compact NS circuit breaker, horizontal, fixed, front connection, toggle
NS100/250
(1)
5 03143
+ 03595
03230
+ 03801
29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
Vigi NS100/250
(1)
5 03143
+ 03595
03238 29323 (3P)
29324 (4P)
(1) It is not possible to use an incoming connection block..
Two devices
D
D
3
8
2
3
3
7
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Connection
between
devices
Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Interpact INV switch-disconnector, mounted vertically
Compact NS circuit breaker, horizontal, fixed, front connection, toggle
INV250
+ NS100/250
10 03143 x 2
+ 03595 x 2
03248
+ 03801
+ 03230
04443 29324
INV250
+ Vigi NS100/250
10 03143 x 2
+ 03595 x 2
03248
+ 03801
+ 03238
04444 29324
INV320/400
+ NS100/250
15 03146
+ 03143
+ 03595 x 2
03274
+ 03801
+ 03230
04445 32565
INV320/400
+ Vigi NS100/250
15 03146
+ 03143
+ 03595 x 2
03274
+ 03801
+ 03238
04446 32565
Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
6
Device 250 A Polybloc
Compact NS, Vigicompact NS, fixed
NS100/250
and Vigi
3P 04033
4P 04034
Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Power supply
block (w/o
conn.)
Short terminal
shields (set of 2)
Adapter Powerclip busbars
Compact NS, Vigicompact NS, fixed
NS100/250 and
Vigi
04061 29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
2 x 03595
2 x 03595
see page 300E22010.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
2
3
3
9 Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
4
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
5
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
6
Rear busbars,
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Linergy busbars, see page
400E22210.fm/2.
Flat busbars, see page
400E22310.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
401E21001.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection
Vertical circuit breaker

Installation/connection
Device alone
D
D
3
8
2
3
9
5
Device No. of
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Compact NS, vertical, fixed, front connection, toggle
NS400 11 03146
+ 03595
03273
+ 03802
32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
Vigi NS400 13 03146
+ 03595
03276
+ 03802
32564 (3P)
32565 (4P)
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
0 Two devices mounted side-by-side
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Connection
between
devices
Long
terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Short
terminal
shields
Interpact INV switch-disconnector, vertically mounted
Compact NS circuit breaker, vertical, fixed, front connection, toggle
INV250
+ NS100/250
(1)
7 03145
+ 03595
03242 31071 29324 29322
INV250
+ Vigi NS100/250
(2)
8 03145
+ 03595
03242
+ 03801
31071 29324 29322
INV320/400
+ NS320/400
9 03146
+ 03595
03278 31072 32565 32563
INV320/400
+ Vigi NS320/400
11 03146
+ 03595
03278
+ 03802
31072 32565 32563
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
1 Two devices mounted one above the other
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Connection
between
devices
Long terminal shields
(set of 2)
Assembled fixed devices, vertically mounted
INV250
+ NS100/250
(1)
9 03145 x 2
+ 03595 x 2
03246 31066 29324
INV250
+ Vigi NS100/250
(2)
10 03145 x 2
+ 03595 x 2
03246
+ 03801
31066 29324
INV320/400
+ NS320/400
15 03146 x 2
+ 03595 x 2
03279 31068 32565
INV320/400
+ Vigi NS320/400
17 03146 x 2
+ 03595 x 2
03279
+ 03802
31068 32565
(1) If a Polybloc distribution block is used, add a 1-module plain front plate (03801).
(2) If a Polybloc distribution block is used, add a 2-module plain front plate (03802).
Catalogue numbers
System P
401E21001.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection
Distribution

Distribution
Polybloc
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
2
Device 250 A Polybloc
Compact NS, fixed
NS100/250 3P 04033 + 04037
4P 04034 + 04037
Device 250 A Polybloc Modular rail (adjustable)
Vigicompact NS, fixed
Vigi NS100/250 3P 04033 03402
4P 04034 03402
D
D
3
8
2
3
4
3 Powerclip insulated busbars
Device Power
supply block
(w/o conn.)
+ connection Short terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Adapter Powerclip
busbars
Compact NS, Vigicompact NS, fixed
NS100/250 and
Vigi
04061 must be
made
29321 (3P)
29322 (4P)
2 x 03595
2 x 03595
see page
300E22010.fm/
2.
NS400 and Vigi 04074 must be
made
32562 (3P)
32563 (4P)
2 x 03595
2 x 03595
see page
300E22010.fm/2.
Other distribution solutions
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
4
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
5
D
D
3
8
2
3
5
6
Rear busbars,
see page 300E22020.fm/2.
Linergy busbars, see page
400E22210.fm/2
Flat busbars, see page
400E22310.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
401E21001.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif jaune" service connection
Distribution
Catalogue numbers
System P
401E21002.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif vert" service connection

Connection
D
D
3
8
2
3
3
3
Device Vert. conn.
adapters
Vertical-
connection
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Terminal
extension
bar supports
Long
terminal
shields (set
of 2)
INV switch-disconnector
INV630 3P
4P
33644
33645
32564
32565
INV630b/1600 3P
4P
31301
31302
33644
33645
INV2000/2500 3P
4P
33975
33976
04693
04693
Installation
Two devices mounted side-by-side
D
D
3
8
2
3
3
4
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Connection
between
devices
Interpact INV switch-disconnector, vertically mounted
Compact NS circuit breaker, vertical, fixed, front connection, toggle
INV630 + NS630 10 03146
+ 03595
03278
+ 03801
31072
INV630 + Vigi NS630 11 03146
+ 03595
03278
+ 03802
31072
Two devices mounted one above the other
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plates Connection
between
devices
Long
terminal
shields
Assembled fixed devices, vertically mounted, front connection, toggle
D
D
3
8
2
3
3
5
INV630 + NS630 17 03146 x 2
+ 03595 x 2
03279
+ 03802
31068 32565
INV630 + Vigi NS630 19 03146 x 2
+ 03595 x 2
03279
+03804
31068 32565
INV630b/1250
+ NS630b/1250
3P 19 03485 03804
+ 03693
+ 03803
b 33628
4P 19 03485 03804
+ 03694
+ 03803
b 33629
INV2000
+ NS1600b/2000
INV2500
+ NS2500
3P 22 03501 x 2 03715
+ 03716
+ 03801
+ 03802
+ 03803
+ 04923
31317
4P 22 03501 x 2 03715
+ 03716
+ 03801
+ 03802
+ 03803
+ 04923
31318
Separate devices
NW08/32 See page 400E21100.fm/2
NT06/16 See page 400E21110.fm/2
Catalogue numbers
System P
401E21002.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif vert" service connection

Distribution
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
2
3
9
0
Device Front
connectors
Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB
connection
Compact and Vigicompact, fixed
NS630 3P b must be made 32564
4P b must be made 32565
NS630b/1250 3P b 04485 04926
4P b 04486 04926
NS1600b/2500 3P b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
4P b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Selection of Linergy busbars, See page 400E22210.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
2
3
9
1 Flat busbars
Device Front
connectors
Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB
connection
Compact and Vigicompact, fixed
NS630 3P b must be made 32564
4P b must be made 32565
NS630b/1250 3P b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
4P b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
NS1600b/2500 3P b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
4P b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Selection of flat busbars, See page 400E22310.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
401E21002.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif vert" service connection

630/1600A measurement CT
casing
Casing with lead-sealable panels at the front or the rear.
It can be mounted in the device compartment of a cubicle 400 or 600 mm deep.
The top and bottom plates have knock-outs for the passage of cables or bars.
It is mounted behind a plain front plate and occupies 12 modules (600 mm).
It has a chassis made up of:
b two depth-adjustable uprights
b 2 longitudinal cross-members with holes to:
v fix cables
v install the CTs
v install a busbar support, 75 mm between centres (04662), that must be ordered
separately.
Busbar connection supports with 115 mm between centres (04694) can also be
installed on the uprights using universal angle brackets (03581).
D
D
3
8
2
3
6
8
Installation of the CT casing
No. of vertical
modules
CT casing Plain front plate
CT casing 12 03506 03808
Accessories
Designation Cat. no.
Free support for 5/10mm busbars, 75 mm between centres 04662
Busbar connection support for 10mm busbars, 115 mm between centres 04694
2 universal angle brackets 03581
D
D
3
8
2
3
9
2
Catalogue numbers
System P
401E21002.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
"Tarif vert" service connection

Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21100.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Masterpact NW08 to NW32

Front connection
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
0
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
0
Device Vertical rear
connectors
Terminal extension bar
support
Cable cover
Fixed/drawout device
NW08/32 b 04694 x 2 04861
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
1 Canalis connection
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
0
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
1
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
2
Device Vertical rear
connectors
Terminal
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis/
device
interface +
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed/drawout device
NW08/16 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04715 04871 + 04861
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04716 04871 + 04861
NW20/25 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04725 04871 + 04861
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04726 04871 + 04861
NW32 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04735 04871 + 04861
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04736 04871 + 04861
Rear connection
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
0
Device Vertical rear
connectors
Terminal extension bar
support
Cable cover
Fixed/drawout device
NW08/32 b 04694 x 2 04863
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
3 Canalis connection
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
0
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
1
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
2
Device Vertical rear
connectors
Terminal
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis/
device
interface +
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed/drawout device
NW08/16 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04715 04871 + 04863
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04716 04871 + 04863
NW20/25 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04725 04871 + 04863
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04726 04871 + 04863
NW32 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04735 04871 + 04863
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04736 04871 + 04863
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21100.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Masterpact NW08 to NW32

Device installation
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
3
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
5
Device No. of
vert.
mod.
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NW08/16
front conn.
cables 18 03500 03711 03804 03805
Canalis 27 03500 03711 03805 +
03804 x 2
03805
NW08/16
rear conn.
cables 14 03500 03711 03805
Canalis 16 03500 03711 03804 +
03803
NW20/32
front conn.
cables 19 03500 03711 03805 03805
Canalis 28 03500 03711 03804 +
03805 x 2
03805
NW20/32
rear conn.
cables 14 03500 03711 03805
Canalis 16 03500 03711 03804 +
03803
Drawout device
NW08/16
front conn.
cables 19 03500 03710 03804 03805
Canalis 27 03500 03710 03804 x 3 03805
NW08/16
rear conn.
cables 15 03500 03710 03805
Canalis 17 03500 03710 03804 +
03803
NW20/32
front conn.
cables 20 03500 03710 03805 03805
Canalis 28 03500 03710 03805 +
03804 x 2
03805
NW20/32
rear conn.
cables 15 03500 03710 03805
Canalis 17 03500 03710 03804 +
03803
Note: Install covers on the arc chutes, 685960C (three-pole device) or 685961C (four-pole
device).
Distribution
Flat or Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
6
8
1
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
7
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
9
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
0
Device Front
connectors
Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB
connection
l
Fixed/drawout device
NW08/16 3P b must be made
(2)
04662 x 2
(1)
04926 +
04927
4P b must be made
(2)
04662 x 2
(1)
04926 +
04927
NW20/32 3P b must be made
(2)
04662 x 2
(1)
04926 +
04927
4P b must be made
(2)
04662 x 2
(1)
04926 +
04927
(1) For an Icw u 75 kA rms, use three free supports (04662 x 3).
(2) For the connection to flat busbars > 1600 A, order one joint per phase:
v 1 joint for busbars, W = 50/60 mm (04640)
v 1 joint for busbars, W = 80/100 mm (04641)
Note: To make measurements:
b install the CTs preferably upstream, on the supply terminal extension bars
b or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection). In this case, add one module
and a plain front plate (03801)
b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values.
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page 400E22210.fm/2.
Selection of flat busbars: see page 400E22310.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
6
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21110.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Masterpact NT06 to NT16

Front connection
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
1
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
3
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
5
Device Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Vert. conn.
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Spacing
rods
Cable
cover
Fixed device
NT06/10 3P b 47335 33642 04852
4P b 47336 33643 04852
NT12/16 3P b 47335 33642 33644 04691 04852
4P b 47336 33643 33645 04691 04852
Drawout device
NT06/10 3P b 33642 04852
4P b 33643 04852
NT12/16 3P b 33642 33644 04691 04852
4P b 33643 33645 04691 04852
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
5
Canalis connection
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
1
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
7
Device Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed device
NT06/12 3P b 47335 03561 04703 04711 04871 +
04852
4P b 47336 03561 04704 04712 04871 +
04852
Drawout device
NT06/12 3P b 03561 04703 04711 04871 +
04852
4P b 03561 04704 04712 04871 +
04852
Rear connection
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
9
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
0
Device Vertical rear
connectors
Terminal extension bar
support
Cable cover
Fixed/drawout device
NT06/16 b 04693 x 2 04854
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
7
Canalis connection
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
9
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
0
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
7
Device Vertical
rear
conn.
Terminal
extension
bar
support
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed/drawout device
NT06/16 3P b 04693 x 2 03561 04703 04713 04871 +
04854
4P b 04693 x 2 03561 04704 04714 04871 +
04854
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21110.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Masterpact NT06 to NT16

Device installation
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
7
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
3
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
4
Device No. of
vert.
mod.
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NT06/10
front conn.
cables 12 03484 03692 03802 03803
Canalis 17 03484 03692 03804 +
03803
03803
NT12
front conn.
cables 14 03484 03692 03804 03803
Canalis 17 03484 03692 03804 +
03803
03803
NT16
front conn.
cables 14 03484 03692 03804 03803
NT06/16
rear conn.
cables 10 03484 03692 03803
Canalis 16 03484 03692 03806 03803
Drawout device
NT06/10
front conn.
cables 13 03483 03691 03802 03803
Canalis 18 03483 03691 03804 +
03803
03803
NT12
front conn.
cables 15 03483 03691 03804 03803
Canalis 18 03483 03691 03804 +
03803
03803
NT16
front conn.
cables 15 03483 03691 03804 03803
NT06/16
rear conn.
cables 11 03483 03691 03803
Canalis 16 03483 03691 03805 03803
Distribution
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
5
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
6
Device Front connectors Prefabricated
connection
Cover for BB
connection
Fixed device
NT06/12 3P b 04475 04926
4P b 04476 04926
NT16 3P b 04489 04926
4P b 04490 04926
Drawout device
NT06/12 3P b 04477 04926
4P b 04478 04926
NT16 3P b 04491 04926
4P b 04492 04926
Note: To make measurements:
b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional
module is required; add a plain front plate (03801)
b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values.
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page 400E22210.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
9 Flat busbars
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
5
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
7
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
0
Device Front connectors Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB
connection
Fixed device
NT06/16 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Drawout device
NT06/16 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Note: To make measurements:
b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional
module is required; add a plain front plate (03801)
b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values.
Selection of flat busbars: see page 400E22310.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21120.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS1600b to 3200


Connection
Front connection using cables
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
1
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
0
Device Front
connectors
Vertical-
connection
adapters
Terminal
extension bar
support
Cubicle depth
(mm)
Fixed device
NS1600b 3P b 33975 04694 400
4P b 33976 04694 400
NS2000/2500 3P b 33975 04694 600
4P b 33976 04694 600
NS3200 3P b 04694 600
4P b 04694 600
NS3200.
Device installation
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
6 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NS1600b/3200 14 03501 03716 03803 03805
NS1600b.
Distribution
Flat or Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
7 Device Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB connection
Fixed device
NS1600b/3200 must be made 04662 x 2 04926 + 04927
Note: To make measurements:
b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional
module is required; add a plain front plate (03801)
b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values.
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page 400E22210.fm/2.
Selection of flat busbars: see page 400E22310.fm/2.
NS1600b.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21120.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS1600b to 3200
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21130.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS630b to NS1600
Vertical mounting

Front connection
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
3
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
5
Device Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Vert. conn.
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Spacing
rods
Cable
cover
Fixed device
NS630b/1000 3P b 33596 33642 04851
4P b 33597 33643 04851
NS1250/1600 3P b 33596 33642 33644 04691 04851
4P b 33597 33643 33645 04691 04851
Drawout device
NS630b/1000 3P b 33642 04852
4P b 33643 04852
NS1250/1600 3P b 33642 33644 04691 04852
4P b 33643 33645 04691 04852
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
5 Canalis connection
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
7
Device Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed device
NS630b/1250 3P b 33596 03561 04703 04711 04871 +
04851
4P b 33597 03561 04704 04712 04871 +
04851
Drawout device
NS630b/1250 3P b 03561 04703 04711 04871 +
04852
4P b 03561 04704 04712 04871 +
04852
Rear connection
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
9
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
0
Device Vertical rear
connectors
Terminal extension bar
support
Cable cover
Fixed device
NS630b/1600 b 04693 x 2 04853
Drawout device
NS630b/1600 b 04693 x 2 04854
D
D
3
8
0
7
9
7 Canalis connection
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
9
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
0
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
7
Device Vert. rear
conn.
Terminal
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed device
NS630b/1600 3P b 04693 x 2 03561 04703 04713 04871 +
04853
4P b 04693 x 2 03561 04704 04714 04871 +
04853
Drawout device
NS630b/1600 3P b 04693 x 2 03561 04703 04713 04871 +
04854
4P b 04693 x 2 03561 04704 04714 04871 +
04854
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21130.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS630b to NS1600
Vertical mounting

Device installation
D
D
3
8
0
6
5
0
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
6
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
2
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
3
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
4
Device No. of
vert.
mod.
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NS630b/1000
front conn.
cables 12 03482 03690 03802 03803
Canalis 17 03482 03690 03804 +
03803
03803
NS1250
front conn.
cables 14 03482 03690 03804 03803
Canalis 17 03482 03690 03804 +
03803
03803
Fixed Compact NS. NS1600
front conn.
cables 14 03482 03690 03804 03803
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
7
NS630b/1600
rear conn.
cables 10 03482 03690 03803
Canalis 16 03482 03690 03806 03803
Drawout device
NS630b/1000
front conn.
cables 13 03483 03691 03802 03803
Canalis 18 03483 03691 03804 +
03803
03803
NS1250
front conn.
cables 15 03483 03691 03804 03803
Canalis 18 03483 03691 03804 +
03803
03803
NS1600
front conn.
cables 15 03483 03691 03804 03803
NS630b/1600
rear conn.
cables 11 03483 03691 03803
Canalis 16 03483 03691 03805 03803
Withdrawable Compact NS.
Distribution
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
5
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
6
Device Front
connectors
Prefabricated
connection
Cover for BB
connection
Fixed device
NS630b/1250 3P b 04485 04926
4P b 04486 04926
NS1600 3P b 04487 04926
4P b 04488 04926
Withdrawable device
NS630b/1250 3P b 04477 04926
4P b 04478 04926
NS1600 3P b 04491 04926
4P b 04492 04926
Note: To make measurements:
v install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values
v or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add
a plain front plate downstream(03801).
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page 400E22210.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
9 Flat busbars
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
5
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
7
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
0
Device Front
connectors
Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB
connection
Fixed device
NS630b/1600 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Withdrawable device
NS630b/1600 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Note: To make measurements:
v install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values
v or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add
a plain front plate downstream (03801).
Selection of flat busbars: see page 400E22310.fm/2.
H
HH
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21130.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS630b to NS1600
Horizontal mounting

Connection
Front connection Rear connection
Device Connection transfer
assembly + cover
Rear connection cover
Fixed Compact NS, front connection
NS630b/1000 3P 04483 04844
4P 04484 04844
Connection transfer assembly.
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
0 Device No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Cut-out front plate
Fixed Compact NS, front connection
NS630b/1000 3P/4P 7 03480 03687
Distribution
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
1 Device Prefabricated
connection
Connection cover
Fixed Compact NS, front connection
NS630b/1000 3P 04473 04842
4P 04474 04842
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page 400E22210.fm/2
Prefabricated connection + cover.
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
7
Flat busbars
Device Connection Connection cover
Fixed Compact NS, front connection
NS630b/1000 3P/4P must be made 04842
Selection of flat busbars: see page 400E22310.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21130.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS630b to NS1600
Horizontal mounting
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21150.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Horizontal
Toggle
Fixed
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
0 Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front plate
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 3 03411 03611
4P 4 03412 03612
NS400/630 3P 4 03451 03651
4P 5 03452 03652
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
1
3 Device Prefabricated connection
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04423
4P 04424
NS400/630 3P 04453
4P 04454
Prefabricated connection
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
3
Flat busbars
Device Connection Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P must be made 29321
4P must be made 29322
NS400/630 3P must be made 32562
4P must be made 32563
Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page 100E22500.fm/2.
Short terminal shields.
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
4 Front connection Rear connection
Device Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
or Connection transfer
assembly
Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/250 3P 29323 04425 29321
(1)
4P 29324 04426 29322
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32564 04455 32562
(1)
4P 32565 04456 32563
(1)
Fixed Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/250 3P 29323 04429
(2)
+ 29321 29321
(1)
4P 29324 04430
(2)
+ 29322 29322
(1)
Vigi NS400/630 3P 32564 04459
(2)
+ 32562 32562
(1)
4P 32565 04460
(2)
+ 32563 32563
(1)
Connection transfer assembly. (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning:
see page 400E22920.fm/2.
(2) No connection.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21150.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Vertical
Toggle
Fixed
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
6 Device No. of
devices
No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/160 3/4 6 03420 03243 03801
NS250 3/4 7 03420 03243 03802
NS400 1 11 03461 03273 03801 03801
NS400 2 11 03461 03663 03802 03803
NS630 1 13 03461 03273 03802 03802
NS630 2 13 03461 03663 03803 03804
Fixed Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/160 3/4 8 03420 03241 03801
Vigi NS250 3/4 9 03420 03241 03802
Vigi NS400 1 13 03461 03276 03802
Vigi NS400 2 13 03461 03664 03802 03803
Vigi NS630 1 15 03461 03276 03801 03803
Vigi NS630 2 15 03461 03664 03803 03804
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
1 (1) For the Compact NS100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream
plain front plate (03802).
Accessories
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
9
Blanking plates: see page 100E21100.fm/2.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
8 Device No. of devices Polypact with connection
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 4 x 3P 04403
3 x 4P 04404
Flat busbars
Device No. of devices Polypact without connection
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 4 x 3P 04407
3 x 4P 04408
Accessories Cat. no.
Insulated distribution block with connection. Polypact tooth-caps 04809
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
6 Front connection Rear connection
Device Long terminal shields
(set of 2)
Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29323 29321
(1)
4P 29324 29322
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32564 32562
(1)
4P 32565 32563
(1)
(1) Size reduced one module downstream.
Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 400E22920.fm/2.
Front connection with terminal shields.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21150.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Horizontal
Toggle
Plug-in
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
1 Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front plate
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 3 03413 03611
4P 4 03414 03612
NS400/630 3P 4 03453 03651
4P 5 03454 03652
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
2 Device Prefabricated connection Terminal shields (set of 2)
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04427 29332
4P 04428 29333
NS400/630 3P 04457 32584 + 32562
4P 04458 32585 + 32563
Prefabricated connection + terminal shields.
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
6
Flat busbars
Device Connection Terminal shields (set of 2)
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P must be made 29332
4P must be made 29333
NS400/630 3P must be made 32584 + 32562
4P must be made 32585 + 32563
Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page 100E22500.fm/2.
Terminal shields.
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
5
1
5 Front connection Rear connection
Device Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
or transfer assembly
(w/o connection) +
long terminal shields
Long insulated
terminals
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29332 04429 + 29332 29276
(1)
4P 29333 04430 + 29333 29277
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32588 04459 + 32584 +
32562
32526
(1)
4P 32589 04460 + 32585 +
32563
32527
(1)
(1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 400E22920.fm/2.
Transfer assembly (w/o connection)+ long terminal shields.
A
B
C D
E F
G
H
A
B
C D
E F
G
H
G
H
G
H
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21150.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Vertical
Toggle
Plug-in
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
1
7 Device No. of
devices
No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Plug-in Compact NS
NS100/160 3/4 7 03421 03243 03801 03801
NS250 3/4 8 03421 03243 03801 03802
NS400 1 11 03461 03273 03801 03801
NS400 2 11 03461 03663 03802 03803
NS630 1 13 03461 03273 03802 03802
NS630 2 13 03461 03663 03803 03804
Plug-in Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/160 3/4 9 03421 03241 03801 03801
Vigi NS250 3/4 10 03421 03241 03801 03802
Vigi NS400 1 13 03461 03276 03802
Vigi NS400 2 13 03461 03664 03802 03803
Vigi NS630 1 15 03461 03276 03801 03803
Vigi NS630 2 15 03461 03664 03803 03804
(1) For the Compact NS100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream
plain front plate (03802).
Accessories
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
9
Blanking plates: see page 100E21100.fm/2.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
2
0 Device No. of devices Polypact (with connection)
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 4 x 3P 04405
3 x 4P 04406
Flat busbars
Device No. of devices Polypact (w/o connection)
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 4 x 3P 04407
3 x 4P 04408
Accessories Cat. no.
Polypact tooth-caps 04809
Connection
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
9 Front connection Rear connection
Device Long terminal shields (set of 2) Long insulated terminals
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29332 29276
(1)
4P 29333 29277
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32588 32526
(1)
4P 32589 32527
(1)
(1) Size reduced one module downstream.
Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 400E22920.fm/2.
Front connection with long terminal shields.
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21150.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Horizontal
Rotary handle, motor mechanism
Fixed, plug-in
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
1
1 Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Collar and raiser
Fixed or plug-in Compact NS
NS100/250 3P 3 03413 03613
4P 4 03414 03614
NS400/630
(1)
3P 4 03453 03653
4P 5 03454 03654
Fixed or plug-in Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 3 03413 03613 29285
Rotary handle 4P 4 03414 03614 29285
NS100/250 3P 3 03413 03613 29285
Motor mech. 4P 4 03414 03614 29285
NS400/630
(1)
3P 4 03453 03653 29285
Rotary handle 4P 5 03454 03654 29285
(1) For direct installation under horizontal busbars, the busbars must be covered.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
8 Device Prefabricated connection Terminal shields (set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04427 29321
4P 04428 29322
NS400/630 3P 04457 32562
4P 04458 32563
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04427 29332
4P 04428 29333
NS400/630 3P 04457 32584 + 32562
4P 04458 32585 + 32563
Prefabricated connection + terminal shields.
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
9
Flat busbars
Device Connection Terminal shields (set of 2)
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P must be made 29321
4P must be made 29322
NS400/630 3P must be made 32562
4P must be made 32563
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P must be made 29332
4P must be made 29333
NS400/630 3P must be made 32584 + 32562
4P must be made 32585 + 32563
Terminal shields. Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page 100E22500.fm/2.
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
0 Front connection Rear connection
Device Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
or transfer assembly
(w/o connection) +
terminal shields
Short
terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Long
insulated
terminals
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29323 04429 + 29321 29321
(1)
Vigi NS100/250 4P 29324 04430 + 29322 29322
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32564 04459 + 32562 32562
(1)
Vigi NS400/630 4P 32565 04460 + 32563 32563
(1)
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29332 04429 + 29332 29276
(1)
Vigi NS100/250 4P 29333 04430 + 29333 29277
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32588 04459 + 32584 +
32562
32526
(1)
Transfer assembly (w/o connection)+ long terminal shields. Vigi NS400/630 4P 32589 04460+ 32585 +
32563
32527
(1)
(1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 400E22920.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21150.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Vertical
Rotary handle, motor mechanism
Fixed, plug-in
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
1
6
Device No.
dev.
No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downst.
front plate
Collar
and
raiser
Fixed Compact NS
NS100/160 3/4 6 03422 03243 03801
NS250 3/4 7 03422 03243 03802
NS400 1 11 03461 03275 03801 03801
NS400 2 11 03461 03663 03802 03803
NS630 1 13 03461 03275 03802 03802
NS630 2 13 03461 03663 03803 03804
Fixed Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/160 3/4 8 03422 03244 03801 29285
Vigi NS250 3/4 9 03422 03244 03802 29285
Vigi NS400 (rot.) 1 13 03461 03277 03802 29285
Vigi NS400 (rot.) 2 13 03461 03665 03802 03803 29285
Vigi NS630 (rot.) 1 15 03461 03277 03801 03803 29285
Vigi NS630 (rot.) 2 15 03461 03665 03803 03804 29285
Plug-in Compact NS
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
0
0
NS100/160 3/4 7 03421 03243 03801 03801
NS250 3/4 8 03421 03243 03801 03802
NS400 1 11 03461 03275 03801 03801
NS400 2 11 03461 03663 03802 03803
NS630 1 13 03461 03275 03802 03802
NS630 2 13 03461 03663 03803 03804
Plug-in Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/160 3/4 9 03421 03244 03801 03801 29285
Vigi NS250 3/4 10 03421 03244 03801 03802 29285
Vigi NS400 (rot.) 1 13 03461 03277 03802 29285
Vigi NS400 (rot.) 2 13 03461 03665 03802 03803 29285
Vigi NS630 (rot.) 1 15 03461 03277 03801 03803 29285
Vigi NS630 (rot.) 2 15 03461 03665 03803 03804 29285
(1) For the Compact NS100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream
plain front plate (03802).
Accessories
Blanking plates: see page 100E21100.fm/2.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
1
9
Device No. of devices Polypact (with connection)
Fixed or plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 4 x 3P 04405
3 x 4P 04406
Flat busbars
Device No. of devices Polypact (w/o connection)
Fixed or plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 4 x 3P 04407
3 x 4P 04408
Accessories Cat. no.
Insulated distribution block with connection. Polypact tooth-caps 04809
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
7
0
2
Front connection Rear connection
Device Long terminal shields (set of 2) Short terminal
shields (set of 2)
Long insulated
terminals
Fixed Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29323 29321
(1)
4P 29324 29322
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32564 32562
(1)
4P 32565 32563
(1)
Plug-in Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29332 29276
(1)
4P 29333 29277
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32588 32526
(1)
Front connection with long terminal shields. 4P 32589 32527
(1)
(1) Size reduced one module downstream.
Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 400E22920.fm/2.
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21150.fm/8 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Horizontal
All controls
Withdrawable
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
8 Device No. of
devices
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Collar and
raiser
Compact NS
NS100/250 1 5 03415 03618
NS400/630 1 6 03462 03657
Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/250 1 5 03415 03618 29285
Vigi NS400/630
toggle, rotary
handle
1 6 03462 03657 29285
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
0 Device Prefabricated connection Long terminal shields (set of 2)
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 04427 29332
4P 04428 29333
NS400/630 3P 04457 32588
4P 04458 32589
Prefabricated connection + terminal shields.
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
1
Flat busbars
Device Connection Long terminal shields (set of 2)
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P must be made 29332
4P must be made 29333
NS400/630 3P must be made 32588
4P must be made 32589
Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page 100E22500.fm/2.
Long terminal shields.
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
2 Front connection Rear connection
Device Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
or transfer assembly
(w/o connection) +
long terminal shields
Long insulated
terminals
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29332 04429 + 29332 29276
(1)
4P 29333 04430 + 29333 29277
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32588 04459 + 32588 32526
(1)
4P 32589 04460 + 32589 32527
(1)
(1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 400E22920.fm/2.
Transfer assembly (w/o connection)+ long terminal shields.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21150.fm/9 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Vertical
All controls
Withdrawable
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
3
9 Device No. of
devices
No. of
vert.
mod.
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downst.
front plate
Collar and
raiser
(1 per device)
Compact NS
NS100/160 2 8 03421 03243 03802 03801 29284
(1)
NS250 2 9 03421 03243 03802 03802 29284
(1)
NS400
toggle
1 11 03461 03273 03801 03801 32534
NS400
rotary handle,
motor mech.
1 11 03461 03275 03801 03801
NS400 2 11 03461 03663 03802 03803 32534
(1)
NS630
toggle
1 13 03461 03273 03802 03802 32534
NS630
rotary handle,
motor mech.
1 13 03461 03275 03802 03802
NS630 2 13 03461 03663 03803 03804 32534
(1)
Vigicompact NS
Vigi NS100/160 2 10 03421 03244 03802 03801 29285
+ 29284
(1)
Vigi NS250 2 11 03421 03244 03802 03802 29285
+ 29284
(1)
Vigi NS400
toggle
1 13 03461 03276 03802 29285
+ 32534
Vigi NS400
rotary handle
1 13 03461 03277 03802 29285
Vigi NS400
toggle
2 13 03461 03664 03802 03803 29285
+ 32534
Vigi NS400
rotary handle
2 13 03461 03665 03802 03803 29285
Vigi NS630
toggle
1 15 03461 03276 03801 03803 29285
+ 32534
Vigi NS630
rotary handle
1 15 03461 03277 03801 03803 29285
Vigi NS630
toggle
2 15 03461 03664 03803 03804 29285
+ 32534
Vigi NS630
rotary handle
2 15 03461 03665 03803 03804 29285
(1) For devices with toggle only.
Connection
D
D
3
8
1
1
5
7 Front connection Rear connection
Device Long terminal shields (set of 2) Long insulated terminals
Withdrawable Compact NS and Vigicompact NS
NS100/250 3P 29332 29276
(1)
4P 29333 29277
(1)
NS400/630 3P 32588 32526
(1)
4P 32589 32527
(1)
(1) Size reduced one module downstream.
Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 400E22920.fm/2.
A
B
C
A
B
C
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21160.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Source-changeover systems
Compact / Masterpact

Source changeover
General
To ensure the supply of energy at all times, certain electrical installations are
connected to two sources:
b the normal source
b the replacement source that steps in to supply the installation if the normal source
is not available.
A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compact
or Masterpact switch-disconnectors or circuit breakers (or a mixture) avoids
simultaneous connection of the two sources during switching.
The source-changeover system can be:
b manual when the devices are mechanically interlocked
b remote operated when there is also an electrical interlocking system
b automatic, by adding an automatic controller that manages switching from one
source to another according to a number of external parameters.
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
9
Manual source-changeover system
This is the most simple system. A human operator is required and consequently, the
transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is delayed.
A manual source-changeover system comprises two or three manually controlled
devices (circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors) that are mechanically interlocked.
The interlocking system avoids simultaneous connection (even transient) of the two
sources.
Remote-operated source-changeover system
This is the most commonly used system. No human intervention is required.
The transfer from the normal to the replacement source is managed electrically.
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three devices
linked by an electrical interlocking system implemented in a number of manners.
Device control is backed up by a mechanical interlocking system that protects
against the consequences of an electrical malfunction and inhibits incorrect manual
operation.
Automatic source-changeover system
When a remote-operated source-changeover system is combined with an automatic
controller, the sources can be controlled automatically according to a number of
programmed operating modes.
This solution provides optimum energy management:
b switching to a replacement source depending on any external conditions
b management of sources
b regulation
b emergency source replacement, etc.
A communications function for dialogue with a supervisor is available for the
automatic controller.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21160.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Source-changeover system
Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Masterpact NT06 to NT16, fixed, drawout
Compact NS630b to 1600, withdrawable
Device layout
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
1
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
2
Front connection. Front connection to the upper device and rear
connection to the lower device.
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
7
Devices side by side in two adjacent cubicles.
Manual source-changeover
system
Device installation
Devices mounted vertically:
Masterpact NW08/32: see page 400E21100.fm/2
Masterpact NT06/16: see page 400E21110.fm/2
Compact NS630b/1600: see page 400E21130.fm/3.
Mechanical interlocking using cables.
Remote-operated source-
changeover system
Device installation
Devices equipped with an electrical interlocking unit:
Masterpact NW08/32: see page 400E21100.fm/2
Masterpact NT06/16: see page 400E21110.fm/2
Compact NS630b/1600: see page 400E21130.fm/3
Addition of an automatic controller
When a UA or BA automatic controller is added, the sources can be controlled
automatically according to a number of programmed operating modes.
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
3
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Front plate
UA or BA controller
UA or BA controller 4 03417 03671
MERLINGERIN
MERLINGERIN
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21160.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Source-changeover system
Compact NS630b to 1600
Fixed

Manual source-changeover
system
Interlocking of rotary handles
The devices are equipped with an extended rotary handle.
They are mounted horizontally on a dedicated mounting plate.
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
4
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front plate
Compact NS, fixed
NS630b/1000
Rotary handle
13 03491 03695
Designation Catalogue number
Mechanical interlock 33890
Long terminal shields 33628 (for 3P device)
33629 (for 4P device)
NS630b/1000.
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
5
Mechanical interlocking using cables
Device installation
Devices mounted vertically: see page 400E21130.fm/2.
NS630b/1600.
Remote-operated source-
changeover system
Device installation
Devices mounted vertically and equipped with an electrical interlocking unit: see
page 400E21130.fm/3.
Addition of an automatic controller
When a UA or BA automatic controller is added, the sources can be controlled
automatically according to a number of programmed operating modes.
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
3
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Front plate
UA or BA controller
UA or BA controller 4 03417 03671
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
MERLINGERIN
MERLINGERIN
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21160.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Source-changeover system
Compact NS100 to 630
Fixed

Manual source-changeover
system
Interlocking of rotary handles
The devices are equipped with a rotary handle.
They are mounted on a dedicated mounting plate:
b vertically for NS100/250
b horizontally for NS100/630. D
D
3
8
1
5
2
9
NS100/250.
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Compact NS, rotary handle
NS100/250 10 03428 03245 03802 03803
NS400/630 10 03458 03659
Designation Devices For 3P deviceFor 4P device
Long terminal shields NS100/250 29323 29324
NS400/630 32564 32565
Short terminal shields NS100/250 29321 29322
NS400/630 32562 32563
Shields for spreaders NS400/630 32582 32583
Mechanical interlock NS100/250 29369 29369
NS400/630 32621 32621
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
0
Remote-operated source-
changeover system
Device installation
Devices mounted horizontally and equipped with an electrical
interlocking unit.
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
1
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Compact NS, fixed
NS100/250 8 03417 03616
NS400/630 10 03457 03656
Designation Devices For 3P deviceFor 4P device
Long terminal shields NS100/250 29323 29324
NS400/630 32564 32565
Short terminal shields NS100/250 29321 29322
NS400/630 32562 32563
Shields for spreaders NS400/630 32582 32583
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
2
Addition of an automatic controller
When a UA or BA automatic controller is added, the sources can be controlled
automatically according to a number of programmed operating modes.
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
UA or BA controller
UA or BA controller 4 03417 03671
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
3
NS400/630.
ON I
OOFF
ON I
OOFF OOFF OOFF OOFF OOFF
O
reset
A
A
MERLINGERIN
MERLINGERIN
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21200.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630
Horizontal
Front handle

Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
3 Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front plate
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 4 03412 03617
INS-INV320/630 5 03452 03658
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
4 Device Prefabricated connection Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 3P 04427 29322
4P 04428 29322
INS-INV320/630 3P 04457 32563
4P 04458 32563
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
3
Flat busbars
Device Connection Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 must be made 29322
INS-INV320/630 must be made 32563
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
5 Front connection Rear connection
(1)
Device Long terminal shields
(set of 2)
Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 29324 29322
INS-INV320/630 32565 32563
(1) For rear connection, protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see
page 400E22920.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21200.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630
Vertical
Front handle

Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
6

Device No. of
devices
No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 1 7 03420 03248 03801 03801
INS-INV250 3 7 03420 03620 03801 03801
INS-INV320/
400
1 10 03461 03274
INS-INV500/
630
1 11 03461 03274 03801
(1) For the Interpact INS-INV250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add a plain front
plate upstream (03802).
Accessories
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
0
Blanking plates: see page 100E21100.fm/2.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
7 Device Polypact (with connection) Long terminal shields
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 04404
INS-INV320/630 must be made 32565
Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page 100E22500.fm/2.
Accessories Catalogue number
Polypact tooth-caps 04809
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
8
Flat busbars
Device Polypact (w/o connection) Long terminal shields
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 04408
INS-INV320/630 must be made 32565
Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page 100E22500.fm/2.
Accessories Catalogue number
Polypact tooth-caps 04809
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
9 Front connection Rear connection
(1)
Device Long terminal shields Short terminal shields
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 29324 29322
INS-INV320/630 32565 32563
(1) For rear connection, size reduced one module; a plain downstream front plate (03801) is not
needed. Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page 400E22920.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21210.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Interpact INS-INV630b to 2500

Connection
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
0 Device Vert. conn.
adapters
Vertical-
connection
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Terminal extension
bar support
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
3P 31301 33644
4P 31302 33645
INS-INV2000/
2500
3P 33975 04693
4P 33976 04693
INS-INV630b/1600.
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
3
INS-INV2000/2500.
Device installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
1 Device No. of
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
3P 14 03501 03713 03804 03804
4P 14 03501 03714 03804 03804
INS-INV2000/
2500
3P/4P 14 03501 03715 03803 03803
Distribution
Flat or Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
2 Device Connection Free supports Cover for BB
connection
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
3P 04481 (Linergy) 04926
4P 04482 (Linergy) 04926
INS-INV2000/
2500
must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page 400E22210.fm/2.
Selection of flat busbars: see page 400E22310.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21210.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Interpact INS-INV630b to 2500
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21250.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Source-changeover systems
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630

Manual source-changeover
system with mechanical
interlocking
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
7 Interpact INS-INV250
Devices mounted vertically
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 9 03428 03235 03802 03802
Designation Cat. no.
Mechanical
interlock
31073
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
29324
INS-INV250.
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
8 Interpact INS-INV320/630
Devices mounted horizontally
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV320/630 10 03458 03659
Designation Cat. no.
Mechanical
interlock
31074
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
32565
INS-INV320/630.
A
A
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21250.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Source-changeover system
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630

Complete source-changeover
assembly
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
9 Interpact INS-INV250
Devices mounted vertically
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 9 03428 03247 03802 03802
Designation Rating For 3P device For 4P device
Complete
source-
changeover
assembly
100 A 31140 31141
160 A 31144 31145
200 A 31142 31143
250 A 31146 31147
Designation Cat. no.
Coupling
accessory
29358 (for 3P device)
29359 (for 4P device)
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
29324
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
0 Interpact INS-INV320/630
Devices mounted horizontally
Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV320/630 10 03458 03661
Designation Rating For 3P
device
For 4P
device
Complete
source-
changeover
assembly
320 A 31148 31149
400 A 31150 31151
500 A 31152 31153
630 A 31154 31155
INS-INV320/630. Designation Cat. no.
Coupling
accessory
32619 ((for 3P device)
32620 ((for 4P device)
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
32625
A
A
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21400.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Presentation
Presentation
A rigid modular rail
Made using an aluminium alloy, the rail design is extremely rigid. The rail supports
are crimp mounted.
Fast mounting
The rail supports have positioning studs to guide the rail on the framework.
Only two mounting screws are required.
Multiple functions
A number of devices clip directly onto the rails, including 80 A and 200 A Multiclip
distribution blocks, all horizontal cable-running accessories such as cable straps and
trunking supports, as well as the supports for earth bars.
What is more, for cable running to the terminal block at the top or bottom of the
cubicle, the supports are designed to allow the passage to two vertical trunking
sections on the left and right.
Supply from all directions
Supply to the rows, using comb busbars or Multiclip distribution blocks, can be via:
b flat or Powerclip insulated busbars installed behind the devices
b flat or Linergy busbars installed in a busbar compartment.
Distribution
80 and 200 A Multiclip distribution blocks
b fast and secure front connection using spring terminals
b reliable connections, will not loosen over time, insensitive to vibrations and thermal
variations
b all types of modular devices can be mixed
b easy balancing of phases
b interchangeable devices
b easy installation upgrades
b fully insulated (IPxxB).
Comb busbars
b direct connection to device terminals or via a connector
b fully insulated
b can be cut to length.
Cable running
Straps
b easy and fast to install
b low cost
b perfectly organised and integrated cable running
b professional finish.
Trunking
b traditional solution.
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
6
Compact NS400 with motor mechanism, supplying rows of
Multi 9 devices via Powerclip insulated busbars.
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
7
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21400.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Multi 9 devices
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
1
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail Modular front plate
All Multi 9 devices
All supply systems (comb busbars,
Multiclip) with cable straps and trunking
sections
4 03401 03204
Multi 9 devices y 40 A
Connection via 63/80 A Multiclip or
comb busbars with cable straps
3 03401 03203
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
200 A Multiclip.
Cable running: trunking.
Mounting requires 4 vertical modules.
Note: For a modular row with a 160 A (half row) and 200 A Multiclip distribution block positioned
directly below a non-modular mounting plate (Compact, Interpact, etc.), or at the top of a
switchboard,
Note: add one module (i.e. 4 + 1) and a plain upstream front plate (03801).
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
2
Comb busbars.
Cable running: cable straps.
Mounting requires 3 vertical modules.
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
5
80 A Multiclip.
Cable running: cable straps.
Mounting requires 3 vertical modules.
Disjoncteur NG125
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail Modular front plate
D
D
3
8
2
4
1
6
Disjoncteur NG125
NG125, Vigi NG125 5 03401 03205
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
Note: Width of NG125 circuit breakers: NG125 3P: 9 Multi 9 modules
NG125 4P: 12 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NG125 3P: 18 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NG125 4P: 21 Multi 9 modules
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
9
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular front plate
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
NSA125/160 and Vigi 5 03402 03205
NSA125/160 and Vigi + modular
devices
5 03402 + 28041 03205
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
Note: Width of devices: NSA125/160 3P: 10 Multi 9 modules
NSA125/160 4P: 14 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NSA125/160 3P: 24 Multi 9 modules
Vigi NSA125/160 4P: 27 Multi 9 modules.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21400.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
INS switch-disconnector
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
0
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail Modular front plate
INS160
INS40/160 4 03401 03204
INS100/160 with long terminal shields 5 03401 03205
Capacity of modular rail: 48 Multi 9 modules.
Note: Width of devices: INS40/80: width 10 Multi 9 modules
INS100/160: width 15 Multi 9 modules
Distribution via Powerclip
busbars
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
0
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
1
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
6
Powerclip tap-off blocks.
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
2 Universal power supply block for the
Powerclip insulated busbars.
200 A Multiclip connection (04021).
Presentation
The Powerclip insulated busbars are mounted using a System G adapter (03595)
made up of four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members.
The busbars can be positioned at precisely the desired spot, to the left (preferably),
in the middle or to the right of the row of devices.
The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for
all types of devices (fixed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism,
etc.).
For busbars:
b y 800 mm long, order one System G adapter (03595)
b > 800 mm long, order two System G adapters (03595 x 2).
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Powerclip insulated busbars see page 300E22010.fm/2
System G adapter, W= 500 mm (03595) see page 400E21610.fm/2
Distribution via rear busbars
Installation
Solution 1
The rear flat busbars are mounted using a System G adapter (03595) made up of
four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members.
The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for
all types of devices (fixed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism,
etc.).
The number of adapters that must be ordered depends on the required number of
supports.
Solution 2
The support for the busbars clips to the rear of the modular rail.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
3
Designation
Rear busbars see page 300E22020.fm/2
System G adapter, L = 500 mm (03595) see page 400E21610.fm/2
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21400.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Modular devices
NG125 circuit breakers
NSA125/160 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Distribloc distribution block
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
8
Designation
125 A Distribloc distribution block (04045)
160 A Distribloc distribution block (04046)
see page 100E22010.fm/2
Multiclip distribution blocks
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
5
Designation
Multiclip, 63 A, 4P, 1/2 row (04008) see page 100E22100.fm/2
Multiclip, 80 A, 4P (04004)
Multiclip, 160 A, 4P, 1/2 row (04018)
Multiclip, 200 A, 2P (04012)
Multiclip, 200 A, 3P (04013)
Multiclip, 200 A, 4P (04014)
Connection between 200 A Multiclip 4P and Powerclip insulated
busbars (04021)
Comb busbars
D
D
3
8
0
7
5
5
Designation
Comb busbars see page 120E50050.fm/2
Cable running
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
1
Designation
Cable straps
12 vertical cable straps (04262) see page 100E22600.fm/2
2 covers, 1-meter long, for vertical cable straps (04263)
12 horizontal cable straps (04239)
4 covers, 430 mm long, for horizontal cable straps (04243)
Trunking
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, L = 450 mm (04257)
12 horizontal trunking supports (04255)
Vertical section, 80 x 60 mm, L = 2 m (04267)
Blanking plates
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
5
Designation
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, L = 1 m (03220) see page 100E21100.fm/2
4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, L = 90 mm (03221)
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21500.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Industrial control devices

Series D and K contactors
D
D
3
8
1
1
5
9
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front plate
Series D and K
contactors y 40 A
3 432 mm 03402 03803
GV2/GV3 circuit breakers
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
4
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail Cut-out front
plate
GV2 3 432 mm 03401 03203
GV3 5 432 mm 03402 03205
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
6
Modular blanking plates: see page 100E21100.fm/2
GV2 + contactor combination
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
5
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Transparent
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Combination GV2 + Series D or K contactor y 40 A
GV2 + contactor 5 432 mm 03402 03342 03801
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
GV2 motor circuit breaker + Series K contactor combination.
TeSys U model
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
6
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Transparent front plate
TeSys U model
TeSys U model 4 432 mm 03402 03342
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21500.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Industrial control devices

Tego Power
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
7
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Transparent
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Tego Power
Tego Power 2 to 8
feeders
8 03576 03343 03801 03801
LH4 soft starters
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
8
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front plate
LH4 starter on a modular rail or a slotted plate
LH4 N1
LH4 N2
4 432 mm 03402 03804
Width of devices:
LH4 N1: 45 mm
LH4 N2: 90 mm
LV/LV transformer
D
D
3
8
1
1
6
9
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Slotted
mounting
plate
Plain front plate
LV/LV transformer
ABL6 up to 400 VA 4 03571 03804
Cable running and distribution
accessories
Multiclip distribution blocks
see page 100E22100.fm/2
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
9
Comb busbars
see the technical documentation
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
0
Cable running
see page 100E22600.fm/2
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
1
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21600.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Other devices
Mounting on lateral and longitudinal
cross-members

Universal cross-members
Longitudinal cross-members
Set of two longitudinal cross-members, L = 650 mm.
They are connected directly to the framework (W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150
mm)).
They can also be mounted on the lateral cross-members (see opposite).
They are essentially used to position and support the cables of an incoming device
or to install all types of devices.
Lateral cross-members
They are connected directly to the framework.
They offer numerous positioning holes and can be used to adjust the depth of
longitudinal cross-members.
There are two lengths:
b Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm
deep
b Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 200 mm, can be added to the 400 mm cross-
members for frameworks that are 600 mm deep. They can also be installed
separately.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
3
Longitudinal cross-members attached directly to the
framework.
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
6
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lateral cross-
members
L = 400 mm 03584
L = 200 mm 03586
Set of two longitudinal
cross-members
L = 650 mm 03587
Longitudinal cross-members mounted on lateral cross-
members, L = 400 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
0
Creation of a platform with two lateral and two longitudinal
cross-members.
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
1
Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 200 mm.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21600.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Other devices
Mounting on a plain backplate

Plain backplate
Metal plain backplate, H = 1800 mm.
The backplate is mounted in a framework, L = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150).
Supplied with four angle brackets and two slide rails to facilitate mounting.
The four angle brackets can be replaced by two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2) for
depth adjustment.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
4
Designation Cat. no.
Plain backplate, H = 1800 mm (36 modules) 03570
Useful dimensions:
b width: 510 mm
b height: 1780 mm.
2 slide rails + angle brackets
For the installation and depth adjustment of plain backplates and slotted mounting
plates.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
3
0
9
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 2 slide rails + angle brackets 03593
Plain backplate mounted on slide rails.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21600.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Other devices
Mounting on a slotted plate

Slotted mounting plates + 4 lateral
cross-members
Galvanised, slotted metal mounting plate, supplied with four lateral cross-members.
Installation
b either in the device zone on the four lateral cross-members (depth adjustment is
possible)
b or vertically at the rear of a cable compartment, W = 300 mm (03571) or
W = 400 mm (03572).
In this case, use four universal angle brackets.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
5
Designation Cat. no.
Slotted mounting plate + 4 lateral cross-members
H = 200 mm (4 modules) 03571
H = 300 mm (6 modules) 03572
2 universal angle brackets 03581
Slotted mounting plate in the device compartment.
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
7
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
6
Useful dimensions of the mounting plate
Cat. number H (mm) L (mm)
03571 180 480
03572 280 480
Slotted mounting plate, H = 200 mm, installed vertically in a
cable compartment, W = 300 mm, using four universal angle
brackets. The height occupied is 600 mm (12 modules).
Slotted mounting plate without
lateral cross-members
Galvanised metal, slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm.
Supplied with four angle brackets, they connect directly to the rear of a framework,
W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150 mm).
The mounting plate can also be installed using two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2)
for depth adjustment.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
8
Designation Cat. no.
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm (12 modules) 03574
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
7
Slotted mounting plate attached to the rear of the framework.
D
D
3
8
1
1
7
9
Useful dimensions of the mounting plate:
H = 580 mm, L = 420 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
5
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm, installed on slide rails
(03593 x 2).
Plain and transparent front plates: see
page 300E21600.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21600.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Other devices
Mounting on a modular rail

Modular rails
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
5 Modular rail Useful length (mm) Cat. no.
Modular rail 432 03401
Modular rail (adjustable) 432 03402
Modular rail, with 4 holes, dia. 6.4 mm,
450 mm between centres
1600 04226
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
0
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
7
Modular device rail (03401). Adjustable modular device rail (03402).
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
0
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
5
Modular device rail (04226). Terminal block in a compartment on a modular device
rail (04226).
Modular rail, L = 650 mm
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
6 Designation Cat. no.
Modular device rail, L = 650 mm
(supplied with two angle brackets for mounting on the framework)
03590
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
5
Plain and transparent front plates: see page 300E21600.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21600.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Other devices
Accessories

Universal angle bracket
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
1 Designation Cat. no.
2 universal angle brackets(03581) see
page 100E21110.fm/2
Clip-nuts for slotted mounting
plates
Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates see
page 100E21110.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
2 M4 (03180)
M5 (03181)
M6 (03182)
Clip-nuts for modular rails
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
3 Designation Cat.no.
20 clip-nuts for modular rails see
page 100E21110.fm/2
M4 (03164)
M5 (03165)
M6 (03166)
Pratic raiser
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
4 Designation Cat. no.
5 Pratic raisers(04224) see
page 100E21110.fm/2
Hexagonal spacers
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
5 Designation Cat. no.
M5 hexagonal spacers see
page 100E21110.fm/2
4 spacers H = 9 mm (03185)
H = 23 mm (03186)
H = 55 mm (03187)
M6 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 9 mm (03195)
H = 23 mm (03196)
H = 25 mm (03198)
H = 55 mm (03197)
M8 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 10 + 40 mm (03199)
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21600.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Other devices
Accessories
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21610.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
System G adapter

System G adapter
Kit with four lateral and two longitudinal cross-members that can be depth adjusted.
It is used to install System G components, notably the functional mounting plates, the
Powerclip insulated busbars and the 400 A rear busbars.
It is the means to enhance the flexibility of the Prisma Plus system.
It is available in two widths:
b 500 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment
L = 650 mm)
b 250 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment
L = 400 mm)
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
3
Designation Cat. no.
System G adapter, W= 500 03595
System G adapter, W= 250 03596
Note: The adapter 03595 can be used for all mounting plates, except 03030.
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
4
NS250 circuit breaker installed with a Polybloc distribution
block.
The Powerclip busbars can be positioned to the left, middle or right of the modular row.
Depth adjustable, the busbars can be supplied by an Interpact INS switch-disconnector or a fixed/
withdrawable Compact NS circuit breaker, whatever the type of operating system (toggle, rotary
handle, motor mechanism).
For Powerclip busbars, order two adapters (03595 x 2).
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E21610.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
System G adapter
Catalogue numbers
System P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System P
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
CEF
400E22000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Busbar presentation

Prisma Plus provides electrical
switchboards with a complete and
consistent system capable of supplying
electrical energy where it is needed:
b modern, high-performance busbars
b perfectly sized, prefabricated connections
b distribution blocks that blend perfectly with
the devices.
All components are put through rigorous
tests with Schneider Electric devices to
ensure that the resulting switchboards are
dependable and comply with international
standard IEC 60439-1.
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
1
Linergy busbars for switchboards up to 1600 A.
D
D
3
8
2
2
7
8
Linergy busbars for switchboards up to 3200 A.
Two parallel, vertical busbars must be interconnected by three equipotential links.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Busbar presentation

Horizontal and lateral busbars up to 3200 A require the
same amount of space.
b horizontal busbars
v flat copper bars without holes, L = 2000 mm,
5 mm thick
v flat copper bars without holes, L = 2000 mm,
10 mm thick
b lateral busbars
v flat copper bars with holes, L = 1675 mm,
5 mm thick
v flat copper bars with holes, L = 1675 mm,
10 mm thick
v Linergy channelled aluminium busbars,
L = 1675 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
4
Rear busbars up to 1600 A.
b flat copper bars with holes, L = 1675 mm,
5 mm thick
b flat copper bars with holes, L = 1675 mm,
10 mm thick
b Linergy channelled aluminium busbars,
L = 1675 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
5
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22100.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Horizontal busbars
Up to 1600 A
Flat bars 5 mm thick

Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports
attached to the framework.
The tables opposite indicate:
b the number and size of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of busbar supports for each
type of framework, depending on:
v the size of the busbars
v the rated short-time withstand current Icw.
For more information on busbar
calculations, see page 100E42010.fm/2.
Number and size of copper busbars
Permissible current (A) No. of bars / phase
IP y 31 IP > 31
800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5
1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5
1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5
1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
Number of supports
Framework width
(mm)
Size of bars
(mm)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
15 25 30 40 50
W = 650/800 mm 1 bar, 60 x 5
1 bar, 80 x 5
2 bars, 60 x 5 2 3
2 bars, 80 x 5
W = 300 mm All sizes 1 2
W = 400 mm All sizes 1 2
Busbar selection
Flat busbars, L = 2000 mm
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
3 Designation Cat. no.
Copper bar without holes, 60 x 5 04536
Copper bar without holes, 80 x 5 04538
Busbar supports
Two fixed supports for 650/800 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/
400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free
supports.
Designation Cat. no.
Fixed support for horizontal bars 04664
Free support (additional) 04662
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
6
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
5
.
Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s.
04664. 04662.
.
Joints
Designation Cat. no.
1 joint for bars W = 60 mm 04640
W = 80 mm 04641
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
7
04640.
Busbar dimensions
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
8 Type of busbars No. of vertical modules required
Top or bottom horizontal busbars 3
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22100.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Horizontal busbars
Up to 3200 A
Flat bars 10 mm thick

Busbar calculation
Number and size of copper busbars
The bars are secured by insulated supports
attached to the framework.
The tables opposite indicate:
b the number and size of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of busbar supports for each
type of framework, depending on:
v the size of the busbars
v the rated short-time withstand current Icw.
For more information on busbar
calculations, see page 100E42010.fm/2.
Permissible current (A) No. of bars / phase
IP y 31 IP > 31
1200 1080 1 bar, 50 x 10
1400 1250 1 bar, 60 x 10
1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10
2050 1850 2 bars, 50 x 10
2300 2000 2 bars, 60 x 10
2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10
3300 2900 2 bars, 100 x 10
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
Number of supports
Framework width
(mm)
Size of bars
(mm)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
25 30 40 50 60 65 75 85
W = 650/800 mm 1 bar, 50 x 10
1 bar, 60 x 10
4
1 bar, 80 x 10
2 bars, 50 x 10 2 3
2 bars, 60 x 10
2 bars, 80 x 10
2 bars, 100 x 10
W = 300 mm All sizes 1 2
W = 400 mm All sizes 1 2
Busbar selection
Flat busbars, L = 2000 mm
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
9 Designation Cat. no.
Copper bar without holes, 50 x 10 04545
Copper bar without holes, 60 x 10 04546
Copper bar without holes, 80 x 10 04548
Copper bar without holes, 100 x 10 04550
Busbar supports
Two fixed supports for 650/800 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/
400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free
supports.
Designation Cat. no.
Fixed support for horizontal
bars
Width y 80 mm 04664
Width > 80 mm 04664 + 04671
Free support (additional) for
bars
Width y 80 mm 04662
Width > 80 mm 04662 + 04671
Icw 50 kA rms / 1 s.
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
6
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
5
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
1
04664. 04662.
Joints
Designation Cat. no.
1 joint for bars Width 50 and 60 mm 04640
Width 80 and 100 mm 04641
04641.
Busbar dimensions
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
8 Type of busbars No. of vertical modules required
Top or bottom horizontal busbars 3
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22200.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Presentation of Linergy busbars

Linergy busbars
up to 1600 A D
D
3
8
2
3
2
6
Type of busbar
Very rigid profile to improve withstand to
electrodynamic forces.
Connection points accessible from the front and
adjustable from top to bottom.
Compatible with all Prisma Plus prefabricated
connections.
Installation
Can be installed independently on either the left or
right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework (650 +
150 mm) for distribution on either side.
For an Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s, two supports in the
"device" zone are sufficient to maintain the bars. A third
support is required as the bottom support for the bars.
Linergy busbars up to 1600 A.
Linergy busbars
up to 3200 A D
D
3
8
2
3
2
7
Type of busbar
Very rigid profile to improve withstand to
electrodynamic forces.
Connection points accessible from the front and
adjustable from top to bottom.
Compatible with all Prisma Plus prefabricated
connections.
Installation
Two sets of busbars are installed in parallel in two
adjacent frameworks, each 800 mm wide
(650 + 150 mm). They must be interconnected by three
equipotential links. Generally speaking, these links are
provided by:
b the horizontal busbars
b connections in the middle and at the bottom of the
vertical busbars.
For an Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s, two supports in the
"device" zone are sufficient to maintain the bars. A third
support is required as the bottom support for the bars.
Linergy busbars up to 3200 A.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22200.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Catalogue numbers
System P
Distribution
Presentation of Linergy busbars

Presentation of busbars
Linergy busbars are installed in a busbar zone to the left or right of the device zone.
The busbars are secured to the framework by supports that maintain the distances
between busbars. All connection points are directly accessible from the front of the
switchboard.
The bars are channelled and the devices, installed on either side, can be connected
at any height, without drilling.
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
1
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
2
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
3
Sliding bolts enable connections at any height,
without drilling.
All connection points are directly accessible
from the front of the switchboard.
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
4
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
5
Prefabricated connections supply the devices
mounted to the left or right of the busbars.
The bottom support maintains the bars in
position.
400E22200.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Presentation of Linergy busbars

A new generation of channelled
busbars
Linergy channelled busbars implement
advanced technology and are made of
aluminium, a material widely used for
electrical conduction,.
Ductile and malleable, aluminium can be
used to create complex shapes that improve
electrical conduction, rigidity, ventilation and
appearance.
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
8
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
8
Ergonomic shape
The low density of aluminium and its malleability make it possible to produce high-
tech sections offering both exceptional rigidity and minimum weight.
Twice as light as copper for the same current ratings, the busbars can held easily in
one. What is more, their shape is ideal for handling and installation.
Maximum power in less space
The manufacturing process allows great flexibility in terms of the shape, notably for
the creation of internal partitions that increase the current-flow perimeter. In this way,
busbar efficiency is optimised and external dimensions reduced.
As a result, up to 1600 A, these channelled busbars can be installed in compartments
just 150 mm wide and 400 mm deep.
Very rigid shapes
The ease and flexibility of the extrusion process makes it possible to create closed
and ribbed sections offering exceptional rigidity.
Two supports spaced over the bars and one at the bottom are sufficient to cover most
installation needs (Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s).
Always at the right temperature
The increased heat exchange surface enhances the natural convection of the bars.
The bars are anodised to enhance emission and radiation, and thus the evacuation
of heat.
Whatever the switchboard configuration, the bars maintain their performance level.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22200.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Presentation of Linergy busbars

Designed to resist ageing and creep, the
busbar supports, made of a heat-setting,
insulating material, offer a particularly high
level of performance, notably their withstand
to high temperatures.
Their remarkable mechanical withstand
means fewer are required, thus freeing
maximum space along the busbars for the
connection of devices.
P
D
3
9
0
4
1
3
Multi-function busbar supports
The same support is used for all busbars up to 1600 A and can also be used as the
bottom support.
As a result, ordering is easy and stocking costs are reduced.
P
D
3
9
0
3
9
3
Electrical connections without drilling
Tested in special test stations, copper connections are used to interconnect two sets
of busbars.
Connections are fast with 10 mm thick horizontal busbars.
Drilling is not required; the connections are made by clamping the busbars.
P
D
3
9
0
4
1
5
An aluminium bar with a high-quality copper contact surface
A copper powder is thermally projected at high speed along the entire length of the
bar. It forms a rough, exceptionally hard surface. The quality of the electrical
connection is enhanced by the many contact points. The result is convincing and
even better than a traditional copper/copper connection.
Modern busbars
Linergy busbars are produced in a number of different shapes offering both a high
level of performance and good appearance. The anodisation process protects
against ageing and provides an attractive finish.. The copper-coloured bands along
the entire length reflect the modern design and high technology of these busbars.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22210.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Lateral Linergy busbars
up to 3200 A

Busbar calculation
Linergy
busbars
Cat. no. Permissible
current
at 35 C
for switchboard
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
The table opposite indicates:
b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of supports required,
depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second).
Above 1600 A, the busbars must be doubled
and installed in two busbar sections, side by
side. In this case, they must be
interconnected by three equipotential links.
For more information on other ambient
temperatures, see page 100E42020.fm/2.
IP y 31 IP > 31 25 30 40 50 60 65 75 85
Linergy 630 04502 680 590
Linergy 800 04503 840 760
Linergy 1000 04504 1040 950 3
Linergy 1250 04505 1290 1170 4 5
Linergy 1600 04506 1650 1480 7 8
Double busbars
Linergy 2000 04504 x 2 2000 1820
Linergy 2500 04505 x 2 2500 2260 2 x 3 2 x 4 2 x 5
Linergy 3200 04506 x 2 3200 2920
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.
Each catalogue number represents one bar.
Busbar selection
Linergy busbars, L = 1670 mm
Cat. no. selection
See the table below.
Each bar is supplied with a stop for the bottom support.
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
2
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
3
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
4
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
5
Bar 630 A.
Cat. no. 04502
Bar 800 A.
Cat. no. 04503
Bar 1000 A.
Cat. no. 04504
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
6
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
7
Bar 1250 A.
Cat. no. 04505
Bar 1600 A.
Cat. no. 04506
Busbars up to 1600 A.
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22210.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Lateral Linergy busbars
up to 3200 A

D
D
3
8
1
5
0
9
Busbar supports
Supports are used to install busbars to the left or right of the device zone.
They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware.
Designation Cat. no.
Busbar supports 04651
D
D
3
8
0
7
4
1
D
D
3
8
0
7
4
2
Busbar supports. Each bar is supplied with a stop for
installation on the bottom support.
Double busbars up to 3200 A.
Install three equipotential links between the busbars.
Horizontal-busbar connections
These connections are used to connect horizontal busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick, to
lateral Linergy busbars.
Supplied with mounting hardware.
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
9
Designation Cat. no.
Connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick
1000 A connection 04634
1600 A connection 04635
Connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick
width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636
width or horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 + 04642
D
D
3
8
0
5
1
0
Connection 04635 to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
0
Drilling diagram for horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
Connection 04636 to horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22220.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Rear Linergy busbars
up to 1600 A

Busbar calculation
Profil
Linergy
Cat. no. Permissible current at
35 C
for switchboard
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
The table opposite indicates:
b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of supports required,
depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second).
Busbars are installed in cubicles 650 or
800 mm wide, whatever the depth.
For more information on other ambient
temperatures and on the depth available for
devices, see page 100E42020.fm/2.
IP y 31 IP > 31 25 30 40 50
Linergy 630 04502 680 590
3
Linergy 800 04503 840 760
4
Linergy 1000 04504 1040 950
5 Linergy 1250 04505 1290 1170
7
Linergy 1600 04506 1650 1480
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.
Each catalogue number represents one bar.
Busbar selection
Linergy busbars, L = 1670 mm
Cat. no. selection
See the table below.
Each bar is supplied with a stop for the bottom support.
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
1
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
3
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
4
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
5
Bar 630 A.
Cat. no. 04502.
Bar 800 A.
Cat. no. 04503.
Bar 1000 A.
Cat. no. 04504.
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
6
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
7
Bar 1250 A.
Cat. no. 04505.
Bar 1600 A.
Cat. no. 04506.
Busbar supports
The bottom support maintains the bars in position.
They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware.
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position. Designation Cat. no.
Busbar supports 04652
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
2
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
3
Busbar supports. Each bar is supplied with a stop for
installation on the bottom support.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22220.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Rear Linergy busbars
up to 1600 A

Horizontal-busbar connections
These connections are used to connect horizontal busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick, to
vertical rear Linergy busbars.
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
4
Designation Cat. no.
Connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick 04635
(1)
Connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick
width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636
(1)
width of horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 + 04642
(1)
(1) A part of the connection must be made.
Connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
5
Connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22230.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Linergy accessories
Mounting hardware

Presentation
For secure connections, without drilling:
b Linergy bolts clip into the channel of the busbar
b they can slide along the entire length of the busbar
b they cannot fall to the bottom of the switchboard because they are held in place by
the ball in the head, thus facilitating connections
b a mark at the end of the bolt indicates whether the bolt is correctly positioned
b 8.8 class hardware guarantees withstand to tightening torques and to premature
ageing of the electrical contact.
Linergy hardware
Composition of sets:
b set of hardware including 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
8
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 M8 Linergy bolts, L = 25 mm (for cable lugs and flexible bars) 04766
Set of 20 M8 Linergy bolts, L = 39 mm (for copper bars) 04767
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
0
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
1
Copper bar connected to Linergy busbar using
bolt (04767).
Cable lug connected to
Linergy busbar using bolt
(04766).
Flat washers
Presentation
These washers, sold separately, are required for connection of flexible bars to
Linergy busbars.
They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper.
Composition of sets:
b set of 20 flat washers for M8 bolts.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
9
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 M8 flat washers, 20 mm external diameter 04772
Set of 20 M8 flat washers, 24 mm external diameter 04773
Set of 20 M8 flat washers, 28 mm external diameter 04774
Connection cross-section
Determining connections using cables
See page 100E42070.fm/2.
Determining connections using flexible bars
See page 100E42060.fm/2.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22230.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Linergy accessories
Markers

Markers
D
D
3
8
1
2
2
2 Designation Cat. no.
Set of 12 phase markers
(12 clip-in supports + N, L1, L2, L3, PE, PEN labels)
04794
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22300.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Vertical flat busbars
Presentation

Lateral busbars up to 2500 A
D
D
3
8
2
3
3
0
Type of busbar
Flat copper busbars with holes, 5 mm thick
(up to 1600 A).
Flat copper busbars with holes, 10 mm thick
(up to 2500 A).
Two 10 mm holes every 25 mm along the entire length
of the busbars.
Prisma Plus prefabricated connections cannot be used
with these busbars.
Installation
Can be installed independently on either the left or
right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework for
distribution on either side.
Three fixed supports (04661) are mandatory. When
more than three supports are required (see the tables
for busbar calculations on the following pages), use
free supports (04662).
Busbars are positioned on the bottom support (04663).
Lateral busbars up to 3200 A
D
D
3
8
2
3
3
1
Type of busbar
Flat copper busbars with holes, 10 mm thick.
Two 10 mm holes every 25 mm along the entire length
of the busbars.
Prisma Plus prefabricated connections cannot be used
with these busbars.
Installation
Two sets of busbars are installed in parallel in two
adjacent frameworks, each 800 mm wide. They must
be interconnected by three equipotential links.
Generally speaking, these connections are made up of:
b the horizontal busbars
b the connection of the incoming device
b a connection at the bottom of the vertical busbars
(see opposite).
For each set of busbars, three fixed supports (04661)
are mandatory. When more than three supports are
required (see the tables for busbar calculations on the
following pages), use free supports (04662).
Busbars are positioned on the bottom support (04663).
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22300.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Vertical flat busbars
Presentation

Rear busbars up to 1600 A
D
D
3
8
2
2
7
5
Type of busbar
Flat copper busbars with holes, 5 or 10 mm thick.
Two 10 mm holes every 25 mm along the entire length
of the busbars.
Installation
Three fixed supports (04653) are mandatory. When
more than three supports are required (see the tables
for busbar calculations on the following pages), use
free supports (04662).
Mounting chocks (04669) screwed to the busbars rest
on one of the fixed supports.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22310.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Lateral flat busbars
up to 1600 A
Busbars 5 mm thick

Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports.
Three fixed supports, attached to the
framework, are mandatory.
If necessary, additional free supports may
be used.
The bars rest on a bottom support.
The table opposite indicates:
b the number and size of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of supports required in a
cubicle, depending on the rated short-time
withstand current (Icw).
For more information on busbar
calculations, see page 100E42030.fm/2.
Permissible current
for switchboards
No. of bars /
phase
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 15 25 30 40 50
800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 7
1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 3 5
1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
Busbar selection
Flat busbars, L = 1675 mm
D
D
3
8
0
7
2
4 Designation Cat. No.
Copper bar with holes, 60 x 5 mm 04516
Copper bar with holes, 80 x 5 mm 04518
D
D
3
8
1
5
0
5
Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three
supports are required, use additional free supports.
Designation Cat. No.
Fixed support for lateral flat busbars 04661
Free support (additional) 04662
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
9
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
0
04661. 04662.
Busbar chocks
The bottom support maintains the bars in position.
It is not considered a busbar support.
Designation Cat. No.
Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s.
The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports and
two free supports.
Bottom support for lateral flat busbars 04663
D
D
3
8
0
7
2
8
Note: When connecting 5 mm flat bars to horizontal busbars, part no. 04663 is not required.
Horizontal-busbar connections
Connection between the 5 mm thick horizontal busbars and the lateral flat busbars
is direct, once the horizontal bars have been drilled.
D
D
3
8
0
7
2
5
D
D
3
8
0
5
1
2
Drilling diagram for horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22310.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Lateral flat busbars
up to 3200 A
Busbars 10 mm thick

Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports.
Three fixed supports, attached to the
framework, are mandatory. If necessary,
additional free supports may be used.
The bars rest on a bottom support.
The table opposite indicates:
b the number and size of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of supports required in a
cubicle, depending on the rated short-time
withstand current (Icw).
Above 2800 A (2500 A with IP > 31), the
busbars must be doubled and installed in
two busbar sections, side by side. In this
case, they must be interconnected by three
equipotential links.
For more information on busbar
calculations, see page 100E42030.fm/2.
Permissible current
for switchboards
No. of bars /
phase
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 25 30 40 50 60 65 75 85
1200 1080 1 bar, 50 x 10 mm
1400 1250 1 bar. 60 x 10 mm 7 9
1800 1600 1 bar. 80 x 10 mm 5
2050 1850 2 bars, 50 x 10
mm
3
2300 2000 2 bars, 60 x 10
mm
2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10
mm
Double busbars
3200 2820 2 x 1 bar, 80 x 10
mm
2 x 3 2 x 5
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
Busbar selection
Flat busbars, L = 1675 mm
D
D
3
8
1
4
9
7 Designation Cat. no.
Copper bar with holes, 50 x 10 mm 04525
Copper bar with holes, 60 x 10 mm 04526
Copper bar with holes, 80 x 10 mm 04528
D
D
3
8
1
5
0
5
Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three
supports are required, use additional free supports.
Designation Cat. no.
Busbars y 1600 A (IP y 31). Fixed support for lateral flat busbars 04661
Free support (additional) 04662
D
D
3
8
1
4
9
8
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
9
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
0
04661. 04662.
Busbar chocks
The bottom support maintains the bars in position.
It is not considered a busbar support.
Designation Cat. no.
Bottom support for lateral flat busbars 04663
D
D
3
8
1
1
2
4
Busbars up to 3200 A.
Horizontal-busbar connections
Connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick.
D
D
3
8
1
4
9
9 Designation Cat. no.
Connection between vertical busbars
(1 bar/phase) and horizontal busbars
W y 80 mm 04636
W > 80 mm 04636 + 04642
Connection between vertical busbars
(2 bars/phase) and horizontal busbars
W y 80 mm 04637
W > 80 mm 04637 + 04642
Connection between double vertical
busbars and horizontal busbars
W y 80 mm 04636 x 2
W > 80 mm (04636 + 04642) x 2
04661
04662
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22320.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Rear flat busbars up to 1600 A
Flat busbars, 5 mm thick

Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports.
Three fixed supports, attached to the
framework, are mandatory.
If necessary, additional free supports may
be used.
Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars
rest on one of the fixed supports.
The table opposite indicates:
b the number and size of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of supports required,
depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw).
For more information on busbar
calculations, see page 100E42030.fm/2.
Permissible current
for switchboards
Bars / phase No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 15 25 30 40 50
800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 7
1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 3 5
1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
A set of busbars made up of two 80 x 5 mm bars per phase must be installed in a cubicle 600 mm
deep.
Busbar selection
Flat busbars, L = 1675 mm
D
D
3
8
0
7
2
9 Designation Cat. no.
Copper bar with holes, 60 x 5 mm 04516
Copper bar with holes, 80 x 5 mm 04518
D
D
3
8
1
5
0
5
Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three
supports are required, use additional free supports.
Designation Cat. no.
Fixed support for rear flat busbars 04653
Free support (additional) 04662
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
2
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
2
04653. 04662.
Busbar chocks
A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fixed support
and maintains the position of the bar. Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s.
The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports (3 x
04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).
Designation Cat. no.
100 mounting chocks (5 mm) for busbars 04669
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
5
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
3
Chocking for one bar per phase. Chocking for two bars per phase.
Horizontal-busbar connections
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
0 Designation Cat. no.
1600 A connection
connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick 04635
(1)
connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm
thick
Width y 80 mm 04636
(1)
Width > 80 mm 04636 + 04642
(1)
(1) A part of the connection must be made.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22320.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Rear flat busbars up to 1600 A
Flat busbars, 10 mm thick

Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports.
Three fixed supports, attached to the
framework, are mandatory.
If necessary, additional free supports may
be used.
Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars
rest on one of the fixed supports.
The table opposite indicates:
b the number and size of the bars to be
used, depending on the permissible current
level in the busbars
b the number of supports required,
depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw).
For more information on busbar
calculations, see page 100E42030.fm/2.
Permissible current
for switchboards
Size of bars No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 25 30 40 50 60 65 75 85
1200 1080 1 bar, 50 x 10
1400 1250 1 bar, 60 x 10 3 5 7 9
1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35C around the switchboard.
Busbar selection
Flat busbars, L = 1675 mm
D
D
3
8
1
5
0
3 Designation Cat. no.
Copper bar with holes, 50 x 10 mm 04525
Copper bar with holes, 60 x 10 mm 04526
Copper bar with holes, 80 x 10 mm 04528
D
D
3
8
1
5
0
5
Busbar supports
Three fixed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three
supports are required, use additional free supports.
Designation Cat. no.
Fixed support for rear flat busbars 04653
Free support (additional) 04662
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
2
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
2
04653. 04662.
Busbar chocks
A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fixed support
and maintains the position of the bar.
Icw 40 kA rms / 1 s.
The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports (3 x
04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).
Designation Cat. no.
100 mounting chocks (5 mm) for busbars 04669
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
5
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
3
Chocking for one bar per phase. Chocking for two bars per phase.
Horizontal-busbar connections
D
D
3
8
1
5
0
4 Designation Cat. no.
Connection y 1600 A for horizontal bars, 10 mm thick
width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636
(1)
width of horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 + 04642
(1)
(1) A part of the connection must be made.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22350.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
PE conductor

Vertical PE conductor
Linergy L = 1670
The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment.
A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using three supports.
Selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
3
Icw (kA rms / 1 s) Permissible current
(A)
Cat. no.
for bars
y 40 630 04502
> 40 800 04503
Support selection
Set of three supports for a vertical PE (supplied with PE marking) 04657
Mounting of a vertical PE (Linergy).
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
2
Flat bar L = 1675
The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment.
A flat bar is secured to the framework using three supports.
Selection
Icw (kA rms / 1 s) Selection
(mm)
Cat. no.
for bars
y 40 25 x 5 04512
> 40 50 x 5 04515
Support selection
Set of three supports for a vertical PE (supplied with PE marking) 04657
Mounting of a vertical PE (flat bar).
Horizontal PE conductor
A flat bar is mounted at the top or bottom of a switchboard (contrary to horizontal
busbars) using supports.
Selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
4
Icw (kA rms / 1 s) Selection
(mm)
Cat. no.
for bars
y 40 25 x 5 04512
> 40 50 x 5 04515
Support selection
Set of two supports for a horizontal PE 04667
Mounting of a horizontal PE (flat bar).
Connection between PE
conductors
A copper connection plate can be used to connect:
b a vertical PE bar to a horizontal PE bar
b two horizontal PE bars.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
5
8
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two connection plates for horizontal/vertical PE bars 04672
Connection between horizontal PE bars or horizontal/vertical
PE bars.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22350.fm/3 Schneider Electric Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
PE conductor
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22360.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
PEN conductor

Vertical Linergy PEN conductor
The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment.
A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using a mounting kit.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
5
Designation Cat. no.
Linergy bar see
page 100E42090.fm/2
Linergy vertical PEN kit 04656
Contents of Linergy PEN kit
b 4 insulating supports
b 1 neutral disconnecting device
b 1 connection between a horizontal PEN and a vertical PEN y 1600 A.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22360.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
PEN conductor
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22400.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Busbar accessories
Mounting hardware

General
The 8.8 class (64 N/mm) hardware ensures precise tightening torques and a reliable
contact over time.
The hardware is designed to resist creep and ageing of the electrical contact.
It is protected against corrosion by a Zn8c treatment.
M8 bolts
Composition of sets:
b set of 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 40 contact washers.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
7
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 20 mm 04782
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 25 mm 04783
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 30 mm 04784
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 35 mm 04785
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 40 mm 04786
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 45 mm 04787
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 50 mm 04788
Flat washers
Presentation
These washers, sold separately, are required for connection between flexible bars
and flat or Linergy busbars.
They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper.
Composition of sets:
b set of 20 flat washers for M8 bolts.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
8
Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 M8 flat washers, 20 mm external diameter 04772
Set of 20 M8 flat washers, 24 mm external diameter 04773
Set of 20 M8 flat washers, 28 mm external diameter 04774
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22400.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution Busbar accessories

Torque nuts
Can be used to obtain the correct tightening torque (28 Nm) recommended by the
manufacturer, without using a torque wrench.
Torque nuts may be used for all electrical connections.
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
5
Designation Cat. no.
20 M8 torque nuts 04759
Voltage tap-offs
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
6 Designation Cat. no.
20 M10 voltage tap-offs for two 6.35 mm tab connectors 04229
Note: For small lugs (on low-current cables or measurement tap-offs), insert a conducting
washer between the busbar and the lug.
Mounting chocks (5 mm) for flat
busbars
Metal chock, 5 mm thick.
Chocks are used to maintain the position of rear, vertical, flat busbars.
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
3
Designation Cat. no.
100 mounting chocks (5 mm) for busbars 04669
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
4
Chock for rear, vertical, flat busbars.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22450.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Terminal blocks

Introduction
In System P cubicles, terminal blocks are commonly installed in a lateral
compartment, generally 300 or 400 mm wide.
They may also be installed at the top or bottom of the cubicle.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
0
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
1
Terminal blocks, see page 100E22200.fm/2.
C
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22450.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Terminal blocks

Installation at top or bottom
of a cubicle
Terminal blocks are grouped on modular rails that can be depth adjusted behind a
plain front plate.
Designation Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
2 Modular rail, depth adjustable (L = 432 mm) 03402
Width of standard terminal blocks
Max. cable CSA Width of terminal block
4 mm 6 mm
6 mm 8 mm
10 mm 10 mm
16 mm 12 mm
Height required in switchboard
Max. cable CSA No. of vertical modules Corresponding plain
front plate
4 mm 3 03803
6 mm 3 03803
10 mm 5 03805
16 mm 6 03806
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
6 Terminal blocks can also be installed on a modular rail turned using universal angle brackets and
mounted on lateral cross-members.
Designation Cat. no.
Modular rail, L = 1600 mm 04226
2 universal angle brackets 03581
Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 400 mm 03584
Installation in a lateral
compartment
The terminal block is generally installed in the cable compartment, L = 300 or
400 mm.
The terminal blocks clip onto a modular rail. The rail is secured to cable-tie supports
using universal angle brackets for precise positioning of the terminal blocks.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
3
Designation Cat. no.
Modular rail, L = 1600 mm 04226
2 universal angle brackets 03581
Cable-tie supports see
page 400E23220.fm/2
Installation on a device mounting
plate
Terminal blocks can be directly installed on the mounting plates for horizontally
mounted Compact NS100/630 and vertically mounted Compact NS630b/1600 for
connection of auxiliary wires.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
4
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22450.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Earth bars

Earth bar
Presentation
The earth bar can be:
b a bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with a 35
mm terminal and on which earth blocks with spring terminals can be clipped
b an earth bar (200 or 450 mm long), equipped with a 35 mm terminal and clamps
with captive screws.
Earth bar with spring terminals
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
0 Designation Cat. no.
Bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with
a 35 mm tunnel terminal (for earth blocks with spring terminals)
04201
4 earth blocks with 12 x 4 mm spring terminals (L = 75 mm) 04214
4 earth blocks with 3 x 16 mm spring terminals (L = 37 mm) 04215
04215.
Earth bar with clamps
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
6 Designation Cat. no.
Earth bar with 40 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (L = 450 mm) 04200
2 earth bars with 20 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (L = 200 mm) 04202
04200. Installation
The earth bar is mounted on two supports that clip onto the rear of a modular rail
installed horizontally in the device compartment or vertically in the cable
compartment.
Designation Cat. no.
2 supports for earth bar on modular rail 04205
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
7
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
8
Earth bar mounted on rear of modular rail using supports (04205).
04214.
04201.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22450.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Neutral bars
Neutral bar
A neutral bar is created by inserting insulating spacers behind an earth bar.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
9 Designation Cat. no.
Kit for neutral bar 04210
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22500.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Polypact distribution block

Polypact distribution block
Presentation
Polypact is a horizontal distribution block. It connects directly to the mounting plate
and can supply:
b three four-pole and four three-pole Compact NS circuit breakers, whatever the
ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), the operating systems (toggle, rotary handle, motor
mechanism), whether fixed or plug-in, front or rear connection (the circuit breakers
must be equipped with long terminal shields downstream)
b three three-pole or four-pole Interpact INS switch-disconnectors, whatever the
ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), whether front or rear connection.
The design and small size blend perfectly with the devices.
It can be supplied by flat or Linergy busbars positioned to the left or right.
A dependable switchboard
Fully insulated, Polypact contributes to the safety of life and property.
The prefabricated connections supplied separately are secured using torque nuts to
ensure the correct tightness over time, without maintenance.
Numerous and well distributed vents ensure natural convection and optimum cooling
of the conductors.
An upgradeable switchboard
The circuit breakers can be easily connected from the front. It is simple to
interchange a device or to add a device in a reserve slot.
Functional features
There are markings (N, L1, L2, L3) on the front and the sides for the phases.
The running of auxiliary cables between the devices and the corresponding terminal
blocks is also taken into account. Spacious trunking is built into the blocks for
the auxiliary wiring.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
9
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
0
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
6
Fixed Compact NS100/250 with toggle and Interpact INS250
Connection to Linergy busbars Cat. no.
Polypact with prefabricated connections
Three-pole distribution block 04403
Four-pole distribution block 04404
Fixed/plug-in Compact NS, all operating systems
(1)
Connection to flat or Linergy busbars Cat. no.
Polypact with prefabricated connections
(2)
Three-pole distribution block 04405
Four-pole distribution block 04406
Polypact without connection
(3)
Three-pole distribution block 04407
Four-pole distribution block 04408
(1) For plug-in Compact NS circuit breakers, order the adapter 29306 (3P) or 29307 (4P) with the
base.
(2) The prefabricated connections are not compatible with form 2 separation.
In this case, use the form 2 restoration kit 04924 (see page 400E22900.fm/2).
(3) Make the connection with flexible bars, 32 x 6 mm (04752), see page 100E22500.fm/2.
Electrical characteristics
b rated operational current: distribution-block derating follows the normal derating
curves of Compact NS and Interpact INS devices.
b rated insulation level: 750 V
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV
b rated short-time withstand current Icw = 8.5 kA rms / 1 second
b short-circuit withstand current compatible with the breaking capacity of the
Compact NS circuit breakers connected to the distribution block.
Supplied with:
b self-adhesive labels to mark the phases for the connections to the busbars.
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
7
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
9
04404. 04408.
A
B
C
A
B
C
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22500.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Polypact distribution block

D
D
3
8
1
2
5
0
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
1
Supply of three NS100/250 four-pole devices
equipped with long terminal shields
downstream.
Auxiliary wires running in the built-in trunking.
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
2
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
3
Phase marking on the front of the distribution
block.
Phase marking on the side of the distribution
block.
Identification labels on the flexible
connections.
Tooth-caps
Designation Cat. no.
Polypact tooth-caps 04809
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
4 The caps block off the reserve terminals on a Polypact three-pole or four-pole
distribution block.
Made of an insulating material, they simply clip on from the front.
D
D
3
8
1
2
5
5
A
B
C
A
B
C
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22900.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Form 2 partitioning

Introduction
In most installations, Prisma Plus cubicles do not require partitioning.
The protection of life and property is a standard feature due to:
b front plates that require a tool to be removed
b keylocks on the doors providing access to live parts
b partitioning of the upstream connection of the incoming device.
Nonetheless, Prisma Plus offers different levels of partitioning to create separations
inside the electrical switchboard (forms 2, 3 and 4). Decisions concerning the form of
separation are the subject of an agreement between the manufacturer and the user.
Electrical switchboards must meet the degree of protection IP2X to comply with
standard IEC 60439-1.
Definition of form 2
Separation of busbars from the functional units:
b protection against contact with live parts upstream of the outgoing circuits
b protection against penetration of foreign solid bodies.
The two types of form 2 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
8
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
8
Form 2a. Form 2b.
b Form 2a
Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from the busbars, but not the terminals.
b Form 2b
Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars.
The functional units and the terminals are separated from the busbars.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22900.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Form 2 partitioning

Form 2 configuration
Prisma Plus offers form 2b partitioning which provides greater safety.
It constitutes a physical separation between the horizontal and vertical busbars, on
one hand, and the functional units on the other, in compliance with standard IEC
60439-1.
The functional units and the terminals are separated from the busbars.
Form 2 partitioning protects operators against direct contact with the main busbars.
It also protects the electrical installation against contact of foreign bodies with the live
parts.
For further protection of operators and in addition to the recommendations contained
in the standard, Schneider Electric systematically advises:
b partitioning of the connections upstream and downstream of the incoming device
so that operators are perfectly safe at all points in the switchboard when the incoming
device is off (open).
b the use of prefabricated connections with built-in terminal shrouds or the
installation of upstream terminal shields on outgoing devices.
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
1
D
D
3
8
2
2
7
9
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22900.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Form 2 partitioning

Partitioning of lateral vertical
busbars
Lateral partitioning
b vertical barrier made of insulating slats
b can be installed on both sides of Linergy and flat busbars
b made up of:
v four supports that clip to the framework
v five extruded slats that clip to the supports
v two metal plates at the top and bottom that can be cut out to pass a PE or PEN
conductor
b the space between the slats is sufficient for prefabricated connections (copper or
insulated flexible bars) or for cables up to 35 mm, while maintaining the degree of
protection IP2X
b compliance with standard IEC 695.2.1 concerning withstand to fire.
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
1
Designation Cat. no.
Form 2 side barrier 04922
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
6
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
7
04922.
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
2
Front and rear barrier
Barrier, W = 150 mm, from top to bottom of the cubicle.
Can be installed in the front and rear of the busbar compartment.
Protects against direct contact with the busbars.
Front protection
This barrier is not required in front when the cubicle is equipped with a plain or
transparent door.
With door With cover frame
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
8
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
9
For 800 mm cubicles, the door is
systematically supplied with a barrier.
For 800 mm cubicles, the cover frame is
supplied with a wicket door, W = 150 mm, on
which devices can be mounted.
A front barrier is indispensable.
Rear protection
A barrier is required at the rear of the busbar compartment in cubicles that are 600,
800 and 1000 mm deep.
04921.
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
0
Cat. no. selection
Designation Cat. no.
Front or rear barrier for lateral vertical busbars 04921
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22900.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Form 2 partitioning

Form 2 restoration for side-barrier
cut-out
This kit enables passage of the connection between a large device (NW, NT, NS,
etc.) and lateral vertical busbars.
It is made up of an insulated plate (six modules high = 300 mm) that can be cut as
required, supplied with supports and the necessary hardware.
It can be installed at any height in the switchboard.
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
6
Designation Cat. no.
Form 2 restoration kit 04924
Partitioning of upstream and
downstream connections of an
incoming device
See the pages on functional units.
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
5
Partitioning of horizontal busbars
Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars
Set of two barriers (front and rear), plus a slotted barrier for efficient natural
convection in the switchboard.
The barriers can be used to partition horizontal busbars installed at the top or bottom
of the cubicle.
The space required for the busbars is not increased.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
3
Framework dimensions Cat. no.
Framework, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm 04913
W = 400 mm 04914
W = 650 mm 04916
W = 650 + 150 mm 04916
W = 800 mm 04918
Framework, D = 600 mm W = 300 mm 04933
W = 400 mm 04934
W = 300 mm. W = 650 mm 04936
W = 650 + 150 mm 04936
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
7
W = 800 mm 04938
Note: When the busbars are at the bottom of the cubicle, gland plates are mandatory, see
page 400E23100.fm/2.
W = 650 mm.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22910.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Form 3 partitioning

Definition of form 3
Separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional units
from one another.
Separation of the terminals for external conductors from the functional units, but not
from each other.
b protection against contact with live parts
b reduction in the risk of faults between the functional units (propagation of electrical
arcs, etc.).
The two types of form 3 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1
D
D
3
8
1
6
8
0
D
D
3
8
1
6
8
1
Form 3a. Form 3b.

b Form 3a
Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars, but not the
terminals.
b Form 3b
Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars.
The terminals are separated from the busbars, but not from each other.
Form 3 configuration
Prisma Plus offers form 3b.
The form is created by separating each of the functional units in a form 2
switchboard. The devices must be equipped with downstream terminal shields.
Note that the connection transfer assemblies create a separation between the
connection terminals and the functional unit.
D
D
3
8
2
2
8
0
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22910.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Form 3 partitioning

Horizontal partition
The horizontal partition is available in two lengths:
one for frameworks 650 mm wide
one for frameworks 400 mm wide.
It is mounted using a rear support (order one cat. no. per cubicle).
It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard.
For rear connection, vertical partitions are required.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
2
Designation Cat. no.
Horizontal partition
length 650 mm 04901
length 400 mm 04902
Vertical partitions (one cat. no. per functional unit)
height 3 or 4 modules 04955
height 5 or 6 modules 04956
Rear support for partition (one cat. no. per cubicle)
for frameworks 650 mm wide 04943
for frameworks 400 mm wide 04944
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
4
04955.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22930.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Other partitions

Inter-cubicle partition
Metal partition, used to separate two adjacent cubicles.
It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high.
The top and bottom ends have knock-outs for busbars, PE/PEN conductors or
auxiliary wiring.
Supplied with the necessary supports and hardware, the partition is mounted on the
framework and does not hinder installation of the functional mounting plates.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
6
Designation Cat. no.
Inter-cubicle partition
depth 400 mm 04911
depth 600 mm 04931
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E22930.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Other partitions
Catalogue numbers
System P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
Systme PSystem P
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
CEF
400E23000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation

Carefully designed in every detail, Prisma
Plus cubicles are the solution for all
common switchboard configurations up to
3200 A.
A reduced number of catalogue numbers
facilitates selection, while offering the
essential functions such as:
b multiple combination possibilities
b an array of interchangeable cover panels
and doors, IP30 or IP55, without adding
gaskets
b total accessibility to all connection points
in the switchboard
b wide cable compartments
b high for large capacity (36 modules, each
50 mm high).
The discreet design, with simple lines and
oval shapes in the RAL 9001 colour, mean
Prisma Plus cubicles blend in naturally on all
commercial and industrial sites.
They offer 36 modules, each 50 mm high, of
useful space.
They comply with standard EN 50298.
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
2
All cover panels and doors (IP30 or IP55) are secured using quarter-turn fasteners.
Electrical continuity is achieved naturally, without having to add clips or earthing braids.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation

D
D
3
8
0
6
4
2
Frameworks can be combined side-by-side or back-to-back to create all switchboard
configurations up to 3200 A.
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
1
Front plates are installed on a frame that can pivot on the framework.
The front can be:
b a plain door (IP30/55)
b a transparent door (IP30/55)
b a cover frame (IP30).
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation

P
D
3
9
0
5
7
3 L
The framework
The framework is both light and rigid due to the closed sections used for the uprights.
The compact design of the framework means there is 15% more space available for
devices.
There are no sharp edges.
Assembly is particularly fast with only 12 screws, all directly accessible.
Uprights have wing holes every 25 mm.
A measuring tape can be hooked to a slot marking the starting point for
measurements on the heights required to mount devices. Marks every 50 mm and
double marks every 100 mm make it easy to count modules.
The floor fixing kit can also be used to level the cubicles.
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
4
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
5
Cross-pieces can be removed to facilitate work.
Only 12 screws, all directly accessible, are
required for assembly.
Marks make it easy to count the vertical
modules.
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
6
The floor fixing kit can also be used to level the
cubicles.
P
D
3
9
0
6
4
8 Hinged front plate support frame
This frame provides direct and fast access to the devices.
It is reversible and has two factory-mounted hinges.
Only two screws are required to secure it to the framework.
Doors
Both plain and transparent doors are reversible and designed for quick and easy left
or right-hand mounting by a single person.
The factory-mounted hinges are secured on quarter-turn studs. The one-piece
handle clips firmly into place.
All connection points are located on the front of the uprights and do not take up any
useful space for devices.
For 800 mm wide cubicles, the doors are supplied with a 150 mm wide barrier to
block access to the busbars.
A wide range of locks are available for the "push and pull" handle.
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
7
By pivoting, the front plate support frame provides direct access
to devices.
A discreet, user-friendly handle.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation

P
D
3
9
0
6
4
9
Rear panels
The IP30 panels are made up of two identical and interchangeable half panels that
are easy to handle.
They are flat to occupy minimum of floor space.
Vents ensure natural ventilation of the switchboard.
The IP55 panels are reinforced (IK10) and have positioning studs to facilitate
mounting.
Side panels
They are easy to handle given their ergonomic design and rounded edges. Mounting
is guided at the base by hooking onto special studs.
Similar to all the cover panels, the side panels are rapidly secured by quarter-turn
fasteners.
Vented IP30 panels.
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
0
The roof
The roof panel is flat for passage under all doorways and includes four holes for the
lifting rings.
The lifting rings can be installed and removed without removing the roof.
The lifting rings can be installed without removing the roof.
P
D
3
9
0
6
7
1
Gland plates
Whether plain (IP55) or in two parts (IP30) to facilitate cable entry, gland plates can
be easily installed to allow the mounting of cable glands for effective sealing.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23000.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation

D400 frameworks (depth 400 mm)
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
0
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
0
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
1
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
2
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
3
W = 300/400 W = 650/800 W = 800 with a busbar
compartment
Dimensions of cubicle with cover panels
Height 2006 mm (capacity = 36 modules, each 50 mm high)
Width Width of the framework + 56 mm
Depth 450 mm with screw-on rear panel + front door
476 mm with front and rear doors
D600 frameworks (depth 600 mm)
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
1
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
4
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
5
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
6
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
7
W = 300/400 W = 650/800 W = 800 with a busbar
compartment
Dimensions of cubicle with cover panels
Height 2006 mm (capacity = 36 modules, each 50 mm high)
Width Width of the framework + 56 mm
Depth 650 mm with screw-on rear panel + front door
676 mm with front and rear doors
Framework combinations
Side-by-side
The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit.
To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed
between the combined cubicles.
Back-to-back
An optional kit for back-to-back combinations is available. It is used to mechanically
connect the frameworks. It is supplied with a gasket to be installed between the
cubicles (for IP55).
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
8
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
9
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23000.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation


Cover panels
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
8
Front panels
b for frameworks 650 and 800 mm wide.
Any of the following can be installed in front of the
hinged front plate support frame:
v a plain door (IP30 or IP55)
v a transparent door (IP30 or IP55)
v a cover frame (IP30)
b for frameworks 300 and 400 mm wide.
A plain door is used (IP30 or IP55).
Rear panels
The rear panel can be made up of:
b two parts for IP30 panels
b one reinforced part for IP55 panels.
A plain door can also be used, notably for switchboards
with rear connections (800 and 1000 mm deep).
Side panels
A set of two panels is used (IP30 or IP55).
If frameworks are installed back to back (double depth),
two sets of two panels are required.
Roof
There is a plain roof (IP30 or IP55) for each size of
framework.
Gland plates
They are mandatory, whatever the desired degree of
protection for the switchboard.
For each size of framework, there are plain gland plates
(IP55) or two-part gland plates (IP30).
Degree of protection
IP30 switchboard
Use:
b the IP30 cover panels with a door or cover frame
b IP30 plain roof
b gland plates (plain or in two parts).
IP31 switchboard
Use:
b the IP30 cover panels with a door
b IP30 plain roof
b IP31 sealing kit
b gland plates (plain or in two parts).
IP55 switchboard
Use:
b the IP55 cover panels with a door
b IP55 plain roof
b plain gland plates.
If frameworks are combined, use the IP55 sealing kit for
side-by-side combinations.
Prisma Plus cubicle, W = 650 mm + cable compartment, W = 300 mm.
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
9
Prisma Plus cubicle, W = 800 mm + cable compartment, W = 300 mm.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cover panels

400 mm deep switchboard
For switchboards with front
connections.
b front panels
Any of the following can be installed
in front of the hinged front plate support
frame:
v a transparent door (IP30 or IP55)
v a plain door (IP30 or IP55)
v a fixed cover frame (IP30)
b rear panel = screw-on panel
b side panels = set of two panels
b plain roof
b gland plates (plain or in two parts).
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
4
Parts list for switchboard 1
1 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
2 08506 : hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
3 08556 : cover frame, W = 650
4 08736 : rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels)
5 08750 : set of two side panels, D = 400
6 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
7 08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400 Switchboard 1 - IP30 cubicle with cover frame, W = 650.
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
7
Parts list for switchboard 2
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
5 1 08403 : framework, W = 300, D = 400, H = 2000
2 08407 : framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
3 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
4 08506 : hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
5 08513 : plain door, W = 300
6 08538 : transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier
for busbar compartment, W = 150)
7 08536 : transparent door, W = 650
8 08733 : rear panel, W = 300 (two half panels)
9 08738 : rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels)
10 08736 : rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels)
11 08750 : set of two side panels, D = 400
12 08433 : plain roof, W = 300, D = 400
13 08438 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
14 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
15 08483 : plain gland plate, W = 300, D = 400
16 08487 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400
17 08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
5
Switchboard 2 - combination of IP30 cubicles with transparent doors.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cover panels

600 mm deep switchboard
For switchboards with front
connections.
b front panels
Any of the following can be installed
in front of the hinged front
plate support frame:
v a transparent door (IP30 or IP55)
v a plain door (IP30 or IP55)
v a fixed cover frame (IP30)
b rear panel = screw-on panel
b side panels = set of two panels
b plain roof
b gland plates (plain or in two parts).
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
6
Parts list for switchboard 1
1 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08506 : hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
3 08558: fixed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with
a wicket door, W = 150)
4 08738 : rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels)
5 08760 : set of two side panels, D = 600
6 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
7 08687 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600 Switchboard 1 - IP30 cubicle with cover frame, W = 800.
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
9
Parts list for switchboard 2
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
7 1 08603 : framework, W = 300, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08606 : framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
4 08506 : hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
5 08513 : plain door, W = 300
6 08538 : transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier
for busbar compartment, W = 150)
7 08536 : transparent door, W = 650
8 08733 : rear panel, W = 300 (two half panels)
9 08738 : rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels)
10 08736 : rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels)
11 08760 : set of two side panels, D = 600
12 08633 : plain roof, W = 300, D = 600
13 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
14 08636 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
15 08683 : plain gland plate, W = 300, D = 600
16 08687 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600
17 08686 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600
D
D
3
8
0
6
1
1
Switchboard 2 - combination of IP30 cubicles with transparent doors.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23010.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cover panels

800 mm deep switchboard
Made up of two cubicles
back-to-back.
Rear connections are possible.
b front panels
Any of the following can be installed
in front of the hinged front plate support
frame:
v a transparent door (IP30 or IP55)
v a plain door (IP30 or IP55)
v a fixed cover frame (IP30)
b rear panel = screw-on panel
b side panels = set of two panels
b plain roof
b gland plates (plain or in two parts).
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
8
Parts list
1 08407 x 2: 2 frameworks, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
2 08406 x 2: 2 frameworks, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
3 08506 : hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
4 08558 : fixed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with a
wicket door, W = 150)
5 08556 : cover frame, W = 650
6 08518 : plain door, W = 800
7 08516 : plain door, W = 650
8 08750 x 2: 2 sets of two side panels, D = 400
9 08438 x 2: 2 plain rooves, W = 800, D = 400
10 08436 x 2: 2 plain rooves, W = 650, D = 400
11 08487 x 2: 2 plain gland plates W = 800, D = 400
12 08486 x 2: 2 plain gland plates W = 650, D = 400 Combination of IP30 cubicles with cover frames.
08719 x 2: double depth combination kit
D
D
3
8
0
6
1
5
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23010.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cover panels

1000 mm deep switchboard
Made up of two cubicles back-to-back.
Rear connections are possible.
b front panels
Any of the following can be installed
in front of the hinged front plate support
frame:
v a transparent door (IP30 or IP55)
v a plain door (IP30 or IP55)
v a fixed cover frame (IP30)
b rear panel = screw-on panel
b side panels = set of two panels
b plain roof
b gland plates (plain or in two parts).
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
9
Parts list for IP30 switchboard
1 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08606 : framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08407 : framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
4 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
5 08506 : hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
6 08538 : transparent door, W = 800
(supplied with barrier for busbar compartment,
W = 150)
7 08536 : transparent door, W = 650
8 08518 : plain door, W = 800
9 08516 : plain door, W = 650
10 08760 : set of two side panels, D = 600
11 08750 : set of two side panels, D = 400
12 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
13 08636 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
14 08438 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
15 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
16 08687 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600
17 08686 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600
18 08487 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400
19 08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400 Combination of cubicles with transparent doors.
08719 : double depth combination kit
Parts list for IP55 switchboard
D
D
3
8
0
6
1
3 1 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08606 : framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08407 : framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
4 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
5 08506 : hinged front plate support frame, W = 650
6 08548 : transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with
barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150)
7 08546 : transparent door, W = 650
8 08528 : plain door, W = 800
9 08526 : plain door, W = 650
10 08765 : set of two side panels, D = 600
11 08755 : set of two side panels, D = 400
12 08658 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
13 08656 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
14 08458 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
15 08456 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
16 08687 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600
17 08686 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600
18 08487 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400
19 08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400
08717 x 2: IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations
08719 x 2: double depth combination kit
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23100.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cubicles
Frameworks

400 mm deep framework
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
2
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
3
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
4
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
0
Framework width Cat. no.
W = 300 mm 08403
W = 400 mm 08404
W = 650 mm 08406
W = 800 mm 08408
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08407
b composition of catalogue numbers:
v two frames (with two additional uprights for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles for the
mounting plates and to separate the busbar compartment)
v four cross-pieces
v mounting hardware
v side-by-side combination kit
b for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right
b cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.
08407.
600 mm deep framework
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
5
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
6
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
7
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
1
Framework width Cat. no.
W = 300 mm 08603
W = 400 mm 08604
W = 650 mm 08606
W = 800 mm 08608
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08607
b composition of catalogue numbers:
v two frames (three for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles), equipped with intermediate
uprights for the mounting plates
v four cross-pieces
v mounting hardware
v side-by-side combination kit
b for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right
b cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.
08607.
Hinged front plate support frame
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
3
D
D
3
1
3
2
4 Designation Cat. no.
Hinged front plate support frame, W = 650mm 08506
b reversible for left or right-hand opening
b secured at two points using M6 screws
b can be mounted on 650 mm and 800 mm (650 + 150) wide cubicles.
08506. 08506.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23100.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cubicles
Frameworks

Framework combinations
Side-by-side
D
D
3
8
0
7
5
1 The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit
comprising six M6 bolts.
To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed
between the combined cubicles.
Designation Cat. no.
IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations (1 kit per combination) 08717
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
5
D
D
3
8
0
7
5
2
Back-to-back
Designation Cat. no.
Double depth combination kit 08719
The kit is made up of:
b a set of hardware for the mechanical connections between the cross-pieces
b two assembly plates to connect the uprights
b the IP55 sealing kit.
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
6
Accessories
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
7 Designation Cat. no.
Set of 20 screws + wing nuts for framework 08921
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23100.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cubicles
IP30/31 cover panels

Front panels
Door, W = 650/800 mm.
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
2
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
3 Designation Cat. no.
Plain door W = 650 mm 08516
W = 800 mm 08518
Transparent door W = 650 mm 08536
W = 800 mm 08538
b reversible for left or right-hand opening
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see
page 100E23000.fm/2.
Note : The 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment.
08536. 08538.
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
0
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
1
Cover frame
Designation Cat. no.
Cover frame W = 650 mm 08556
W = 800 mm (650 +150) 08558
b secured using four screws.
Note : For 800 mm wide frameworks, the 650 mm frame is supplied with a plain wicket door,
150 mm wide.
08556. 08558.
Door, W = 300/400 mm.
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
4
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
2 Designation Cat. no.
Plain door W = 300 mm 08513
W = 400 mm 08514
Door with cut-out W = 300 mm 08593
W = 400 mm 08594
b reversible for left or right-hand opening
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see
page 100E23000.fm/2.
Note : The door with cut-out can be equipped with front plates for 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 instruments,
see page 100E21060.fm/2.
08513. 08593.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23100.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cubicles
IP30/31 cover panels

Rear panels
Rear panel
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
3 Designation Cat. no.
Rear panel W = 300 mm 08733
W = 400 mm 08734
W = 650 mm 08736
W = 800 mm 08738
b made up of two half panels with vents
b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.
08738.
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
3 Plain door
Designation Cat. no.
Plain door W = 300 mm 08513
W = 400 mm 08514
W = 650 mm 08516
W = 800 mm 08518
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see
page 100E23000.fm/2
b reversible for left or right-hand opening.
08518.
Side panels
Side panels
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
0 Designation Cat. no.
Set of two side panels D = 400 mm 08750
D = 600 mm 08760
Supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.
Side panels for "L" combinations
Combination of two cubicles with different depths (800 + 400 or 1000 + 600).
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two side panels for "L"
combinations
D = 400 mm 08756
These panels simply replace the standard side panels.
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
8
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
9
08750.
Roof
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
1 Designation Cat. no.
Plain IP30 roof, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm 08433
W = 400 mm 08434
W = 650 mm 08436
W = 800 mm 08438
Plain IP30 roof, D = 600 mm W = 300 mm 08633
W = 400 mm 08634
W = 650 mm 08636
W = 800 mm 08638
b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners for mounting on the framework
b with markings for cut-outs, if necessary.
08438.
IP31 sealing kit
The kit is made up of a self-adhesive gasket that attaches to the roof and a deflector.
It ensures the IP31 degree of protection for a 650 or 800 mm wide cubicle, or for two
cubicles (800 + 400) when they are equipped with plain or transparent front doors.
Designation Cat. no.
IP31 sealing kit 08711
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23100.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cubicles
IP55 cover panels

Front panels
Door, W = 650/800 mm
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
2
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
3 Designation Cat. no.
Plain door W = 650 mm 08526
W = 800 mm 08528
Transparent door W = 650 mm 08546
W = 800 mm 08548
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket
b reversible for left or right-hand opening
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see
page 100E23000.fm/2.
Note : The 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment.
08546. 08548.
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
4
Door, W = 300/400 mm
Designation Cat. no.
Plain door W = 300 mm 08523
W = 400 mm 08524
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket
b reversible for left or right-hand opening
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see
page 100E23000.fm/2.
08523.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23100.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cubicles
IP55 cover panels

Rear panels
Rear panel
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
9 Designation Cat. no.
Rear panel W = 300 mm 08743
W = 400 mm 08744
W = 650 mm 08746
W = 800 mm 08748
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket
b supplied with mounting hardware
b one-piece, reinforced panel designed to ensure the degree of protection.
08748.
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
3 Plain door
Designation Cat. no.
Plain door W = 300 mm 08523
W = 400 mm 08524
W = 650 mm 08526
W = 800 mm 08528
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see
page 100E23000.fm/2
b reversible for left or right-hand opening.
08528 + 08523.
Side panels
Side panels
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
0 Designation Cat. no.
Set of two side panels D = 400 mm 08755
D = 600 mm 08765
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket
b supplied with mounting hardware.
Side panels for "L" combinations
Combination of two cubicles with different depths (800 + 400 or 1000 + 600).
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two side panels for "L"
combinations
D = 400 mm 08756
08755. b these panels simply replace the standard side panels
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket.
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
8
D
D
3
8
1
3
2
9
Roof
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
1 Designation Cat. no.
Plain roof, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm 08453
W = 400 mm 08454
W = 650 mm 08456
W = 800 mm 08458
Plain roof, D = 600 mm W = 300 mm 08653
W = 400 mm 08654
W = 650 mm 08656
W = 800 mm 08658
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket
b supplied with mounting hardware
b with markings for clear identification of cable-running zones, if necessary.
08458.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23100.fm/8 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cubicles
Plinth
Gland plate

Plinth, H = 100 mm
The plinth is made up of two catalogue numbers:
b one catalogue number comprising four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and
rear), that can be used in side-by-side combinations or stacked to form a plinth 200
mm high (maximum)
b one catalogue number comprising two side plates (400 or 600 mm).
Each catalogue number is supplied with the necessary hardware.
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
0
Designation Cat. no.
four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and
rear)
W = 300 mm 08723
W = 400 mm 08724
W = 650 mm 08726
W = 800 mm 08728
two side plates D = 400 mm 08720
D = 600 mm 08721
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
1
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
2
08726 + 08720.
Side-by-side combination of two cubicles with a
plinth.
Two stacked plinths.
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
3
The front and rear cross-pieces can be easily
removed for a pallet-mover.
Gland plates
Gland plates (IP55)
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
4 Designation Cat. no.
Gland plates, D = 400 W = 300 mm 08483
W = 400 mm 08484
W = 650 mm 08486
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08487
W = 800 mm 08488
Gland plates, D = 600 W = 300 mm 08683
W = 400 mm 08684
W = 650 mm 08686
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08687
W = 800 mm 08688
08486.
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
5
Two-part gland plates (IP30)
Designation Cat. no.
Two-part gland plates, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm 08493
W = 400 mm 08494
W = 650 mm 08496
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08497
W = 800 mm 08498
Two-part gland plates, D = 600 mm W = 300 mm 08693
W = 400 mm 08694
W = 650 mm 08696
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08697
W = 800 mm 08698
08496.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23100.fm/9 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Cubicles
Right-angle kit
Door stopper

IP30 right-angle kit
Metal duct.
Used to create and protect the connection of horizontal busbars between two
cubicles installed at right angles.
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
6
Designation Cat. no.
IP30 right-angle kit 08713
Free support and joints, see page 400E22100.fm/2.
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
7
Door stopper
Device used to hold the door open.
Designation Cat. no.
Door stopper 08707
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23210.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Installation accessories


Lifting rings
Set of four lifting rings screwed to the framework.
Use a set of lifting rings for each framework (W = 650 and 800 mm) containing
devices.
When two cubicles with devices have been combined, use a lifting beam.
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
1
Designation Cat. no.
4 lifting rings 08700
b can be installed and removed without removing the roof
b even if they are left attached, the switchboard conserves its original degree of
protection.
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
2
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
3
Positions of the lifting rings for two combined cubicles containing devices. In this case, a lifting
beam must be used.
Framework stabiliser kit
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
4 Designation Cat. no.
Stabiliser kit 08701
b made up of four blocks under the framework
b suitable for all types of cubicles, whatever the width and depth
b increases the stability of the cubicle during mounting of devices
b makes possible cubicle handling using a pallet mover or a forklift
b protects the front, side and rear cover panels during handling
b can be reused.
False floor fixing kit
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
7 Designation Cat. no.
False floor fixing kit 08703
b made up of four independent clamps
b clamp on "U" sections (H = 175 mm, W = 70 mm) or "I" sections (H = 120 mm,
W = 64 mm)
b clamp travel = 11 mm.
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
2
C
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23210.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Installation accessories

Levelling kit
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
5 Designation Cat. no.
Levelling kit (set of 4 fixtures) 08702
b can be installed at any time, even when the cubicle is already in position
b maximum adjustment range = 10 mm
v secures the cubicle to the floor.
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
9
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
0
Maximum adjustment range = 10 mm.
Secures the cubicle to the floor.
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
1
Recommended positions of the fixtures for combined cubicles.
Floor/wall fixing kit
D
D
3
8
1
5
4
8 Designation Cat. no.
Floor/wall fixing kit 08704
b made up of two brackets and four clamps
b can be used to offset the switchboard fixing points for easier access
b the wall brackets ensure sufficient wall clearance (at least 30 mm) for natural
convection.
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
4
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
3
At least 30 mm of clearance between the wall and a cubicle with a vented rear panel is required
for natural convection.
The offset floor fixing points are easily accessible.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23220.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Connection accessories
Cable-tie supports

Cable-tie supports
Cable-tie supports are used to correctly position the cables in the connection
compartment.
They are sold in sets of four and supplied with the necessary hardware for
connection to the framework.
Longitudinal cable-tie supports
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
5
Width of cable compartment Set of four cable-tie supports
W = 300 mm 08773
W = 400 mm 08774
W = 650 mm 08776
W = 800 mm 08778
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
6
Lateral cable-tie supports
There are two sizes:
b D = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm deep
b D = 200 mm, this support is added to the 400 mm support for frameworks that are
650 mm deep. It can also be installed alone.
Depth of cable compartment Set of four cable-tie supports
D = 400 mm 08794
D = 600 mm 08796 + 08794
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
7
08794.
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
8
08796.
Catalogue numbers
System P
400E23220.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Connection accessories
Cable-tie supports

Universal cross-members
Longitudinal cross-members
Set of two longitudinal cross-members, L = 650 mm.
They are connected directly to the framework (W = 650 mm or 650 + 150 mm).
They can also be mounted on the lateral cross-members (see opposite).
They are used to position and support the cables of an incoming device.
Lateral cross-members
They are connected directly to the uprights of the framework.
They offer numerous positioning holes and can be used to adjust the depth of
longitudinal cross-members.
There are two lengths:
b Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm
deep
b Set of two lateral cross-members, L = 200 mm, can be added to the 400 mm
cross-members for frameworks that are 600 mm deep. They can also be installed
separately.
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
6
Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lateral
cross-members
L = 400 mm 03584
L = 200 mm 03586
Set of two longitudinal
cross-members
L = 650 mm 03587
Catalogue numbers
System P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
Systme PSystem P
Catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
Functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
CEF
450E25000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
CEF
Power factor correction equipment

D
D
3
8
2
3
0
8
Presentation
Schneider Electric offers power factor correction equipment that integrates perfectly
in Prisma Plus switchboards.
The mounting plates are installed horizontally in a cubicle and electrically
interconnected by a set of front busbars.
The busbars are supplied by a protection device installed outside the cubicle.
Special Prisma Plus cubicles are used for power factor correction, given the
temperature rise inside the cubicles.
They comply with and are tested according to standard IEC 60439-1.
Installation
Mounting plates are equipped with the power factor correction modules, made up of
a contactor, the corresponding protection fuses and a set of busbars.
They are installed in a 650 mm wide cubicle that is either 400 or 600 mm deep
depending on the depth of the switchboard to which it will be added.
Each cubicle can be equipped with up to seven standard or type H mounting plates
or up to five type SAH mounting plates, positioned one above the other.
The cubicle has a ventilated roof that can be equipped with one or two fans.
The door has cut-outs, one for the Varlogic power factor controller and another in the
bottom for a filter.
D
D
3
8
2
3
0
9
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
0
Standard cubicle supplied via the bottom. Cubicle with a 300 mm wide compartment for
incoming cables via the top.
Cat. no.
System P
450E25000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
CEF
Power factor correction equipment

Device installation
Mounting plates are equipped with the power factor correction modules, made up of
a contactor, the corresponding protection fuses and a set of busbars.
They are installed in a 650 mm wide cubicle that is either 400 or 600 mm deep,
depending on the depth of the switchboard to which it will be added.
Each cubicle can be equipped with up to seven standard or type H mounting plates
or up to five type SAH mounting plates, positioned one above the other.
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
1
Type of equipment No. of mounting plates / cubicle Plate cat. no.
Standard 7 03976
H 7 03976
SAH 5 03977
Standard or H installation.
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
2
SAH installation.
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
3 The mounting plates are electrically interconnected by a set of front busbars.
The busbars are supplied by incoming cables, generally via the bottom. When the
incoming cables arrive via the top, a 300 mm wide cable compartment is required to
run the cables to the bottom.
Prisma Plus power factor correction equipment complies with and is tested according
to standard IEC 60439-1.
Electrical connections between the mounting plates.
A
A
Cat. no.
System P
450E25000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
CEF
Power factor correction equipment

Door with cut-outs
Power factor correction equipment is mounted in special, 650 mm wide cubicles that
are 400 or 600 mm deep.
Standard cover panels are used.
However, a special door is used (hinges on left only) that has cut-outs, one for the
Varlogic power factor controller and another in the bottom for a filter.
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
4
Designation Cat. no.
Door with cut-outs 03970
IP30 roof
A roof with a cut-out (IP30) ensures natural ventilation of the equipment.
It can also be equipped with one or two fans.
It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust, condensation or falling
objects.
It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths.
Selection guide
b switchboard IP y 3x
v standard or type H equipmenty 180 kvar - natural ventilation (roof with cut-out)
v standard or type H equipment > 180 kvar and SAH - two fans are required
b switchboard IP > 3x
v two fans are required, whatever the type of equipment.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
5
Designation Cat. no.
Roof with cut-out + cover,
W = 650 mm
D = 400 mm 08476
D = 600 mm 08676
Fan 08986
Fan characteristics
Power rating: 35 W
Input voltage: 230 V
Throughput via outlet grill: with standard filter: 300 m
3
/hr
with fine filter: 220 m
3
/hr
Noise level: 52 dB.
Cat. no.
System P
450E25000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
CEF
Power factor correction equipment

Inter-cubicle partition
Metal partition used to separate two adjacent cubicles (for example, when the power
factor correction cubicle is combined with a main low-voltage switchboard).
It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high.
The top and bottom have knock-outs for horizontal busbars.
Supplied with the necessary supports and mounting hardware, the partition is
mounted on the framework and does not hinder installation of the mounting plates.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
6
Designation Cat. no.
Inter-cubicle partition
Depth 400 mm 04911
Depth 600 mm 04931
Cat. no.
System P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
Systme PSystem P
Dimensions
400E31000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
Cubicles

Frameworks, D = 400 mm
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
5
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
2
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
3
Frameworks, D = 600 mm
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
4
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
5
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
6
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
7
D
D
3
8
1
8
9
3
Fixing to floor
Without plinth With plinth
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
9
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
0
A B
300 262,5
400 362,5
650 612,5
800 762,5
Dimensions
System P
400E31000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
Cubicles

Cubicle with cover panels
Height Width
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
1
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
2
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
3
Depth
Door in front and panel in rear Doors front and rear
D
D
3
8
2
3
2
2
D
D
3
8
2
3
2
3
D
D
3
8
2
3
2
4
D
D
3
8
2
3
2
5
Door
IP30 door IP55 door
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
4
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
5
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
6
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
7
D
D
3
8
1
8
2
8
Available space behind door
D
D
3
8
2
2
7
7
Dimensions
System P
400E31000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
Cubicles

Horizontal flat busbars
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
9
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
6
Layout of horizontal flat busbars:
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
0 D
D
3
8
1
8
5
1
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
2 D
D
3
8
1
8
5
3
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
5
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
6
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
7
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
8
630 A. 800 A. 1000 A.
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
9
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
0
1250 A. 1600 A.
Layout of Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
1
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
2
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
3
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
4
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
5
Double Linergy busbars.
Dimensions
System P
400E31000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
Cubicles

Vertical flat busbars
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
6
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
7
Layout of lateral busbars
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
8
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
9
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
0
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
1
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
2
Double flat busbars.
Layout of rear busbars
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
3
D
D
3
8
1
8
7
4
A
50 60 80
D = 400 mm B 284 274 254 D = 400 mm B 284
C 250 240 220 C 242
D = 600 mm B 484 474 454 D = 600 mm B 484
C 450 440 420 C 442
Dimensions
System P
400E31000.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
Cubicles

Plain gland plates
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
8
A C
300 110
400 210
650 460
800 610
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
9
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
0
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
1
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
2
Dimensions
System P
400E31000.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Dimensions
Cubicles

Two-part gland plates
D
D
3
8
1
8
3
8
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
3
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
4
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
5
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
6
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
7
D
D
3
8
1
8
4
8
Dimensions
System P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Prisma Plus
System G/P
Presentation
Catalogue numbers
Characteristics
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
100E_31_10_03TDM.fm/1 Version 1 du 31/10/03
Contents system G/P
Presentation
General presentation
Prisma Plus electrical switchboards 100E10070/2
Catalogue numbers
Functional units
Reserve space 100E21050/2
Human-switchboard interface 100E21060/2
Switchboard lighting 100E21070/2
Front plate accessories 100E21100/2
Fixing accessories 100E21110/2
Distribution
Overview of distribution blocks 100E22000/2
Distribloc distribution block 100E22010/2
160/630 A multi-stage distribution block 100E22050/2
Multiclip distribution block 100E22100/2
Insulated flexible bars 100E22500/2
Cable running 100E22600/2
Cable straps 100E22600/2
Trunking 100E22600/4
Trunking, accessories 100E22600/5
Enclosures
Enclosure accessories 100E23000/2
Door handles and locks 100E23000/2
Air-conditioning accessories 100E23010/2
Characteristics
Standards
International electrotechnical standards 100E41000/2
Standards 100E41000/3
Tools for quality assurance 100E41000/3
Standard IEC 60439-1 100E41000/4
Enclosure standards 100E41000/5
IEC 62208 and EN 50298 100E41000/5
Prisma Plus tested switchboards 100E41000/6
CE marking 100E41010/2
Electrical characteristics
Designing Prisma Plus power circuits 100E42000/2
Presentation and approach 100E42000/2
Designing horizontal busbars 100E42010/2
Designing Linergy busbars 100E42020/2
Designing vertical flat busbars 100E42030/2
Lateral busbars 100E42030/2
Rear busbars 100E42030/3
Designing connections u 630 A 100E42040/2
Prefabricated connections for Linergy busbars 100E42040/2
Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars 100E42040/6
Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Front or rear connection 100E42040/6
Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Front or rear connection 100E42040/8
Masterpact circuit breakers Fixed NT06 to NT16 100E42040/10
Masterpact circuit breakers Drawout NT06 to NT16 100E42040/12
Compact circuit breakers Fixed NS630b to NS1600 100E42040/14
Compact circuit breakers Withdrawable NS630b to NS1600 100E42040/16
Compact circuit breakers Horizontal, fixed NS630b to NS1600 100E42040/18
Designing connections with flexible bars 100E42060/2
Device connections 100E42060/2
Designing connections with cables 100E42070/3
Designing the PE protective conductor 100E42080/2
Power circuit 100E42080/2
Designing the PEN conductor 100E42090/2
Power circuit 100E42090/2
Degree of protection 100E43000/2
General 100E43000/2
Selection of enclosures according to the premises 100E43010/2
Properties of metal enclosures 100E43020/2
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management of switchboards 100E45000/2
General 100E45000/2
Comparative method 100E45000/4
Example 100E45000/7
Charts 100E45000/9
Ventilation 100E45000/11
Heating 100E45000/12
100E10070.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Prisma Plus
electrical switchboards

Prisma Plus - a comprehensive range of enclosures and cubicles
P
D
3
9
0
6
6
4
Prisma Plus - a tried and tested modular system
A dependable electrical installation
The total compatibility of Schneider devices with the
Prisma Plus system is a key advantage in ensuring a
high level of installation dependability.
System design has been validated by type tests as per
standard IEC 60439-1 and benefits from the combined
experience of Schneider customers over many years.
An upgradeable electrical installation
Thanks to modular design, Prisma Plus switchboards
can be modified easily to integrate new functions as
needed.
Maintenance operations, carried out with the
switchboard de-energised, are fast and straight-
forward due to easy access to devices.
Total safety for personnel
Work in a Prisma Plus switchboard is risk-free when
carried out by qualified persons in compliance with all
applicable safety regulations.
Devices are installed behind protective front plates and
only the operating handles are accessible.
Additional internal separations protect against direct
contact with live parts.
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
1
Presentation
System G/P
100E10070.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
General presentation
Prisma Plus
electrical switchboards

System G
Pack wall-mount enclosures
P
D
3
9
0
6
6
5
b Applications:
v indoor enclosures containing all modular devices, for distribution switchboards in
small and medium-sized commercial buildings (hotels, offices, shops), or for
medium-sized and large residential installations (houses)
v supplied mounted, with modular rails and front plates (48 modules (9 mm) per row)
b rated operational current: 160 A
b degree of protection: IP30 with or without door
b degree of protection against mechanical impacts:
v IK07 (without door)
v IK08 (with door)
b enclosure dimensions:
v five heights: 480 mm to 1080 mm
v width: 555 mm
b depth: 157 mm without door
190 mm with door and handle.
P
D
3
9
0
6
7
0 IP30/31/43 wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures
b Applications:
v indoor wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures for all types of low-voltage
switchboards (main, subdistribution and final) in commercial and industrial
environments
v supplied in kit form, can be combined side-by-side and one on top of another
b rated operational current: 630 A
b degree of protection:
v IP30: with or without door
v IP31: with door + canopy
v IP43: with door + canopy + gasket
b degree of protection against mechanical impacts:
v IK07 (without door)
v IK08 (with door)
b enclosure dimensions:
v eleven heights: 330 mm to 1830 mm (including the plinth for floor-standing
enclosures)
v two widths: 595 mm and 305 mm (duct)
v depth: 205 mm without door
250 mm with door + handle
IP55 enclosures
b Applications:
v indoor enclosures for distribution, protection and process control in commercial
and industrial applications
v supplied in kit form, can be combined side-by-side and one on top of another
b rated operational current: 630 A
b degree of protection: IP55
b degree of protection against mechanical impacts: IK10
b enclosure dimensions:
v seven heights: 450 mm to 1750 mm
v width: basic enclosure: 600 mm
v extensions: 575 and 325 mm (duct)
v depth: 260 mm + 30 mm (handle).
IP55 enclosures.
System P
Cubicles
b Applications:
v indoor cubicles for main or subdistribution low-voltage switchboards for
commercial and industrial applications
v supplied in kit form, can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b rated operational current: 3200 A
b degree of protection:
v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame
v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket
v IP55: with IP55 cover panels
b degree of protection against mechanical impacts:
v IK07 with cover frame
v IK08 (with IP30 door)
v IK10 with IP55 door
b framework dimensions:
v four widths:
- W = 300: cable compartment
- W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment
- W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment
- W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment
or cable compartment
v two depths: 400, 600 mm
v height: 2000 mm.
P
D
3
9
0
6
6
7
Presentation
System G/P
IP30/31/43
wall-mount
and floor-
standing
enclosures.
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G/P
Catalogue numbers
Functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
100E21050.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Reserve space

Device compartment, W = 600 mm
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
3 500 mm wide plain front plate Cat. no.
1 module (H = 50 mm) 03801
2 modules (H = 100 mm) 03802
3 modules (H = 150 mm) 03803
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03804
5 modules (H = 250 mm) 03805
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03806
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03807
12 modules (H = 600 mm) 03808
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
2 500 mm wide transparent front plate Cat. no.
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03342
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03343
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03344
12 modules (H = 600 mm) 03345
Lateral compartment
W = 300 mm for System G
W = 400 mm for System P
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
4 250 mm wide plain front plate Cat. no.
1 module (H = 50 mm) 03811
2 modules (H = 100 mm) 03812
3 modules (H = 150 mm) 03813
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03814
5 modules (H = 250 mm) 03815
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03816
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03817
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
5 250 mm wide transparent front plate Cat. no.
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03352
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03353
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03354
Device compartment, W = 850 mm
D
D
3
8
2
3
2
9 750 mm wide plain front plate Cat. no.
1 module (H = 50 mm) 03851
3 modules (H = 150 mm) 03853
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03854
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03856
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21050.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Reserve space
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21060.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Human-switchboard interface

Measurement devices with interface
and plastic mounting plates
Presentation
The interface for 72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm measurement devices is made up of:
b a special front plate with cut-outs (03904) for plastic mounting plates
b plastic mounting plates for the 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 mm devices.
The front plate can be equipped with:
b five mounting plates with cut-outs for 72 x 72 mm devices
b four mounting plates with cut-outs for 96 x 96 mm devices.
It can also be equipped with plain plastic mounting plates to blank off any unused
positions. The plain mounting plates can be easily cut out for lamps, pushbuttons or
72 x 72 mm devices.
Each mounting plate has a cable-running system for auxiliary wires and can be
identified by a label.
Installation
The interface for 72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices is installed similar to a front plate:
b in the device zone of enclosures and cubicles
b on a door with cut-outs in a 300 or 400 mm wide cubicle
b on a partial door with cut-outs in wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures
(except IP55).
The degree of protection for installed devices is IP30.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
5
Front plate with cut-outs, four mounting plates and one plain
mounting plate for 72 x 72 mm devices.
D
D
3
8
1
6
8
4
Designation Cat. no.
Front plate (3 modules) for five 72 x 72 mm or four 96 x 96 mm devices 03904
Mounting plate for 72 x 72 mm
device
with cut-outs 03902
plain 03900
Mounting plate for 96 x 96 mm
device
with cut-outs 03903
plain 03901
Doors with cut-outs for the measurement-device interface
Door with cut-outs for cubicles W = 300 mm (08593) see page 400E23100.fm/2
Mounting on a cubicle door cut-out (System P). W = 400 mm (08594)
Partial door
6 modules
IP30/31/43 enclosures (08851) see page 300E23010.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
6
8
5
D
D
3
8
1
6
8
7
D
D
3
8
1
6
8
8
The mounting plates have guides for auxiliary
wires.
Mounting plates can be identified by a label
(not supplied).
Note: For degree of protection IP55, devices must be installed behind a transparent door. If they
are installed on the door, use the mounting plates intended for IP55 enclosures (see
page 300E23120.fm/2).
Mounting in the device zone of an enclosure (System G).
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
2 Visor for measurement devices
Presentation
The interface with the plastic mounting plates for 72 x 72 mm and 96 x 96 mm
devices can be mounted on a visor.
The visor can be installed on 300 and 400 mm wide doors with cut-outs in cubicles
or on partial doors in wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures.
It is supplied with a drilling diagram for mounting on a plain door.
Cat. no. selection
Designation Cat. no.
Visor for measurement devices 03928
D
D
3
8
1
6
8
6
Visor mounted on a cubicle door cut-out.
Visor mounted on the partial door of an enclosure.
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0 A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
60 60
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0 A
60
40
10
0
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21060.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Human-switchboard interface

Measurement devices on a metal
front plate
Installation
The 72 x 72 mm or 96 x 96 mm measurement devices are installed directly on a front
plate with cut-outs, H = 150 mm (3 modules):
b in the device zone of enclosures and cubicles
b on a door with cut-outs in a 300 or 400 mm wide cubicle
b on a partial door with cut-outs in wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures (except
IP55).
The degree of protection for installed devices is IP30.
Unused positions are blanked off using blanking plates.
D
D
3
8
1
6
8
9 Device No. of vertical modules Cut-out front
plate
Measurement device
Six 72 x 72 mm measurement devices 3 03910
Four 96 x 96 mm measurement devices 3 03911
One 144 x 144 mm device + four 72 x 72 devices 4 03912
03910.
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
1 Accessories
72 x 72 mm blanking plate 03907
96 x 96 mm blanking plate 03908
Blanking plates have knock-outs for 22 mm lamps or pushbuttons.
D
D
3
8
1
6
9
1
03911.
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
2
03912.
Pushbuttons or lamps
Installation in the device zone on a metal front plate with cut-outs.
D
D
3
8
1
6
9
0 Device No. of vertical modules Cut-out front
plate
Pushbuttons
12 pushbuttons or lamps (22 mm diameter) 2 03914
03914.
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21060.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Human-switchboard interface

Powerlogic system
D
D
3
8
1
6
9
2 Device No. of vertical modules Cut-out front plate
PowerMeter PM (System G/P)
Power Meter PM400/500/800
(96 x 96 mm case)
3 03911
Installation in the device compartment.
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
6 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Plain front plate
Circuit Monitor CM (System P)
Circuit Monitor CM3000 4 03571 03918 03802
Circuit Monitor CM4000 6 03572 03918 03804
Installation in the device compartment.
D
D
3
8
1
6
9
4 Device No. of
vertical
modules
Cut-out front
plate
DMB300/400 (System P)
DMB300 3 03916
DMC300/400 4 03917
Installation in the device compartment.
03916.
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
7
03917.
D
D
3
8
1
6
9
3 Device No. of vertical
modules
Slotted
mounting plate
Plain front
plate
Digipact (System P)
DC150 data concentrator + SC150
indication and control module
4 03571 03804
CLS150, UM100, IM100
(72 x 72 mm cases)
see page 100E21060.fm/2
Installation in the device compartment or the connection compartment.
D
D
3
8
0
8
5
8
Data concentrator in a 300 mm wide compartment.
Powerlogic system
CM 4000
Digipact DMB300
com
?
P
U
I
select
1
2
3
4
Digipact DM C300
com
Alarm
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21060.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Human-switchboard interface

Vigilohm system
Installation in the device compartment.
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
4 Device No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Vigilohm (System P)
XM200 or XM300C with 3 XD301
or with 2 XD312
or with XD301 +
XD312
4 03930 03932
XML308/316 or XM300C 4 03931 03933
with two interfaces XLI300
or XTU300
or XAS
or XD308C
03930 + 03932. XML308/316 or XM300C with XL308
or with XL316
4 03931 03933
D
D
3
8
1
6
9
8
03931 + 03933.
Vigilohm
Installation in the device compartment.
D
D
3
8
1
6
9
9 Device No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail Cut-out front
plate
Vigilohm (System G)
TR22A/AH (1 TR + 6 measurement
devices, 72 x 72 mm)
5 03934
EM9, TR5A, SM21 (modular devices) 3 03001 03203
Vigilohm (System P)
TR22A/AH (1 TR + 6 measurement
devices, 72 x 72 mm)
5 03934
03934. EM9, TR5A, SM21 (modular devices) 3 03401 03203
Vigirex
Installation in the device compartment.
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
0 Device No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail Cut-out front
plate
Vigirex (System G)
RH10/RH21/RH99 relays
Modular device 3 03001 03203
72 x 72 mm cases see page 100E21060.fm/2
RHU relay (72 x 72 mm cases) see page 100E21060.fm/2
RMH relay and RM12T multiplexer
RMH (modular devices) 3 03001 03203
RM12T (72 x 72 mm cases see page 100E21060.fm/2
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
0 Vigirex (System P)
RH10/RH21/RH99 relays
Modular device 3 03401 03203
72 x 72 mm cases see page 100E21060.fm/2
RHU relay (72 x 72 mm cases) see page 100E21060.fm/2
RMH relay and RM12T multiplexer
RMH (modular devices) 3 03401 03203
RM12T (72 x 72 mm cases) see page 100E21060.fm/2
7 8 9 10
MERLINGERIN
Vigirex RM12
A
60
40
10
0
MERLIN GERIN
Vigirex
RH10M
Reset on
fault
Test
Test no trip
MERLIN GERIN
Vigirex
RH10M
Reset on
fault
Test
Test no trip
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21060.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Human-switchboard interface

Multi 9 measurement device
Installation in the device compartment.
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
1 Device No. of vertical
modules
Modular rail Cut-out front
plate
Multi 9 measurement device (System G)
Lamps, pushbuttons, etc. 2 03001 03202
Ammeter, voltmeter, etc. 3 03001 03203
Multi 9 measurement device (System P)
Lamps, pushbuttons, etc. 2 03401 03202
Ammeter, voltmeter, etc. 3 03401 03203
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
2
Device behind transparent front
plate
Installation in the device compartment.
500 mm wide transparent front plate
Transparent front plate, 4 modules, H = 200 mm 03342
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
2 Transparent front plate, 6 modules, H = 300 mm 03343
Transparent front plate, 9 modules, H = 450 mm 03344
Transparent front plate, 12 modules, H = 600 mm 03345
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
A
A
2 3 5 4
A 5 4
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21060.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Human-switchboard interface

Cable running
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
6 Designation Cat. no.
Cable trunking for doors, L = 2000 mm 04233
Flexible trunking for wiring to door 04235
Terminal block for auxiliaries 04228
10 grommets for wiring through front 04234
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
1
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
3
Auxiliary wiring on partial door with cut-outs. Trunking for a door. Flexible trunking to protect and guide wires.
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
4
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
5
Terminal block for auxiliaries. Grommets.
Four-pole auxiliary bus duct
A duct for four conductors, 1755 mm long, for the distribution of auxiliary voltages
from the power and regulation devices to the automatic relay, control and indication
systems.
Composition
b insulating duct
b four brass conductors offering 166 tap-off points per linear meter via 6.35 mm tab-
terminals
b two clamps for mounting on cable-tie supports
b one lateral clamp.
Characteristics
b rated insulation level: Ui = 660 V
b rated operational current (40C): 32 A.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
2
Designation Cat. no.
Four-pole auxiliary bus duct 04203
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21070.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Switchboard lighting

Switchboard lighting
(System G/P)
This system is generally used to illuminate the front of a switchboard.
The kit is made up of:
b a base
b a neon tube
b afront plate with cut-out (1 module)
b a door contact.
Characteristics
b supply voltage: 220/240 V
b power rating: 8 W.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
8
Designation No. of modules Cat. no.
Switchboard lighting 1 08964
Installation in a cubicle (System P) using a System G adapter
(03595).
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
9
Installation in a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure
(System G).
Switchboard portable lamp
(System P)
Lamp with a magnetic base for installation behind a door or directly on the cubicle
framework.
Supplied without a power cord.
It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard.
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
5
Designation Cat. no.
Switchboard portable lamp 08965
Characteristics
b supply voltage: 220/240 V
b power rating: 11 W.
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21070.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Switchboard lighting
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21100.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Front plate accessories

Front plate accessories
(System P)
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
4 Designation Cat. no.
Front plate hinge kit (set of 2 hinges) 08584
Lead-sealable screws
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
6 Designation Cat. no.
4 lead-sealable front plate screws 03358
Blanking plates
For modular devices
Designation Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
7 Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, L = 1000 mm 03220
4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, L = 90 mm
colour: white RAL 9001
03221
For Compact NS100/250 and Interpact INS250
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
8 Designation Cat. no.
1 divisible blanking plates, H = 85 mm, L = 147 mm
colour: white RAL 9001
03249
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21100.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Front plate accessories

Switchboard identification plate
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
1 Designation Cat. no.
Switchboard identification plate 08900
Identification labels
Clip-on labels
Clip-on labels
The clip-on support is supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover.
It clips onto the front plate horizontally or vertically and can be screwed to any
support (plain door, plain front plate, etc.).
Engraving plates
Supplied separately, these plates simply replace the paper labels.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
4
Clip-on label. Designation Cat. no.
12 clip-on labels 18 x 35 08913
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
7 18 x 72 08915
25 x 85 08917
12 engraving plates 18 x 35 08914
18 x 72 08916
25 x 85 08918
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
3
Engraving plate.
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
5
Adhesive labels
The adhesive label holders are supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover.
Designation Cat. no.
12 label holders, W = 180 mm H = 24 mm 08905
H = 36 mm 08906
12 adhesive label holders, W = 432 mm H = 24 mm 08903
H = 36 mm 08904
12 divisible label holders, W = 650 mm H = 24 mm 08907
H = 36 mm 08908
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
1
Symbol sheets
Each sheet comprises adhesive symbols that can be positioned on the identification
labels to immediately identify the type of circuit.
Standard symbols:
b loads: sockets, lights, heating units, etc.
b rooms: bedroom, bathroom, etc.
Special symbols:
b loads: lightning arrestor, gate, swimming pool, etc.
b rooms: technical room, computer room, etc.
Cat. no. selection
Designation Cat. no.
Standard symbols. Set of ten symbol sheets standard 13735
special 13736
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
2
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
3
Special symbols. Symbols on an adhesive label holder.
L
U
M
IE
R
E
L
U
M
IE
R
E
L
U
M
IE
R
E
L
U
M
IE
R
E
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21110.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Fixing accessories

Clip-nuts for slotted mounting
plates
These nuts are used to install various devices (contactors, transformers) on a slotted
mounting plate.
They can also be installed on the cable-tie supports in enclosures and cubicles, as
well as on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members in cubicles.
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
2
Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates
M4 03180
M5 03181
M6 03182
Clip-nuts for modular rails
These nuts are used to install various devices on a modular rail.
Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for modular rails
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
3 M4 03164
M5 03165
M6 03166
Clip-nuts for lateral and
longitudinal cross-members
These nuts can be installed on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members
in cubicles, as well as on the functional uprights in IP30/55 wall-mount and floor-
standing enclosures.
Designation Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
2 20 M6 captive nuts 03194
Pratic raiser
Colour RAL 9001.
The raiser clips onto a slotted mounting plate or a modular rail.
It is 27 mm wide and serves to raise a device 10 mm.
It is made of an insulating material and can directly receive terminal blocks, modular
devices, etc.
D
D
3
8
1
5
7
6
Designation Cat. no.
5 Pratic raisers 04224
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
4
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E21110.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Functional units
Fixing accessories

Hexagonal spacers
D
D
3
8
1
5
6
4 Designation Cat. no.
M5 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 9 mm 03185
H = 23 mm 03186
H = 55 mm 03187
M6 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 9 mm 03195
H = 23 mm 03196
H = 25 mm 03198
H = 55 mm 03197
M8 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 40 + 10 mm 03199
D
D
3
8
0
8
2
8
Universal angle brackets
The angle brackets are used to install terminal blocks, trunking, etc.
Designation Cat. no.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
3 2 universal angle brackets 03581
D
D
3
8
1
5
7
7
Installation of a terminal block in a cubicle.
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G/P
Catalogue numbers
Functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
100E22000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Overview of distribution blocks

Designation Rated insulation
voltage Ui
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
Uimp
Rated operational
current Ie (40C)
Rated short-time
withstand
current
Icw
Rated peak
withstand
current Ipk
Distribloc distribution block 750 V 125/160 A Depending on
connected device
Depending on
connected device
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
1
Polybloc distribution block 750 V 8 kV 250 A Depending on
connected device
Depending on
connected device
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
2
160/630 A multi-stage distribution
block
750 V 8 kV 160/630 A 10 kA rms / 1 s for 160 A
block
13 kA rms / 1 s for 250 A
block
20 kA rms / 1 s for 400 A
block
25 kA rms / 1 s for 630 A
block
30 k for 160 and
250 A block
40 k for 400 and
630 A block
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
3
80 A Multiclip distribution block 500 V 6 kV 80 A Depending on
connected device
Depending on
connected device
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
4
200 A Multiclip distribution block 750 V 8 kV 200 A
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
5
Polypact distribution block 750 V 8 kV Compatible with the
breaking capacity
of the Compact NS
circuit breakers
connected to
the distribution block.
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
6
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Overview of distribution blocks

Connection capacity Installation / comments
Upstream Downstream
b tunnel terminals for 6 to 35 mm flexible
cables (10 to 35 mm rigid cables) for 125 A
Distribloc
b prefabricated connections (supplied) for
160 A Distribloc
b spring terminals:
v 2 outgoers from 1 to 10
v
, flexible or rigid
v 3 outgoers from 1 to 6
v
, flexible or rigid
v 7 outgoers from 1 to 4
v
, flexible or rigid
b tunnel terminals:
v 1 outgoer from 4 to 16
v
, flexible (4 to 25
v

rigid)
b modular rail
b plain or slotted backplate
see
page 100E22010.fm/2
b directly to the incoming device:
Compact NS 100/250, Interpact INS250
b spring terminals:
v 6 x 10
v
+ 3 x 16 mm, flexible or rigid
b directly downstream of the incoming
device:
Compact NS 100/250, Interpact INS250
b modular rail
b plain or slotted backplate
see
page 300E22040.fm/2
b cables:
v 16 to 50 mm with crimped lug
b flexible bars,
see page 100E22500.fm/2.
b 13 outgoers via 50
v
max. cables with
crimped lugs
b screwed to the rear of a wall-mount or
floor-standing enclosure
b screwed in the 300 mm duct of a wall-
mount or floor-standing enclosure
see
page 100E22050.fm/2
b tunnel terminals for cables y 25 mm b supplied flexible cables:
v 6 and 10 mm
b clipped onto rear of modular rail
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate
see
page 100E22100.fm/2
b via prefabricated connections from rear
busbars
b via prefabricated connections from
Powerclip busbars
b 50 mm cables with crimped lugs
b 20 x 3 mm flexible bars,
see page 100E22500.fm/2
b supplied flexible cables:
v 10 mm
b prefabricated connection supplied with
Polypact (04403/4/5/6)
b 32 x 6 mm flexible bars for Polypact
(04407 and 04408),
see page 100E22500.fm/2.
Supply of:
b 3 four-pole Compact NS100/250
b 4 three-pole Compact NS100/250
b 3 Interpact INS250
Fixing:
b direct to mounting plate in cubicle
see
page 400E22500.fm/2
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Distribloc distribution block

General
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, to spring terminals.
Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor. It does not
depend on the operator.
Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations.
Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring
terminal.
Degree of protection: IPxxB.
Advantages
b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed
over time)
b very fast connection
b easy phase balancing
b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified.
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
9
Cable connection.
Distribloc distribution block
The four-pole distribution block is made up of:
b a fully insulated, one-piece distribution block complying with the degree of
protection IPxxB (protection against direct contacts)
b a modular cover.
The design of the front (45 mm nose) blends perfectly into a row comprising modular
devices.
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
1
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
7
Designation Cat. no.
125 A Distribloc distribution block 04045
160 A Distribloc distribution block + connection 04046
Electrical characteristics
b rated insulation level: Ui = 750 V
b rated operational current Ie (40C):
v 125 A for the 125 A Distribloc
v 160 A for the 160 A Distribloc with its prefabricated connection for INS160
b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been
tested.
b complies with the low-voltage device standard IEC 60947.7.1 and/or IEC 60439.1
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
Supply
b tunnel terminal on 125 A Distribloc 125 for 6 to 35
v
flexible cables (10 to 35
v
rigid
cables)
b the 160 A Distribloc is supplied with a prefabricated flexible connection. It is
designed for an INS100/160 switch-disconnector, installed on the left or right.
Distribution (125 and 160 A Distribloc)
b spring terminals:
v 2 outgoers from 1 to 10
v
, flexible or rigid
v 3 outgoers from 1 to 6
v
, flexible or rigid
v 7 outgoers from 1 to 4
v
, flexible or rigid
b tunnel terminals:
v 1 outgoer from 4 to 16
v
, flexible (4 to 25
v
rigid)
Supply
b an identification label
b adhesive labels for phase identification
b a prefabricated flexible connection for the INS160 (160 A Distribloc only).
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
0
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
1
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Distribloc distribution block

Installation
b clipped onto a modular rail
b width occupied is 12 modules (9 mm each)
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate. Distances between centres = 100 x 75 mm.
Dimensions
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
8
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
9
125 A connection
Set of four flexible connections, 35
v,
, L = 210 mm.
To supply a 125 A Distribloc from an NG125 or an INS125.
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
8 Designation Cat. no.
4 NG-INS125 connections for Distribloc 04047
D
D
3
8
0
9
3
2
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22050.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
160/630 A multi-stage distribution
block

160/630 A four-pole multi-stage
distribution block
The distribution block can be installed horizontally in the device zone or vertically in
the 300 mm wide duct of wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures (System G).
The distribution block is made up of:
b two staggered supports made of an insulating material
b four slanted copper bars with holes every 25 mm
v 13 threaded M6 holes for outgoers
v four 12.2 mm diameter holes to supply the distribution block.
It is supplied with:
b M6 hardware
b one IPxxB insulating barrier for the front.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
9
Multi-stage distri. block Size of bars (mm) Cat. no.
160 A Distribloc (40C) 15 x 5 04052
250 A Distribloc (40C) 20 x 5 04053
400 A Distribloc (40C) 32 x 5 04054
630 A Distribloc (40C) 32 x 8 04055
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
1 Electrical characteristics
b rated operational current Ie (40C):
v 160 A for distribution block 04052
v 250 A for distribution block 04053
v 400 A for distribution block 04054
v 630 A for distribution block 04055
b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V
b rated short-time withstand current Icw:
v 10 kA rms / 1 s for 160 A block
v 13 kA rms / 1 s for 250 A block
v 20 kA rms / 1 s for 400 A block
v 25 kA rms / 1 s for 630 A block
b rated peak withstand current Ipk:
v 30 k for 160 A block
v 30 k for 250 A block
v 40 k for 400 A block
v 40 k for 630 A block
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
Supply
b 16 mm
2
to 50 mm
2
cables with crimped lugs
b 20 x 2 mm flexible bars for NS100/160
b 20 x 3 mm flexible bars for NS250
b 32 x 5 mm flexible bars for NS400
b 32 x 8 mm flexible bars for NS630.
Distribution
13 outgoers per phase, max. 50 mm
2
.
Installation
b screwed horizontally onto the functional uprights of wall-mount and floor-standing
enclosures (System G)
b screwed vertically onto the functional uprights of the 300 mm wide duct (System G)
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate (System G/P)
b screwed onto the adapter 03595 (System P).
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
2
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
3
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22050.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
160/630 A multi-stage distribution
block

Dimensions
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
4
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22100.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Multiclip distribution block

General
For connections, the distribution block uses a proven technique, i.e. spring terminals.
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring
terminals. Contact pressure does not depend on the operator. It automatically adapts
to the size of the conductor (minimum size = 1mm). Contacts are insensitive to
vibrations and thermal variations.
Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring
terminal.
Degree of protection: IPxxB.
Advantages
b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed
over time)
b the fast connections make phase balancing very easy.
b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified.
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
9
Cable connection.
63/80 A Multiclip distribution
blocks
Application
Distribution over half or full rows of modular devices. It is generally supplied by a
device at the head of a group of outgoers (NG125, INS, C60, etc.).
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
6
6
0
Designation Cat. no.
80 A Multiclip distribution block, 4P 04004
63 A Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 1/2 row 04008
Electrical characteristics
b rated insulation level Ui = 500 V
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 6 kV
b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been
tested.
b 63/80 A Multiclip distribution blocks:
v 4 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 32 A
v 6 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 40 A
v two 6 mm cables: Imax = 63 A.
Supply
Via tunnel terminals up to 25 mm, generally from a device supplying a group of
outgoers.
The tunnel terminals are positioned to facilitate cable entry and screw tightening.
They are designed for cables arriving from the top or bottom.
Distribution
b for the full-row Multiclip, 4P (04004), each phase offers:
v 2 connection points for 10
v
max. cable
v 7 connection points for 6
v
max. cable
the neutral offers:
v 4 connection points for 10
v
max. cable
v 13 connection points for 6
v
max. cable
b for the half-row Multiclip, 4P (04008), each phase offers:
v 2 connection points for 10
v
max. cable
v 2 connection points for 6
v
max. cable
the neutral offers:
v 4 connection points for 10
v
max. cable
v 4 connection points for 6
v
max. cable
Each connection point can receive a single cable, either flexible or rigid.
Installation
b clipped onto the rear of modular rail
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
1
04004.
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
5
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
4
Half-row Multiclip distribution block supplied
by an INS switch-disconnector.
Multiclip distribution block supplied by a Vigi
NG125 circuit breaker.
Supplied with 100 mm long bared copper connections
b for full-row Multiclip (04004):
v 2 sets of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections
b for half-row Multiclip (04008):
v 1 set of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections.
04008.
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22100.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Multiclip distribution block

160/200 A Multiclip distribution
blocks
Application
Distribution over full rows of modular devices.
The distribution block is generally supplied by busbars in enclosures and cubicles.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
6
6
1
Designation Cat. no.
200 A Multiclip, 2P 04012
200 A Multiclip, 3P 04013
200 A Multiclip, 4P 04014
160 A Multiclip, 4P, 1/2 row 04018
Electrical characteristics
b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV
b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been.
b 160/200 A Multiclip distribution blocks:
v 10 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 50 A
v two 10 mm cables: Imax = 63 A.
Supply
b direct to terminals:
v 50 mm cables with crimped lugs
v 20 x 3 mm flexible bars
b from Powerclip insulated busbars in a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure
(04021)
b from lateral, channelled busbars in a cubicle (connection must be made)
b from busbars in the duct of a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure (04024)
b from busbars in the rear of a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure (04029).
Busbar connection
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
2
04012. Designation Cat. no.
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and Powerclip insulated busbars
(enclosure)
04021
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
0 Connection between 200 A Multiclip and busbars in a duct (enclosure) 04024
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and rear busbars (enclosure) 04029
Distribution
b 200 A Multiclip, 2P (04012):
v 12 connection points for phase and neutral
b 200 A Multiclip, 3P and 4P (04013 and 04014):
v 12 connection points for each phase
v 18 connection points for the neutral
b 160 A Multiclip, 4P, 1/2 row (04018):
v 6 connection points for each phase
v 9 connection points for the neutral
Each connection point can receive a single 10 mm cable, either flexible or rigid.
Installation
b clipped onto the rear of modular rail
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate.
Supplied with:
b 100 mm long, bared 10 mm copper connections
v 200 A Multiclip, 2P, 3P and 4P (04012, 04013 et 04014): 2 sets of 12 connections
v 160 A Multiclip, 1/2 row (04018): 1 set of 12 connections
b protection covers for the supply terminals (IPxxB)
b the hardware required for the supply terminals.
04013.
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
1
04014.
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
3
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
0
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
4
04018.
Supply from busbars in the duct of a wall-
mount or floor-standing enclosure (connection
04024).
Supply from Powerclip busbars in a wall-
mount or floor-standing enclosure (connection
04021).
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22100.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Multiclip distribution block

200 A Multiclip distribution block
(36 modules)
Application
Distribution over full rows of modular devices.
The distribution block is generally supplied by busbars in enclosures.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
0
0
0
Designation Cat. no.
200 A Multiclip, 4P (36 modules) 04026
Electrical characteristics
b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV
b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been.
b 200 A Multiclip:
v 10 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 50 A
v two 10 mm cables: Imax = 63 A.
Supply
direct to terminals:
50 mm cables with crimped lugs
20 x 3 mm flexible bars
from Powerclip insulated busbars in a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure
(connection 04021)
from busbars in the rear of a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure (connection
04029).
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
4
Designation Cat. no.
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and Powerclip insulated busbars
(enclosure)
04021
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and rear busbars (enclosure) 04029
04026. Distribution
18 connection points for each phase.
27 connection points for the neutral.
Each connection point can receive a single 10 mm cable, either flexible or rigid.
Installation
b clipped onto the rear of modular rail
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate.
Supplied with:
b 3 sets of twelve 100 mm long, bared 10 mm copper connections
b protection covers for the supply terminals (IPxxB)
b the hardware required for the supply terminals.
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
9
Supply from Powerclip busbars in a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure (connection 04021).
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
0
Supply from busbars in the rear of a wall-mount or floor-standing enclosure (connection 04029).
PHOTO
EN ATTENTE
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22100.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Multiclip distribution block
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22500.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Insulated flexible bars

Presentation
The insulated flexible bars are tested in a type-tested switchboard environment.
Their design takes into account the switchboard architecture where they are often in
close proximity to a protection device (circuit breaker or fuse) with significant heat
losses.
In-depth knowledge of switchboard architecture and the connected devices led to the
establishment of a selection table based on the type of device.
Flexible bars are 1800 mm long and made of copper with an insulating sheath.
Rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V.
The sizes for the flexible bars indicated below take into account the heat losses of
Schneider devices in a Prisma Plus switchboard.
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
9
Catalogue number selection
Connection between device and busbars
The flexible bars are determined taking into account the connected device, whatever
the internal temperature of the switchboard.
The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices.
Device Size (mm) Cat. no.
NS100/160 20 x 2 04742
NS250 20 x 3
(1)
04743
NS400 32 x 5 04751
NS630 32 x 8 04753
INS125/160 20 x 2 04742
INS250 20 x 3 04743
INS400 32 x 5 04751
INS630 32 x 6 04752
200 A Multiclip 20 x 3 04743
Polypact, 3P 32 x 6 04752
Polypact, 4P 32 x 6 04752
Fupact 250 24 x 5 04746
Fupact 400 32 x 5 04751
Fupact 630 32 x 8 04753
(1) To connect a Compact NS250 to Powerclip busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm flexible bar (04746).
Connection between busbars
Flexible bars are designed for connections between busbars taking into account the
following characteristics:
a maximum temperature of 60C inside the switchboard. This corresponds to the
average temperature inside a switchboard for an ambient temperature of 35C
b the maximum withstand temperature for the insulating material is 125C.
Ie max. (A) Size (mm) Cat. no.
200 20 x 2 04742
250 20 x 3 04743
400 24 x 5 04746
520 32 x 5 04751
580 32 x 6 04752
660 32 x 8 04753
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
8
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22500.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Insulated flexible bars
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22600.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Cable running
Cable straps

Vertical cable straps
System G
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
8
Designation Cat. no.
12 cable straps for vertical cables 04264
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
0
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
9
System P
Designation Cat. no.
12 cable straps for vertical cables 04262
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
2
Installation on a mounting plate.
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
1
Installation on a modular rail support.
Cover for vertical cable straps
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
3 Designation Cat. no.
2 covers for vertical cable straps L = 1 m 04263
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
4
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
9
System P. System G.
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22600.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Cable running
Cable straps
Horizontal cable straps
System G/P
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
8
Designation Cat. no.
12 cable straps for horizontal cables 04239
Horizontal cable straps have the same capacity as 60 x 30 mm trunking.
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
0
System G.
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
9
System P.
Cover for horizontal cable straps
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
1 Designation Cat. no.
4 covers for horizontal cable straps L = 430 mm 04243
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
2
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
8
System P. System G.
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22600.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Cable running
Trunking

Vertical trunking support
System G
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
3
Designation Cat. no.
12 vertical trunking supports 04265
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
4
System P
The 30 or 60 mm deep trunking sections can be installed directly on the modular-rail
supports or on the mounting plates of vertically mounted Compact NS circuit
breakers.
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
5
Trunking installed on a modular rail.
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
6
Trunking installed on a mounting plate.
Horizontal trunking support
System G/P
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
6
Designation Cat. no.
12 horizontal trunking supports 04255
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
7
D
D
3
8
2
3
2
0
Trunking installed horizontally on the rear of a modular rail.
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E22600.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Distribution
Cable running
Trunking, accessories
Trunking
D
D
3
8
1
6
3
9 Designation Cat. no.
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, L = 450 mm (with supports) 04257
Vertical trunking, 80 x 60 mm, L = 2000 mm
(sold in sets of 18)
04267
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
0
Cable trunking for doors
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
1 Designation Cat. no.
Cable trunking for doors, L = 2000 mm
(sold in sets of 30)
04233
Adhesive trunking, 30 x 30 mm
Flexible trunking
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
3 Designation Cat. no.
Flexible trunking for wiring to door 04235
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
3
Terminal block for auxiliaries
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
4 Designation Cat. no.
Disconnectable terminal block for auxiliaries 04228
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
7
Grommets for wiring through
front
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
4 Designation Cat. no.
10 grommets for wiring through front 04234
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
5
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G/P
Catalogue numbers
Functional units
Distribution
Enclosures
100E23000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Enclosure accessories
Door handles and locks

Handles(except System G IP55)
D
D
3
8
0
6
5
6
D
D
3
8
0
6
5
2 Designation Cat. no.
EURO handle without insert 08932
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
1
Designation Cat. no.
ASSA handle without insert 08933
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
2
Designation Cat. no.
Standard handle without insert 08930
Can be equipped with all the barrel locks and inserts presented below.
Barrel locks, inserts
The barrel locks and inserts below can be mounted on handle 08930 and on all the
door handles of the Prisma Plus range (except System G IP55) after removing the
standard barrel lock (key no. 405).
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
4
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
3
Designation Cat. no.
Barrel locks
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 405 08940
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 455 08941
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 1242E 08942
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 3113A 08943
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 2433A 08944
Inserts
DIN double bar insert 08945
Screwdriver slot insert 08946
6.5 mm male triangle insert 08947
7 mm male triangle insert 08948
8 mm male triangle insert 08949
9 mm male triangle insert 08950
6 mm male square insert 08951
7 mm male square insert 08952
8 mm male square insert 08953
6 mm female square insert 08955
Padlocking
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
5 Designation Cat. no.
Handle padlocking kit 08938
The kit can be installed on the door handles of the Prisma Plus range
(except System G IP55) equipped with any of the barrel locks and inserts above.
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E23000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Enclosure accessories
Earthing braid
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
6 Designation Cat. no.
Earthing braid, 6 mm 08910
Earthing wire, 6 mm 08911
The braid is equipped with a 4 mm diameter lug at one end and a 6 mm diameter lug
on the other.
It is used to earth:
b a door or wicket door with devices
b a front-plate support frame in a cubicle.
D
D
3
5
1
3
3
8
08910.
Touch-up accessories
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
7 Designation Cat. no.
Touch-up spray paint, colour RAL 9001 08962
Touch-up paint brush, colour RAL 9001 08961
Drawing holder
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
8 Designation Cat. no.
Adhesive drawing holder, colour RAL 9001 08963
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E23010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Air-conditioning accessories
Presentation
In most cases and notably for IP30 switchboards, convection takes place naturally
and does not require fans.
However, when the switchboard is installed in temperate environments or when the
degree of protection is high (IP55), ventilation accessories are indispensable. For
more in-depth information on selecting air-conditioning accessories and the thermal
management of switchboards, see page 100E45000.fm/2
Front or side fan
The switchboard is cooled by drawing in cool external air.
Presentation
The set comprises the fan with a grill and a filter.
It can be clipped directly on the cut-out front plate.
Installation
These fans are generally installed at the bottom of floor-standing enclosures:
b by cutting out a side panel
b or on the front, using the front plate with cut-out for a fan.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
3
Designation Cat. no.
Fan 08987
Front plate with cut-out for fan (7 modules) 03890
Characteristics
Power rating: 70 W.
Input voltage: 230 V.
Noise level: 69 dB.
Degree of protection: IP54.
Weight: 3 kg.
Throughput: 460 m
3
/h.
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
3
Filter for front or side fan
Presentation
The grill is supplied with a standard filter that can be replaced or exchanged for a finer
filter.
The grill can be clipped directly on the cut-out front plate.
Installation
The grill/filter can be installed:
b by cutting out a side panel
b or on the front, using the front plate with cut-out for a fan.
Characteristics
Degree of protection: IP54.
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
4
Designation Cat. no.
Grill with filter (supplied with standard filter, maximum throughput = 130 m
3
/h) 08988
5 standard filters (replacement) 08989
5 fine filters 08990
Front plate with cut-out for fan (7 modules) 03890
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
4
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E23010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Air-conditioning accessories

Roof fan (System P)
Presentation
A roof with a cut-out (IP31) can also be equipped with one or two fans.
It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust or falling objects.
It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
5
Designation Cat. no.
Ventilated roof, W = 650 mm D = 400 mm 08476
D = 600 mm 08676
Fan 08986
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
5
Fan characteristics
Power rating: 35 W.
Input voltage: 230 V.
Noise level: 52 dB.
Throughput: 300 m
3
/h.
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
8
Ventilated front plate
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
6 Designation Cat. no.
IP30 ventilated front plate, H = 50 mm (1 module), S = 80 cm 03891
IP30 ventilated front plate, H = 150 mm (3 modules), S = 250 cm 03895
Located at the top and bottom of the switchboard, IP30 ventilated front plates
facilitate natural convection in the switchboard.
S is the surface area of the openings.
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
7
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E23010.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Air-conditioning accessories

Heating elements
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
6 Designation H W D (mm) Cat. no.
55 W heating resistor 184 70 60 08992
90 W heating resistor 184 70 60 08993
250 W heating resistor 180 80 80 08994
The resistors can be mounted horizontally or vertically. They prevent condensation,
corrosion and superficial leakage currents.
They maintain a positive temperature in the enclosures and cubicles when external
temperatures drop very low.
Characteristics
b aluminium case with fins
b turns off at 60C, turns on at 25-30C (temperature of the resistor itself)
b equipped with a symmetrical rail for rapid mounting (clips on).
D
D
3
8
1
5
7
3
D
D
3
8
1
5
7
4
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
7
08994. 08992, 08993.
Thermostat
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
8 Designation Cat. no.
Thermostat 08998
Used to control the temperature inside electrical switchboards in conjunction with
heating resistors and fans.
Setting range: +5 C to +60 C.
Input voltage: 230 V.
Fixing: clips onto a modular rail.
D
D
3
8
1
5
7
5
N1 N2
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
100E23010.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosures
Air-conditioning accessories
Catalogue numbers
System G/P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G/P
Characteristics
Standards
Electrical characteristics
Thermal characteristics
100E41000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
International electrotechnical
standards

IEC international standards
The IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) is a worldwide organisation for
standardisation comprising all national electrotechnical committees (IEC National
Committees).
The object of the IEC is to promote international cooperation on all questions
concerning standardisation in the electrical and electronic fields.
To that end, the IEC publishes International Standards.
Their preparation is entrusted to technical committees and any IEC National
Committee interested in the subject dealt with may participate in the preparatory
work.
IEC member countries
South Africa
Germany
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belarus
Belgium
Brazil
Bulgaria
Canada
China
Korea (Rep. of)
Croatia
Denmark
Egypt
Spain
Finland
France
Greece
Hungary
India
Iran
Indonesia
Ireland
Israel
Italy
Japan
Luxemburg
Malaysia
Mexico
Norway
New Zealand
Pakistan
Netherlands
Poland
Portugal
Rumania
United Kingdom
Russia
Singapore
Slovakia
Slovenia
Sweden
Switzerland
Czech Rep.
Thailand
Turkey
Ukraine
United States
Yugoslavia
National standards
In Europe
The IEC documents are first studied by CENELEC, which establishes:
b either a European standard (EN), often identical to the IEC standard, which then
becomes the applicable national standard in all the member countries
b or, if problems arise, a harmonisation document (HD).
Other IEC member countries
Each country is autonomous and can accept the IEC standard as the national
standard, with or without modifications.
Even though they are IEC members, countries such as Japan and the United States
continue to develop their own standardisation systems.
Countries without a standardisation system
It is possible to refer to an IEC standard in the framework of a project.
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
9
CEI / IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
CENELEC
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardisation
UTE
Union Technique de llectricit (French electrotechnical
standardisation organisation)
VDE
Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik
e.v. (German electrotechnical, electronics and computer
technology standardisation organisation)
BSI
British Standards Institution
Characteristics
System G/P
100E41000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
Standards
Tools for quality assurance

The different types of standards
There are different types of standards, including:
b management standards
b installation standards
b product standards.
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
5
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
6
Management standards
ISO 9004: Quality management system - guidelines for performance improvement.
Used in setting up quality management systems.
ISO 9001: Quality management system - requirements. Used for certification audits.
ISO 14004: Environmental management system - major guidelines on the principles.
Systems and techniques implemented.
ISO 14001: Environmental management system - specification with guidance for
use.
A majority of Schneider Electric development centres and factories are certified ISO
9001 and ISO 14001.
Installation standards
The set of IEC 60364-X standards defines the main principles and rules on:
b assessment of general characteristics of installations
b protection
b selection and erection of equipment
b verification and maintenance of installations.
Product standards
They apply to LV switchgear devices or LV switchgear assemblies, where the
purpose is to ensure the correct operation and safety of the concerned products.
b standards on switchgear devices:
v IEC 60947-1: general rules
v IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers
v IEC 60947-3: switches and disconnectors
v IEC 60947-4: contactors
v IEC 62208 / EN 50298: empty enclosures.
b standards on switchgear assemblies:
v IEC 60439-1: general rules
v IEC 60439-2: busbar trunking systems
v IEC 60439-3: distribution boards
v IEC 60439-4: assemblies for construction sites
v IEC 60439-5: power distribution in networks.
Design and manufacture. Switchgear assemblies.
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
8
Switchgear devices. Installation.
Regulations
The regulations in a given country may make certain standards legally binding and
may also create additional safety requirements.
Quality assurance
In addition to providing proof of the conformity of its quality management system, a
product manufacturer can demonstrate the quality of products by providing proof that
their design and manufacture comply with the requirements in the applicable
standard.
Proof of conformity may be a declaration by the manufacturer or a certificate supplied
by an independent organisation.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E41000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
Standard IEC 60439-1

All elements making up the electrical switchboard are concerned.
The object of standard IEC 60439-1 is to lay down the definitions and to state the
service conditions, construction requirements, technical characteristics and tests for
low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies (U < 1000 V).
The standard defines a low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assembly (the
electrical switchboard) as "a combination of one or more low-voltage switching
devices together with associated control, measuring, signalling, protective,
regulating equipment, etc., completely assembled under the responsibility of the
manufacturer with all the internal electrical and mechanical inter-connections and
structural parts".
Standard IEC 60439-1 defines ten
mandatory tests
These tests ensure the conformity of the electrical switchboard and are intended to
check switchboard characteristics.
b seven type tests are carried out on typical configurations
b three routine tests are carried out on the completely finished switchboard. Their
purpose is the check that the characteristics validated by the type tests were not
altered during the manufacturing operations.
The seven type tests
1 - Temperature-rise limits
The incoming circuit is loaded to its rated current and each outgoing circuit is loaded
with its rated current multiplied by the rated diversity factor. Once the temperature
has stabilised, the temperature rise must not exceed the permissible temperatures
for materials or risk causing burns.
2 - Dielectric properties
The test voltage is applied between all live parts and the interconnected exposed
conductive parts, as well as between each pole and all the other poles connected for
this test to the interconnected exposed conductive parts.
b up to 3500 V, 50 Hz
b 4 to 12 kV impulse voltage depending on the rated characteristics.
3 - Short-circuit withstand strength
In the event of a short-circuit, whether inside or outside the switchboard, the latter
must handle the resulting stresses (temperature rise, attraction or repulsion forces
exerted on conductors, etc.).
The capacity to handle the stresses is above all the means to avoid danger (breaking
and projection of components, electric arcs and their propagation outside the
switchboard).
However, it is also the means to ensure a rapid return to operation after the incident.
4 - Effectiveness of the protective circuit
The effectiveness of the protective circuit is checked by two tests:
b short-circuit strength between the protective conductor and the nearest phase
b verification, employing a resistance measuring instrument, of the effective
connection between the exposed conductive parts of the assembly and the protective
circuit.
5 - Clearances and creepage distances
The minimum clearance in air is a function of the impulse withstand voltage and the
degree of pollution in the switchboard.
The minimum creepage distance is a function of the rated insulation level, the degree
of pollution and the material group of the insulating material separating the live parts.
6 - Mechanical operation
Satisfactory mechanical operation is verified after installation in the assembly.
The number of operating cycles for the test is 50.
This test is required for the locking mechanisms, for example.
7 - Degree of protection
The tests carried out determine the capacity of the switchboard to:
b protect people against access to dangerous parts
b protect devices against the penetration of foreign objects and liquids.
Three routine tests
1 - Inspection of the assembly
2 - Dielectric test
3 - Checking of protective measures and of the electrical
continuity of the protective circuits.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E41000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
Enclosure standards
IEC 62208 and EN 50298

Standards IEC 62208 and
EN 50298
Empty enclosures for low-voltage
switchgear and controlgear
assemblies
General rules for empty enclosures
Standards IEC 62208 and EN 50298 lay down definitions, classifications,
characteristics and test requirements for the enclosures used for assemblies.
They apply to empty enclosures before installation of the devices by the panel
builder, as supplied by the manufacturer.
They apply to one-piece enclosures and to enclosures supplied in kit form.
Type tests
1 - Static load
2 - Hoisting
3 - Axial loads of metal inserts
4 - IK code
5 - IP code
6 - Thermal stability
7 - Resistance to heat
8 - Resistance to abnormal heat and to fire
9 - Dielectric strength
10 - Protective-circuit continuity
11 - Weather resistance
12 - Corrosion resistance
13 - Marking.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E41000.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
Prisma Plus tested switchboards

A switchboard must comply with the requirements in standard IEC 60439-1 to
guarantee the safety and reliability of the installation.
Managers of installations, fully aware of the professional and legal liabilities weighing
on their company and on themselves, demand a high level of safety for the electrical
installation.
What is more, the serious economic consequences of prolonged halts in production
mean that the electrical switchboard must provide excellent continuity of service,
whatever the operating conditions.
The Schneider Electric solution
b specify switchboards that comply with standard IEC 60439-1
b guarantee a level of safety that has been 100% tested, from the day the
switchboard is installed and throughout its service life
b ensure the return on investment through easy upgrading of the installation in
compliance with the standard
b guarantee that the switchboard complies with the technical specifications.
Prisma Plus tested switchboards
The conformity of the switchboard has been tested and proven.
A Prisma Plus switchboard is:
b made up of Merlin Gerin low-voltage devices and components that all comply with
the applicable standards
b based on configurations in the Merlin Gerin catalogue
b made up of Prisma Plus mechanical and electrical components that have been
subjected to the seven type tests required by the standard
b mounted and wired by a panel builder in compliance with professional standards
b subjected to the three routine tests required by the standard.
Schneider Electric makes available to the panel builder everything required to create
tested Prisma Plus switchboards, including the basic configurations in the low-
voltage distribution catalogue, all the documentation for switchboard design and
mounting, calculation and design software, etc.
The panel builder can easily demonstrate conformity with standard IEC 60439-1 by
presenting the declarations or certificates of conformity concerning the type tests
carried out by independent laboratories ( ASEFA, ASTA, KEMA, etc.) and supplied
by Schneider Electric.
The panel builder is responsible for the three routine tests and delivers the
corresponding declarations of conformity.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E41000.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
Characteristics
System G/P
100E41010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
CE marking

CE marking
CE marking is defined by regulations and attributed under the sole responsibility of
the manufacturer. It is intended for the verification authorities of the European
countries that enforce the European regulations.
It allows the free circulation of a product in the European Union and certifies that it
complies with the basic requirements of all the applicable European directives.
CE marking does not attest to quality and does not indicate conformity with a
standard.
The CE declaration of conformity
The declaration is intended exclusively for authorities in charge of verifying
compliance with the applicable regulations and it drafted, signed and held for
presentation to the authorities by the manufacturer.
For the Prisma Plus range, the declaration is the responsibility of the Schneider
Electric unit that designed and developed the product.
For LV switchboards, the declaration is the responsibility of the panel builder.
Products marked CE
The following products receive CE marking:
b all products that are liable to endanger the safety of persons, animals and property
(LV directive)
b all products that are liable to cause electromagnetic disturbance above a
standardised threshold or the performance of which is liable to be affected by such
disturbance (EMC directive).
Consequences:
b the Prisma Plus range of switchboards falls under the LV directive only
b LV switchboards are covered by the LV directive and may also fall under the EMC
directive, depending on the type of devices incorporated.
CE marking
e
For the Prisma Plus range, the CE marking is placed:
b on the packing of "mechanical" components
b on the product itself for "electrical" components.
For the LV assemblies created by the panel builder, the CE marking is placed:
b on the packing materials
b on the name plate (if applicable)
b on one of the documents accompanying the switchboard when it is shipped.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E41010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
CE marking
Characteristics
System G/P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G/P
Characteristics
Standards
Electrical characteristics
Thermal characteristics
100E42000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing Prisma Plus
power circuits
Presentation and approach

The Prisma Plus system takes into account
the installation and connection conditions of
Merlin Gerin and Telemecanique devices.
The entire installation complies with
standard IEC 60439-1. The result is a type
tested switchboard.
In the following pages you will find a number of examples, validated for Prisma Plus
switchboards, intended to assist in determining the busbars as well as the upstream
and downstream connections for the installation.
The examples assume that the devices have already been selected.
A complete process involves a number of steps before making final choices
(transformer, conductors, protection, etc.).
Schneider Electric offers a number of tools to assist in designing a complete
installation (technical guides, software).
P
D
3
9
0
3
5
7
Busbar sizing
The factors that must be taken into account in determining the size of busbars
include:
b the diversity factor.
Not all the loads supplied by a set of busbars are used at full rated load or at the same
time. The diversity factor is the means to determine the maximum load current used
to size the busbars.
Standard IEC 60439-1 4.7 specifies the table below.
Number of circuits Diversity factor
2 and 3 0.9
4 and 5 0.8
6 to 9 0.7
10 and more 0.6
b the degree of protection IP.
For information on defining the necessary degree of protection IP,
page 100E43000.fm/2.
b the ambient temperature around the switchboard.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing Prisma Plus
power circuits
Presentation and approach

Busbars
The maximum load current for a set of busbars is a function of the thermal
environment.
The type and the size of the conductors must be determined in view of carrying the
required currents taking into account the temperatures reached in the switchboard.
These conductors are subjected to additional heat rise caused by the flowing current
(joule effect) and the connected devices.
The temperatures reached by the conductors and the insulating materials, etc. must
not exceed the maximum temperatures for which the products were designed.
Merlin Gerin busbars and distribution blocks are sized to operate without any
particular constraints for the assemblies in Prisma Plus switchboards operating
under normal environmental conditions (standard switchboard configuration, 35C
outside the switchboard, etc.).
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
9
To determine the Linergy busbars required, see the tables on
page 100E42020.fm/2.
They can be used to determine:
b the type of Linergy busbars, as a function of:
v the current
v the IP value
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard.
Linergy busbars: I y 1600 A.
Double Linergy busbars: 1600 A < I y 3200 A.
D
D
3
8
1
4
6
0
To determine the required flat busbars, see the tables on page 100E42010.fm/2
(horizontal busbars) and on page 100E42030.fm/2 (vertical busbars)
They can be used to determine:
b the permissible current as a function of:
v the size of the busbars
v the number of bars
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard
v the IP value.
Flat copper busbars 5 mm thick: I y 1600 A.
Flat copper busbars 10 mm thick: I y 3200 A.
Connection of devices u 630 and

busbar connections
To determine the size of upstream and downstream connections for devices, see
the tables starting on page 100E42040.fm/2.
They can be used to determine:
b the size of copper busbars
b the maximum permissible current.
As a function of:
b the type of circuit breaker
b the IP value
b the ambient temperature around the switchboard
b the type of installation.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing Prisma Plus
power circuits
Presentation and approach

Supply of devices
for outgoers y 630 A
Flexible copper bars with an insulating cover.
To determine the required sizes for flexible bars, see the tables starting on
page 100E42060.fm/2, which indicate the correct size for each type of connected
device.
b an insulated flexible bar (not connected) must meet standards IEC 60243-1
(dielectric, see page 2), NFC 32201 (insulation) and IEC 60332-1 (fire)
b a flexible bar connected to a device in an enclosure must comply with standard
IEC 60439-1 (see explanations on page 100E41000.fm/2).
Cables
To determine the cables required, see the table on page 100E42070.fm/2.
They can be used to determine:
b the size of cables as a function of:
v the circuit breaker rating
v the current
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard
b the permissible current for individually tied cables or touching cables as a function
of:
v the size of the cables
v the degree of protection for the switchboard.
PE and PEN conductors
To determine the required size of the PE conductor, see page 100E42080.fm/2.
Two possibilities:
b either the equation indicated by standard IEC 60439-1 to obtain an optimised
value:
Example
v Isc = 36 kA rms C the value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value
of the phase-to-phase fault current (standard IEC 60439-1 8.2.4.2), i.e.:
36 x 0.6 = 21.6 kA
v maximum time delay for the control unit: 0.5 s
v k = 143 for copper conductors with PVC insulation.
The calculation is therefore:
The PE conductor must therefore be a 25 x 5 mm bar (= 125 mm
2
).
b or the Schneider Electric table based on the standard.
To determine the required size of the PEN conductor, see page 100E42090.fm/2.
S
PE
I
2
t
k
---------- =
S
PE
21600
2
x 0 5
143
------------------------------------ 106 8 mm
2
= =
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing Prisma Plus
power circuits
Presentation and approach
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing horizontal busbars

Permissible current and selection of horizontal busbars
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.
Up to 1600 A
Flat busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 b
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 870 910 810 860 b
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 1180 1260 1090 1180 b
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 1510 1610 1390 1510 b
Up to 3200 A
Flat busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50C
Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1010 1060 940 990 b
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1160 1240 1070 1160 b
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 1500 1600 1390 1500 b
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 1740 1810 1610 1690 b
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 1870 2030 1720 1900 b
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2330 2500 2160 2330 b
2 bars, 100 x 10 mm 3650 3280 3490 3100 3300 2900 3130 2720 2950 2510 2750 b
b connection impossible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices
installed in the switchboard.
Example
Two 50 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2160 A current with an IP y 31 and an
ambient temperature of 30C around the switchboard.
Where possible, use of 10 mm bars is worthwhile in terms of the In/Isc:
b gain in time during switchboard mounting given, where applicable, the lesser
number of bars installed
b for short-circuits, the rigidity of the bars means fewer busbar supports.
Recommendation
Use 5 mm bars for In y 1600 A and low Icw values (40 kA rms).
Use 10 mm bars for In > 1600 A and medium to high Icw values
(> 40 kA rms).
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing horizontal busbars
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42020.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing Linergy busbars

Permissible current and selection of Linergy busbars
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.
Lateral Linergy busbars
Linergy bar
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
Linergy 630 750 680 710 630 680 590 630 550 590 530 550 b
Linergy 800 920 840 880 800 840 760 800 720 760 680 720 b
Linergy 1000 1140 1040 1090 990 1040 950 990 900 950 850 900 b
Linergy 1250 1410 1290 1350 1230 1290 1170 1230 1100 1170 1050 1100 b
Linergy 1600 1800 1650 1720 1580 1650 1480 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 b
Linergy 2000 (2 x 1000) 2200 2000 2100 1900 2000 1820 1900 1720 1820 1620 1720 b
Linergy 2500 (2 x 1250) 2740 2500 2620 2380 2500 2260 2380 2120 2260 2020 2120 b
Linergy 3200 (2 x 1600) 3480 3200 3340 3060 3200 2920 3060 2780 2920 2640 2780 b
Example
A Linergy channelled bar can be used for a 1650 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient
temperature around the switchboard of 35C.
Rear Linergy busbars
Linergy bar
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
Linergy 630 750 680 710 630 680 590 630 550 590 530 550 b
Linergy 800 920 840 880 800 840 760 800 720 760 680 720 b
Linergy 1000 1140 1040 1090 990 1040 950 990 900 950 850 900 b
Linergy 1250 1410 1290 1350 1230 1290 1170 1230 1100 1170 1050 1100 b
Linergy 1600 1800 1650 1720 1580 1650 1480 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 b
b connection impossible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices
installed in the switchboard.
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
3
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
4
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
5
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
6
630 A bar.
Cat. no. 04502.
800 A bar.
Cat. no. 04503.
1000 A bar.
Cat. no. 04504.
1250 A bar.
Cat. no. 04505.
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
7
1600 A bar.
Cat. no. 04506.
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42020.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing Linergy busbars
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42030.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing vertical flat busbars
Lateral busbars

Permissible current and selection of vertical busbars
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.
Up to 1600 A
Flat busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 b
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 870 910 810 860 b
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 1180 1260 1090 1180 b
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 1510 1610 1390 1510 b
Up to 3200 A
Flat busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1010 1060 940 990 b
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1160 1240 1070 1160 b
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 1500 1600 1390 1500 b
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 1740 1810 1610 1690 b
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 1870 2030 1720 1900 b
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2330 2500 2160 2330 b
2 x 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 3540 3200 3370 3020 3200 2800 3020 2650 2840 2450 2650 b
b connection impossible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices
installed in the switchboard..
D
D
3
8
1
4
6
1
Example
Two 80 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2820 A current with an IP y 31 and an
ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.
D
D
3
8
1
4
7
4
Two 80 x 10 mm bars installed separately in two busbar compartments can be used
for a 3200 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 35C around the
switchboard.
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42030.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing vertical flat busbars
Rear busbars

Permissible current and selection of vertical busbars
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.
Up to 1600 A
Flat busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 b
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 870 910 810 860 b
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 1180 1260 1090 1180 b
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 1510 1610 1390 1510 b
Up to 3200 A
Flat busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1010 1060 940 990 b
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1160 1240 1070 1160 b
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 1500 1600 1390 1500 b
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 1740 1810 1610 1690 b
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 1870 2030 1720 1900 b
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2330 2500 2160 2330 b
b connection impossible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices
installed in the switchboard..
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
Prefabricated connections for Linergy
busbars

Compact NS630b to NS1600,
vertically mounted D
D
3
8
1
4
7
6
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a
prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fixed or
withdrawable, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around
the switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b 3P Cat. no. 04485 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04486
NS800 3P Cat. no. 04485 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04486
NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04485 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04486
NS1250 3P Cat. no. 04485 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P Cat. no. 04486
NS1600 3P Cat. no. 04487 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400 b
4P Cat. no. 04488
Withdrawable
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b 3P Cat. no. 04477 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS800 3P Cat. no. 04477 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04477 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1250 3P Cat. no. 04477 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1600

3P Cat. no. 04491 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330 b
4P Cat. no. 04492
b connection not possible. Example
For a fixed Compact NS1600, 4P, where the ambient temperature around the
switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31:
The maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04488) is 1450 A.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
Prefabricated connections for Linergy
busbars

Masterpact NT06 to NT16,
vertically mounted D
D
3
8
1
4
7
5
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a
prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fixed or
drawout, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the
switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 3P Cat. no. 04475 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04476
NT08 3P Cat. no. 04475 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04476
NT10 3P Cat. no. 04475 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04476
NT12 3P Cat. no. 04475 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P Cat. no. 04476
NT16 3P Cat. no. 04489 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420 b
4P Cat. no. 04490
Withdrawable
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 3P Cat. no. 04477 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT08 3P Cat. no. 04477 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT10 3P Cat. no. 04477 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT12 3P Cat. no. 04477 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT16 3P Cat. no. 04491 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330 b
4P Cat. no. 04492
b connection not possible.
Example
For a drawout Masterpact NT16 , 4P, where the ambient temperature around the
switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31:
The maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04492) is 1380 A.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
Prefabricated connections for Linergy
busbars

Compact NS630b to NS1600,
horizontally mounted, fixed D
D
3
8
1
4
6
6
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a
prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and
Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and
the IP value.
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b 3P Cat. no. 04473 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04474
NS800 3P Cat. no. 04473 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04474
NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04473 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04474
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
Prefabricated connections for Linergy
busbars
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Front or rear connection
Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Fixed, top or bottom connection D
D
3
8
1
7
9
3
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
vertical, fixed Masterpact NW08/NW32, front or rear connection, taking into account
the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
b connection not possible.

The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Front or rear connection
Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Fixed, top or bottom connection
D
D
3
8
1
7
9
2
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW12 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
NW16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
NW20 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950
NW25 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2450 2500
NW32 Size per phase 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 3200 3110 3200 3020 3200 2930 3110 2830 3020 2730 2930
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW10 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW12 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
NW16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
NW20 Size per phase 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950
NW25 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2450 2500
NW32 Size per phase 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 b
I (A) 3200 3110 3200 3020 3200 2930 3110 2830 3020 2730 2930
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/8 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Front or rear connection
Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Drawout, top or bottom
connection
D
D
3
8
1
4
7
0
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
vertical, drawout Masterpact NW08/NW32, front or rear connection, taking into
account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1200 1230 1160 1200
NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1200 1230 1160 1200
NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/9 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Front or rear connection
Masterpact NW08 to NW32
Drawout, top or bottom
connection
D
D
3
8
1
4
6
9
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW12 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 1180 1100 1140
NW16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
NW20 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830
NW25 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 2500 2380 2500 2310 2450 2240 2380 2170 2310 2100 2240
NW32 Size per phase 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 3140 2930 3070 2830 3000 2730 2930 2650 2830 2550 2730
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NW08 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW10 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW12 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 1180 1100 1140
NW16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
NW20 Size per phase 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830
NW25 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 2500 2380 2500 2310 2450 2240 2380 2170 2310 2100 2240
NW32 Size per phase 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 2b 100 x 10 b
I (A) 3140 2930 3070 2830 3000 2730 2930 2650 2830 2550 2730
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/10 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Masterpact circuit breakers
Fixed NT06 to NT16
Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Fixed D
D
3
8
1
4
6
7
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
vertical, fixed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature
around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NT12 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250
NT16
(1)
Size per phase 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
(1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NT12 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250
NT16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
G
A
C
D
B
E
F
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/11 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Masterpact circuit breakers
Fixed NT06 to NT16
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NT12 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230
NT16
(1)
Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
(1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Copper bars, 5 mm thick.
Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NT12 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230
NT16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/12 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Masterpact circuit breakers
Drawout NT06 to NT16
Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Drawout D
D
3
8
1
4
6
5
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient
temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
NT12 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NT16
(1)
Size per phase 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
(1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
NT12 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NT16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/13 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Masterpact circuit breakers
Drawout NT06 to NT16
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
NT12 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
NT16
(1)
Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
(1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
NT12 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
NT16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/14 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Compact circuit breakers
Fixed NS630b to NS1600
Compact NS630b to NS1600
Fixed D
D
3
8
1
4
6
4
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
vertical, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200
NS1600
(1)
Size per phase 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
(1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200
NS1600 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/15 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Compact circuit breakers
Fixed NS630b to NS1600
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NS1600
(1)
Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
(1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NS1600 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/16 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Compact circuit breakers
Withdrawable NS630b to NS1600
Compact NS630b to NS1600
Withdrawable D
D
3
8
1
4
6
5
Connection.
Horizontal link.
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NS1600
(1)
Size per phase 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
(1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NS1600 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/17 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Compact circuit breakers
Withdrawable NS630b to NS1600
Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
NS1600
(1)
Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
(1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
NS1600 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/18 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Compact circuit breakers
Horizontal, fixed NS630b to NS1600
Compact NS630b to NS1600
Horizontal, fixed D
D
3
8
1
4
6
6
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
NS630b Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 b 3b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1170 1250 1090 1170 1000
NS1600 Size per phase 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 b 4b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1600 1510 1560 1470 1510 1420 1470 1360 1420 1360
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NS1250 Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 b 2b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1170 1250 1090 1170 1090
NS1600 Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 b 2b 50 x 10 b
I (A) 1600 1510 1560 1470 1510 1420 1470 1360 1420 1360
b connection not possible.
The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42040.fm/19 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
between a device and busbars
Compact circuit breakers
Horizontal, fixed NS630b to NS1600
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42060.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections with
flexible bars
Device connections

Flexible copper bars with an
insulating sheath
Switchboards that comply with standard IEC 60439-1
It is imperative to use the values indicated below that have been validated for the
installation of devices in Prisma Plus switchboards.
The parameters determining the size of flexible bars are:
b the environment in which the devices are installed:
v position in the enclosure
v dimensions of other conductors in the circuit
v ambient temperature around the switchboard
b the characteristics of the connected devices:
v device heat losses
v the type of installation (horizontal or vertical)
v the type of device (fixed or withdrawable).
Only the equipment manufacturer with in-depth knowledge on:
b the characteristics of the installed devices
b the configuration of the installation in the enclosure
can provide the correct sizes of flexible bars for a given permissible current.
Insulated, flexible bars make for easy, fast and flexible implementation up to 630 A,
but higher ratings require sizes that cancel these advantages.
For high Isc values, it is advised to use rigid bars which require fewer supports.
Better than cables, insulated flexible bars offer:
b better insulation temperature withstand (125C for bars, 105C for cables) and a
larger exchange surface for an equivalent size, i.e. a smaller size for a given current
b greater rigidity offering better electrodynamic characteristics for short-circuit
currents
b no intermediate parts (lugs) for a direct connection between the device and the
busbars
b fast implementation of prefabricated connections already cut to length, formed and
drilled.
Technical characteristics
b thickness of the insulation: variable depending on the bar size, 2 mm on average
b rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 12 kV
b maximum withstand temperature of insulating material = 125C.
Connection
In all cubicles with IP y 55
b the switchboard internal temperature is 60C
b the withstand temperature of the insulating material is 125C.
If the withstand temperature of the insulation is only 105C, use the next largest
flexible bar.
The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices.
Connection of devices and distribution blocks to busbars
Device INS125 INS160 INS250 INS320
INS400
INS500
INS630
NS100
(1)
NS160
(1)
S (mm) 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 3 32 x 5 32 x 6 20 x 2 20 x 3
Device NS250
(1)
NS400
(1)
NS630 INF250
ISFT250
INF400
ISFT400
INF630
ISFT630
S (mm) 20 x 3 32 x 5 32 x 8 24 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 8
(1) The values for circuit breakers apply to contactors with the same ratings.
To connect a Compact NS250 to Powerclip busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm flexible bar
(04746).
Device Multiclip distribution
block (200 A)
Polypact distribution
block (3P)
Polypact distribution
block (4P)
S (mm) 20 x 3 32 x 6 32 x 5
Disconnectors, terminal blocks, connections, busbars to
busbars
I max. (60 C) 200 A 250 A 400 A 400 A 480 A 520 A 580 A 660 A
S (mm) 20 x 2 20 x 3 24 x 5 24 x 5 24 x 6 32 x 5 32 x 6 32 x 8
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42060.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections with
flexible bars
Compact circuit breakers
NS100 to NS630
Compact NS100 to NS250
Insulated flexible copper bars
Devices Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 55
NS100
TMD-TMG
Size per phase 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2
I (A) 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 85
NS125
TMD-TMG
Size per phase 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2
I (A) 125 122 119 116 113 100
NS160
(1)
TMD-TMG
Size per phase 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3
I (A) 160 156 152 147 144 140
NS250
(1)
TMD-TMG
Size per phase 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3
I (A) 250 244 238 231 225 198
NS100
STR
Size per phase 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2
I (A) 100 100 100 100 100 100
NS160
STR
Size per phase 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3
I (A) 160 160 160 160 160 160
NS250
(2)
STR
Size per phase 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3
I (A) 250 250 237.5 237.5 225 225
(1) For a withdrawable NS160 or NS250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulation-monitoring module,
multiply the In values by 0.9.
(2) For a withdrawable NS250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulation-monitoring module, multiply
the In values by 0.86.
Compact NS400 to NS630
Insulated flexible copper bars
Permissible current (A)
Devices Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 55
NS400N/H/L
fixed
Size per phase 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5
I (A) 400 400 400 390 380 370
NS400N/H/L
with Vigi
Size per phase 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5
I (A) 400 390 380 370 360 350
NS400N/H/L
withdrawable
Size per phase 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5
I (A) 400 390 380 370 360 350
NS630N/H/L
fixed
Size per phase 32 x 6 32 x 6 32 x 6 32 x 6 32 x 6 32 x 6
I (A) 630 615 600 585 570 550
NS630N/H/L
Vigi or withdrawable
Size per phase 32 x 8 32 x 8 32 x 8 32 x 8 32 x 8 32 x 8
I (A) 570 550 535 520 505 490
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42070.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics Designing connections with
cables
Cables
Practical guidelines
Schneider Electric provides cabling recommendations according to the rating of the
circuit breaker.
The size of cables must be selected according to:
b the level of current
b the ambient temperature around the conductors
b the degree of protection for the switchboard.
The tables below take into account the installation conditions for each type of device
(permissible temperature at connection terminals, etc.).
They follow the temperature derating values for installed devices in all cubicles with
cover panels rated IP y 55.
b switchboard internal temperature 60C
b connections using copper cables.
For System G, the volumes, ratings and connection lengths are low.
Select the values in the "Cables tied together" column, according to the IP.
Connection of circuit breakers
Size of
cables
(mm)
Permissible current (A)
Cables tied individually Cable tied together
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1.5 16 14 14 12
2.5 25 25 22 20
4 32 29 28 24
6 40 39 36 33
10 63 55 55 50
16 90 77 80 70
25 110 100 100 93
35 135 125 125 120
50 180 150
70 230 190
95 275 230
Connection of other devices
Size of
cables
(mm)
Permissible current (A)
Cables tied individually Cable tied together
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1.5 13 12 12 10
2.5 23 21 20 19
4 28 26 25 22
6 36 35 32 30
10 55 50 50 46
16 80 70 72 63
25 100 90 90 84
35 120 115 110 103
50 165 135
70 210 176
95 250 210
Connection of NS100 to 630 A
Device NS100 NS160 NS250
Size (mm) 25 50 95
Note: .Schneider Electric recommends connecting NS400/630 circuit breakers with insulated
flexible bars or rigid bars.
see page 100E42060.fm/2.
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42070.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing connections with
cables
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42080.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing the PE
protective conductor
Power circuit

Size of PE protective conductor
Practical guidelines
The conductor must be sufficiently sized and securely installed in the switchboard to
accept the thermal and electrodynamic stresses of the fault current.
It must be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the switchboard.
It must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site.
Optimised calculation method
Use the calculation equation indicated in standard IEC 60439-1.
b SPE : cross-sectional area of PE in mm
2
b I : value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60% of the value of the phase-to-
phase fault current (IEC 60439-1 8.2.4.2)
b t : time the fault current flows in seconds
b k : coefficient that depends on the type of metal, k = 143 for a copper conductor
with PVC insulation.
Simplified method (based on the equation above)
Use the table below to determine the size of the PE conductor as a function of the
device Isc.
D
D
3
8
1
4
7
1
Size of PE conductor All Schneider Electric devices
Isc y 40 kA 1 bar, 25 x 5 mm Linergy 630
Isc y 65 kA 1 bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy 630
Isc > 65 kA 1 bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy 800
Schneider Electric prefabricated solution
For all Schneider Electric devices, use the PE set (07428) for an Isc up to 85 kA.
S
PE
I
2
t
k
---------- =
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42080.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing the PE
protective conductor
Power circuit
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42090.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing the PEN conductor
Power circuit

Size of PEN protective conductor
Practical guidelines
The size of the PEN is determined in the same manner as a neutral conductor, i.e.:
b for copper single-phase circuits or sized y 16mm, it must be the same size as the
phase conductors
b for copper three-phase circuits sized > 16 mm, it can be:
v the same size as the phase conductors
v smaller on the condition that:
- the current likely to flow in the neutral during normal operation is less than the
permissible current for the conductor
- the power rating of single-phase loads does not exceed 10% of the total rating.
The conductor must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on
site, as well as checks on the tightness of connections.
Implementing the PEN protective
conductor
Practical guidelines
According to standard IEC 60439-1, the practical guidelines for implementing the
PEN are the following:
b at the entry to the assembly, the PEN connection must be next to the phase
connections
b within the assembly, the PEN does not need to be insulated from the exposed
conductive parts (except on sites where there is a risk of fire or explosion)
b the size of the conductor must be at least equal to that of the neutral
b the size must remain constant throughout the main busbars
b the change from a TNC to a TNS system must take place at a single point in the
switchboard, via a marked neutral-disconnection bar that is accessible and can be
dismantled to facilitate the impedance measurement of the fault loop
b after the TNS creation point, it is forbidden to recreate a TNC system.
The PE and the neutral must meet their specific requirements.
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
5
Linergy PEN kit
see page 400E22360.fm/2.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E42090.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Electrical characteristics
Designing the PEN conductor
Power circuit
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Degree of protection
General

Standard IEC 60364-5-51 listed and codified a large number of external
influences to which electrical installations can be subjected, including the
presence of water, solid objects, shocks, vibrations, corrosive substances,
etc.
Degree of protection IP
Standard IEC 60529 (IP code, February 2001) indicates the degrees of protection
provided by an enclosure for electrical devices against access to hazardous parts,
against penetration of solid foreign objects and against penetration of water.
These standards do not apply for the protection against the risks of explosion or
conditions such a humidity, corrosive vapour, fungus or vermin.
The IP code is made up of two characteristic numerals and can include an additional
letter when the actual protection for persons against access to the hazardous parts
is better than that indicated by the first numeral.
The first numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of solid
foreign objects and the protection of persons.
The second numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of
water with harmful effects.
1
st
numeral 2
nd
numeral
Protection of persons
Protection against ingress of solid
objects
Protection against ingress of water
1
Protected against
access with back of
hand
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
9 Protected against
solid foreign objects
larger than 50 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
9
1
Protected against
vertically falling water
drops (condensation)
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
6
2
Protected against
access with a finger
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
0 Protected against
solid foreign objects
larger than 12.5 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
3
2
Protected against
vertically falling water
drops when enclosure
tilted up to 15
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
7
3
Protected against
access with a tool
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
1 Protected against
solid foreign objects
larger than 2.5 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
1
3
Protected against
spraying water up to
60from vertical
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
8
4
Protected against
access with a wire
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
2 Protected against
solid foreign objects
larger than 1 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
2
4
Protected against
splashing water from
all directions
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
9
5
Protected against
access with a wire
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
2 Protected against dust
(dust protected)
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
4
5
Protected against
water jets from all
directions
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
0
6
Protected against
access with a wire
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
2 Dust tight
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
5
6
Protected against
powerful water jets
from all directions
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
1
7
Protected against the
effects of temporary
immersion in water
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
2
8
Protected against the
effects of continuous
immersion in water
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
3
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
Degree of protection
General

Additional letter (optional)
Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts.
Designation Protection
A Protected against access with back of hand
B Protected against access with a finger
C Protected against access with a tool
D Protected against access with a wire
The additional letter is used only if the actual protection of persons is higher than that
indicated by the first characteristic numeral of the IP code.
If only the protection of persons is of interest, the two characteristic numerals are
replaced by "X", e.g. IPxxB.
Example
Protected against solid foreign objects
larger than 2.5 mm
No protection
Protected against access with
a tool 1 mm in diameter
Remarks on the degree of
protection IP
b the degree of protection IP must always be read and understood numeral by
numeral and not as a whole.
For example, an IP31 wall-mount enclosure is suitable for an environment that
requires a minimum degree of protection IP21. But an IP30 wall-mount enclosure is
not suitable.
b the degrees of protection indicated in this catalogue are valid for the enclosures as
presented. However, the indicated degree of protection is guaranteed only when the
installation and device mounting are carried out in accordance with professional
standards.
Degree of protection against
mechanical impacts IK
Standard IEC 62262 defines an IK code characterising the capacity of products to
resist mechanical impacts from all sides.
IK code Impact energy (joules)
01 0.14
02 0.2
03 0.35
04 0.5
05 0.7
06 1
07 2
08 5
09 10
10 20
Recommendation
In terms of the risks of impacts, selection of the IK code can be summed up as
indicated below.
Site Recommended IK
No risk of major impact Technical rooms 07
Significant risk of impact that
can damage devices
Hallways 08 (switchboard with door)
Maximum risk of impact that can
damage the switchboard
Workshops 10
IP30D
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43010.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures according
to the premises

The IP and IK degrees of protection provided by an enclosure must be specified as
a function of the various external influences defined by standard IEC 30364-5-51, in
particular:
b presence of foreign solid bodies (code AE)
b presence of water (code AD)
b mechanical stress (code not specified)
b capability of persons (code BA)
b ....
Prisma Plus switchboards are designed for indoor installation.
Unless the rules, standards and regulations of a specific country stipulate otherwise,
Schneider Electric recommends the following IP and IK values based on French
guide UTE C 15-103 (November 1997).
Using the table
1 Opposite the relevant premises, read the recommended IP and IK values.
2 The b symbol indicates the enclosure or cubicle satisfying the criteria of the UTE
guide.
Any enclosure or cubicle with a higher degree of protection can also be used.
3 If several degrees of protection are possible (refer to the standard for more details)
and the v and b symbols are indicated (e.g. 24
v
/25
b
), enclosures that correspond
to the higher degree of protection (b) are suitable for the lower degree of
protection (v).
Example:
Selection of an enclosure for a laundry room.
Minimum degree of protection: IP23/IK02
A wall-mount enclosure with a door (plain or transparent), a canopy and a gasket
offer IP43/IK08 degrees of protection and are therefore suitable for this application.
Type of premises Enclosure or cubicle
Wall-mount
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
IP55
Floor-standing
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
Cubicle
with fixed frame with door + IP30
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Min. IP/IK
required
IP30/IK07 IP30/IK08 IP31/IK08 IP43/IK08 IP55/IK10
IP IK
Domestic or comparable premises or locations
Porch 24 07 b
Bathrooms (see washrooms)
Bicycles, motorcycles, tricycles, etc.
(premises for)
20 07 b
Water, sewer and heating
connections
23 02 b
Laundries 23 02 b
Cellars, garages, furnace rooms 20 02
v
/07
b
b
Bedrooms 20 02 b
Trash rooms 25 07 b
Halls in cellars 20 07 b
Courtyards 24
v
/25
b
02
v
/07
b
b
Kitchens 20 02 b
Shower rooms (see washrooms)
Indoor stairways and alleys 20 02
v
/07
b
b
Outdoor stairways and outdoor alleys
without roofs
24 07 b
Outdoor alleys with roofs 21 02 b
Attics (roof space) 20 02 b
Garden shelters 24
v
/25
b
02
v
/07
b
b
Latrines 20 02 b
Dustbin rooms 25 02
v
/07
b
b
Ironing room 21 02 b
Access ramps to garages 25 07 b
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43010.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures according
to the premises

Type of premises Enclosure or cubicle
Wall-mount
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
IP55
Floor-standing
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
Cubicle
with fixed frame with door + IP30
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Degr IP/IK min
requis
IP30/IK07 IP30/IK08 IP31/IK08 IP43/IK08 IP55/IK10
IP IK
Washrooms, rooms
containing a bathtub or
shower
volume 0 27 02
volume 1 24 02 b
volume 2 23 02 b
volume 3 21 02 b
Lounges, living rooms, etc 20 02 b
Drying rooms 21 02 b
Basements 21 02
v
/07
b
b
Covered terraces 21 02 b
WCs 21 02 b
Verandas 21 02 b
Crawl spaces
23 02
v
/07
b
b
Commercial premises and adjoining areas
Gunsmiths (storage area, workshop) 31
v
/33
b
08 b
Laundries (wash room) 24 07 b
Butchers shop 24 07 b
cold room
y -10 C
23 07 b
Bakers, cake shops (kitchens) 50 07 b
Coffee roasters 21 02 b
Coal, wood, oil 20 08 b
Delicatessen (production) 24 07 b
Sweets (production) 20 02 b
Shoe repair shops 20 02 b
Dairies 24 02 b
Hardware stores (storage areas for
chemicals and paint)
33 07 b
Wood workers 50 07 b
Art galleries 20 02
v
/07
b
b
Florists 24 07
Furriers 20 07 b
Fruit and vegetable merchants 24 07 b
Grain shops 50 07 b
Bookshops, stationers 20 02 b
Motorcycle and bicycle repairs and
accessories
20 08 b
Messenger services 20 08 b
Furniture shops (antiques, second-
hand)
20 07 b
Glass and mirror merchants
(workshop)
20 07 b
Wallpaper shop (storage area) 21 07 b
Cosmetics shop (storage area) 31 02 b
Chemists (storage area) 20 02 b
Photographers (dark room) 23 02 b
Plumbers (storage area) 20 07 b
Fishmongers 25 07 b
Dry cleaners 23 02 b
Hardware stores (without paint,
chemicals, etc.)
20 07 b
Locksmiths 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
Vintners, spirits (cellars and storage
area)
23 07 b
Interior decorator (carding) 50 07 b
Tailors, clothing retailers (storage
area)
20 02 b
Pet care 35 07 b
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43010.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures according
to the premises

Type of premises Enclosure or cubicle
Wall-mount
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
IP55
Floor-standing
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
Cubicle
with fixed frame with door + IP30
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Degr IP/IK min
requis
IP30/IK07 IP30/IK08 IP31/IK08 IP43/IK08 IP55/IK10
IP IK
Buildings open to the general public
L Lecture halls,
meeting rooms,
auditoriums,
halls used for
several purposes
halls
20 02
v
/07
b
b
stage areas 20 08 b
scenery storage
rooms
20 08 b
costume rooms
20 07 b
M Retail premises,
shopping malls
sales premises 20 08 b
areas for storage
and handling of
packing
20 08 b
N Restaurants and cafes 20 08 b
O Hotels and boarding houses 20 02 b
P Dance halls and gaming parlours 20 07 b
R Teaching
establishments,
holiday camps
classrooms 20 02 b
dormitories 20 08 b
S Libraries and documentation centres
20 02 b
T Exhibitions halls and rooms 21 02 b
areas for reception
of equipment
and merchandise
20 07 b
U Healthcare
establishments
bedrooms 20 02 b
incineration 21 07
v
/08
b
b
operating rooms
20 07 b
centralised
sterilisation
24 02
v
/07
b
b
pharmacies and labs
with more than 10 l of
inflammable liquids
21
v
/23
b
02
v
/07
b
v b
V Places of worship 20 02 b
W Administrative premises, banks 20 02 b
X Indoor sports
facilities
halls 21 07
v
/08
b
b
premises containing
refrigeration facilities
21 08 b
Y Museums 20 02 b
PA Open air facilities 25 08
v
/10
b
b
CTS Marquees and tents 44 08 b
SG Inflatable structures 44 08 b
PS Covered parking lots 21 08
v
/10
b
v b
Shared premises of
buildings open to the
general public
storage rooms
20 08 b
packing rooms 20 08 b
archive rooms 20 02 b
film and magnetic
media storage
20 02 b
linen rooms 21 02 b
laundry rooms
24 07 b
misc. shops 21 07
v
/08
b
b
kitchens (large)
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43010.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures according
to the premises

Type of premises Enclosure or cubicle
Wall-mount
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
IP55
Floor-standing
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
Cubicle
with fixed frame with door + IP30
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Degr IP/IK min
requis
IP30/IK07 IP30/IK08 IP31/IK08 IP43/IK08 IP55/IK10
IP IK
Technical premises
Battery rooms 23 02
v
/07
b
b
Lifts (machine rooms and pulley
rooms)
20 02
v
/08
b
v b
Electrical rooms 20 07 b
Control rooms 20 02 b
Workshops 21
v
/23
b
07
v
/08
b
v b
Laboratories 21
v
/23
b
02
v
/07
b
v b
Air conditioning washers 24 07 b
Garages (used exclusively
for parking vehicles)
of an area not exceeding 100 m
2
21 07 b
Machine rooms 31 07
v
/08
b
b
Water pressurisers 23 07
v
/08
b
Boiler houses and adjoining premises (power in excess of 70 kW)
Boiler rooms coal fuel 51
v
/61
b
07
v
/08
b
v
other fuel 21 07
v
/08
b
b
electrical 21 07
v
/08
b
b
Fuel
storage areas
coal 50
v
/60
b
08 v
oil 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
liquefied gas 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
Cinder tips 50
v
/60
b
08 v
Pump rooms 23 07
v
/08
b
b
Pressure reduction rooms (gas) 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
Steam or hot water facilities 23 07
v
/08
b
b
Expansion vessel rooms 21 02 b
Garages and car parks of an area exceeding 100 m
2
Parking lots 21 07
v
/10
b
v b
Carwash areas (inside premises) 25 07 b
Safety areas indoors 21 07 b
Lubrication areas 23 08 b
Battery recharging areas 23 07 b
Workshops 21 08 b
Public building (other than for the general public)
Offices 20 02 b
Libraries 20 02 b
Archives 20 02 b
Computer rooms 20 02 b
Design offices 20 02 b
Rooms containing reprographic
machines
20 02 b
Sorting rooms 20 07 b
Refectories in restaurants or
canteens
21 07 b
Large kitchens
Sports rooms 21 07
v
/08
b
b
Barracks 21 07 b
Meeting rooms 20 02 b
Waiting rooms, lounges, halls 20 02 b
Medical consulting rooms, not fitted
with specific equipment
20 02 b
Demonstration
and exhibition rooms
20 02
v
/07
b
b
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43010.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures according
to the premises

Type of premises Enclosure or cubicle
Wall-mount
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
IP55
Floor-standing
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
Cubicle
with fixed frame with door + IP30
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Degr IP/IK min
requis
IP30/IK07 IP30/IK08 IP31/IK08 IP43/IK08 IP55/IK10
IP IK
Farm premises or locations
Alcohol (storage) 23 07 b
Closed cattle sheds 35 07 b
Laundries 24 07 b
Wood storage rooms 30 10 b
Threshing floors 50 07 b
Distilling cellars 23 07 b
Vat rooms (wine) 23 07 b
Courtyards 35 07 b
Poultry barns 35 07 b
Stables 35 07 b
Fertiliser (storage) 50 07 b
Stables 35 07 b
Manure heaps 24 07 b
Haylofts 50 07 b
Haystacks, forage (storage) 50 07 b
Granaries, barns 50 07 b
Straw (storage) 50 07 b
Greenhouses 23 07 b
Grain silos 50 07 b
Milking rooms 35 07 b
Pig sties 35 07 b
Chicken houses 35 07 b
Miscellaneous installations
Fair facilities 33 08 b
Water treatment facilities 24
v
/25
b
07
v
/08
b
b
Thermodynamic installations, air-conditioned rooms and cold rooms
Height
above
ground
from 0 to 1.10 m 25 07 b
from 1.10 to 2 m 24 07 b
above 2 m under
evaporator or water
drain pipe
21 07 b
ceiling and up to 10
cm underneath
23 07 b
Temperature y -10 C 23 07 b
Compressor room 21 08 b
integral unit located
outside or on a terrace
34 08 b
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43010.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures according
to the premises

Type of premises Enclosure or cubicle
Wall-mount
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
IP55
Floor-standing
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
Cubicle
with fixed frame with door + IP30
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Degr IP/IK min
requis
IP30/IK07 IP30/IK08 IP31/IK08 IP43/IK08 IP55/IK10
IP IK
Industrial facilities
Slaughter houses 55 08 b
Batteries (manufacture) 33 07 b
Acid (manufacture and storage) 33 07 b
Alcohol (manufacture and storage) 33 07 b
Aluminium (manufacture and
storage)
51
v
/53
b
08 b
Livestock (raising, fattening and sale) 45 07 b
Asphalt and bitumen storage 53 07 b
Wool beating and carding 50 08 b
Industrial laundry 23
v
/24
b
07 v b
Wood (processing) 50 08 b
Meat packers 24
v
25
b
07 b
Bakeries 50 07 b
Breweries 24 07 b
Brickworks 53
v
/54
b
08 b
Rubber (production and processing) 54 07 b
Carbide (manufacture and storage) 51 07 b
Ammunition factories 53 08 b
Carton board (production) 33 07 b
Quarries 55 08 b
Celluloid (manufacture of objects) 30 08 b
Cellulose (manufacture) 34 08 b
Coal (depots) 53 08 b
Pork products 53
v
/25
b
07 b
Boiler-making works 30 08 b
Lime kilns 50 08 b
Rag (storage) 30 07 b
Chlorine (manufacture and storage) 33 07 b
Chrome-plating 33 07 b
Cement works 50 08 b
Coking plant 53 08 b
Adhesives (production) 33 07 b
Bottling lines 35 08 b
Liquid fuels (storage) 31
v
/33
b
08 v b
Fats (processing) 51 07 b
Leather (tanning and storage) 31 08 b
Copper (ore processing) 31 08 b
Paint stripping 54 08 b
Detergents (manufacture) 53 05 b
Distilleries 33 05 b
Electrolysis 33 08 b
Ink manufacturing 31 05 b
Fertilisers (manufacture and storage) 55 05 b
Explosives (manufacture and
storage)
55 08 b
Iron (production and processing) 51 08 b
Spinning mills 50 05 b
Furriers (beating process) 50 05 b
Cheese factories 25 05 b
Gas (production and storage) 31 08 b
tar (processing) 33 05 b
Seed production 50 05 b
Metal engraving 33 05 b
Oils (extraction) 31 05 b
Petroleum products (manufacture) 33
v
/34
b
08 v b
Printworks 20 08 b
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43010.fm/8 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures according
to the premises

Type of premises Enclosure or cubicle
Wall-mount
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
IP55
Floor-standing
enclosure
without door with door with door + canopy with door + canopy
+ gasket
Cubicle
with fixed frame with door + IP30
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Degr IP/IK min
requis
IP30/IK07 IP30/IK08 IP31/IK08 IP43/IK08 IP55/IK10
IP IK
Industrial establishments (continued)
Dairies 25 05 b
Public wash-houses 25 05 b
Liqueurs (production) 21 05 b
Halogenated liquids (use) 21 08 b
Inflammable products
(storage and workshops where they
are used)
21 08 b
Magnesium (production, storage and
use)
31 08 b
Machine rooms 20 08 b
Plastics (production) 51 08 b
Cabinet makers 50 08 b
Metals (processing) 31
v
/33
b
08 v b
Combustion engines (testing of) 30 08 b
Ammunition storage 33 08 b
Nickel (ore processing) 33 08 b
Household waste (processing) 53
v
/54
b
07 b
Paper (production) 33
v
/34
b
07 v b
Paper (storage) 31 07 b
Perfume (production and storage) 31 07 b
Pulp mill 34
v
/35
b
07 b
Paint (production and storage) 33 08 b
Plaster (processing and storage) 50 07 b
Gunpowder factory 55 08 b
Chemicals (production) 30
v
/50
b
08 v b
Oil refineries 34
v
/35
b
07 b
Salt preserve factories 33 07 b
Soap (production) 31 07 b
Saw mills 50 08 b
Metalwork shops 30 08 b
Grain or sugar silos 50 07 b
Silk and artificial hair factories 50 08 b
Sodium carbonate (processing and
storage)
33 07 b
Sulphur (processing) 51 07 b
Spirits (storage) 33 07 b
Sugar mills 55 07 b
Tanners 35 07 b
Dye works 35 07 b
Textile and fabric (production) 51 08 b
Varnish (production and application) 33 08 b
Glass works 33 08 b
Zinc works 31 08 b
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43010.fm/9 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures according
to the premises
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43020.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Enclosure characteristics
Properties of metal enclosures

Merlin Gerin enclosures comply with standard EN 50298 for empty enclosures.
The sheet metal used for Merlin Gerin enclosures receives an anti-corrosion epoxy
electrophoresis treatment and a coating of a thermosetting, polyester-resin-modified
epoxy powder for colour and appearance.
This two-coat system provides excellent finish and corrosion protection.
The characteristics of this coating are much better than those of traditional epoxy
powders:
b improved colour stability
b wider operating temperature range.
Mechanical properties of
enclosures
Static load on doors, wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures and cubicles
Cubicle 400 kg
Floor-standing enclosure 64 kg
Wall-mount enclosure 48 kg
Cubicle door 12 kg
Floor-standing enclosure door 4 kg
Wall-mount enclosure door 4 kg
Mechanical properties of powder
coated surfaces
Test conditions
Test piece made of 1 mm thick steel sheet, degreased, iron phosphated, final
rinsing with 100000 cm DI water, 15 microns of anti-corrosion
electrophoresis treatment and 35 microns of powder paint.
Adhesion (cross-hatch and pull-off) class 0 required (ISO 2409)
)
Impact strength
(1)
> 1 kg/50 cm (ISO 6272)
Mandrel bending test
(2)
< 10 mm (ISO 6860)
Persoz hardness 300 s (ISO 1522)
(1) No cracking of the paint film after dropping a weight of one kilogram on the test piece from a
height of 50 centimetres.
(2) Film cracks over a length of 10 millimetres maximum.
Artificial ageing test on powder
coating
Test conditions:
Two tests carried out on the same 1 mm thick steel sheet test piece.
b cyclical damp-heat test:
v as per standard IEC 68-2-30
- six 24-hour cycles at temperatures higher than 40C
b continuous resistance to neutral salt mist:
v the tests were carried out over a period of 400 hours, far more than the 48 hours
required by the standard for indoor installations
v as per standard ISO 7253
- 400 hours without blistering for normal surface on test piece
- 250 hours for a scratched surface.
Evaluation of corrosion as per ISO 4628:
b adhesion: class y 1
b blistering: degree 1 dim.1
b rusting: Ri 1
b cracking: class 1
b flaking imp. 1 dim. 1
propagation of corrosion under scratch with respect to the scratch axis: 3 mm max.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E43020.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Standards
Properties of metal enclosures

Chemical properties of powder
coating
Tests carried out at ambient temperature on phosphated test pieces coated
with a 150 to 200 micron film.
Test duration (months) 2 4 6 8 10 12
Acids Concentration
Acetic 20 %
Sulphuric 30 %
Nitric 30 %
Phosphoric 30 %
Hydrochloric 30 %
Lactic 10 %
Citric 10 %
Bases Soda 10 %
Ammonia 10 %
Water Distilled water
Seawater
Tap water
Diluted bleach
Solvents Petrol
High alcohols
Aliphatics
Aromatics
Ketones, esters
Tri-perchlorethylene
Film intact.
Film damaged (blisters, yellowing, loss of shine).
Characteristics
System G/P
07897411FR - REV. A0 - 1 Schneider Electric
YFJYVIIVGIT
Version 1 du 31/10/03
Prisma Plus
System G/P
Characteristics
Standards
Electrical characteristics
Thermal characteristics
100E45000.fm/2 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
General

A switchboard is designed for operation under normal ambient conditions.
Most devices do not operation correctly outside a temperature range of -10 and
+70C.
It is therefore important to maintain the switchboard internal temperature within this
temperature range by:
b correctly sizing the switchboard during design
b correcting the temperature using suitable means.
Management of the internal
temperature
Cooling
There are a number of way to dissipate heat from the switchboard.
The drawings below present the various means.
Convection Forced-air ventilation
D
D
3
8
1
4
8
4
D
D
3
8
1
4
8
3
D
D
3
8
1
4
8
2
D
D
3
8
1
4
8
1
IP > 31 IP y 31 IP y 54 IP y 54
Ensured naturally in Prisma Plus
enclosures
Using fans, it significantly increases the
thermal capacity of an enclosure.
Forced-air
ventilation with
air-air exchanger
Forced
convection and
cooling
D
D
3
8
1
9
2
0
D
D
3
8
1
9
2
1
IP > 31 IP > 31
On special request.
For these extreme cases, many installers prefer to set up the switchboards with other
electrotechnical and electronic devices in air-conditioned electrical rooms.
Heating
The means employed to raise the internal temperature in a switchboard is a resistor-
based heater, used to:
b avoid condensation by limiting variations in temperature
b ensure that the switchboard does not freeze.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/3 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
General

Calculation of the internal
temperature
Calculation of the temperature is the means to check that the enclosure can
evacuate the dissipated power of the installed devices.
Important note
Correct thermal management of the switchboard depends on compliance with
the installation requirements for the distribution system (power circuits).
Incorrect installation will have major consequences on the connected device, but
almost none on the internal temperature of the enclosure.
Once the circuit has been correctly sized, it is necessary to check whether the
assembly (devices + distribution system + cables) have a level of dissipated power
P(W) y the P(W) that the enclosure can handle.
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
1 Method defined by IEC 890 technical report
This IEC guide for switchboards proposes a calculation method to determine three
levels of internal temperature, depending on the dissipated power of the devices and
distribution blocks installed in the switchboard.
Users can consult this document when it is necessary to determine precisely the
internal temperature in view of optimising the switchboard.
On request, Schneider Electric can carry out a thermal study to check that the
installed assembly and the thermal capacity of the enclosure are compatible.
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
0 Comparative method
A number of qualified and tested configurations serve as the basis for indicating the
thermal capacity of Prisma Plus enclosures.
This is en empirical means to check whether the dissipated power of the desired
configuration is close to that of a tested configuration.
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
2
Method using charts taking into account enclosure characteristics
To speed up calculations, Schneider Electric produces charts based on the
company's experience and a number of assumptions on the installation.
They can be used sufficiently precisely to determine the variations in temperature
and the dissipated-power levels for the different types of wall-mount enclosures,
floor-standing enclosures and cubicles.
For details on the calculation of the dissipated power in the device zone, see
page 100E45000.fm/7.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/4 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Comparative method

Comparative method
You will have no problems with your switchboard if:
b the volume of the enclosure is greater than that of the tested enclosure with a
similar assembly
b the P(W) of the installed assembly is less than the P(W) of the tested configuration
in the same size enclosure.
For details on the calculation of the dissipated power in the device zone, see
page 100E45000.fm/7.
Pack enclosure, 3 rows, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35C
P(W) = 95 W
D
D
3
8
1
7
6
6

Wall-mount enclosure, 23 modules, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35C
P(W) = 170 W
D
D
3
8
1
7
8
6

Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/5 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Comparative method

Comparative method
You will have no problems with your switchboard if:
b the volume of the enclosure is greater than that of the tested enclosure with a
similar assembly
b the P(W) of the installed assembly is less than the P(W) of the tested configuration
in the same size enclosure.
For details on the calculation of the dissipated power in the device zone, see
page 100E45000.fm/7.
Wall-mount enclosure, 23 modules, plain door, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35C
P(W) = 200 W
D
D
3
8
2
4
1
8

Floor-standing enclosure, 33 modules, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35C
P(W) = 270 W
D
D
3
8
2
4
1
9

Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/6 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Comparative method

Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm
wide, 400 mm deep, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7 and 0.8
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35C
Cubicle : P(W) of device zone = 580 W
Cubicle : P(W) of device zone = 180 W
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
0
Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm
wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35C
Cubicle : P(W) of device zone = 880 W
Cubicle : P(W) of device zone = 330 W
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
0
1
2
1
2
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/7 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Example

Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm
wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35C
Cubicle : P(W) of device zone = 580 W
Cubicle : P(W) of device zone = 180 W
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
1
Application of the diversity factor
In the configuration below, the standardised diversity factor (K div.) for a total of 14
outgoing circuits is 0.6, i.e. 60 % of In for each outgoing circuit.
Merlin Gerin prefers a more conservative approach and therefore divides the
installation into four main circuits:
b NS250
b 200 A Multiclip: 8 outgoers V K div. = 0.7
b Polypact: 4 outgoers V K div. = 0.8
b NS400.
1 NS250 + 1 Multiclip 200 A + 1 Polypact + 1 NS400 V 4 outgoers, i.e. a diversity
factor of 0.8.
As a result, the current flowing in each circuit is at least 70% and up to 80% of In.
Calculation of the power dissipated by
devices in the incoming cubicle
Dissipated power of the NT1600 indicated by the manufacturer: 460 W.
The power dissipated by the connections is approximately 30% of the device P(W):
0.3 x 460 = 138 W.
Power of circuit breaker + connections = 460 + 138 = 598 W at 1600 A.
For I (the Watts are proportional to the square of the current) at 1410 A (In of the
incoming device):

Dissipated power of the NS250 indicated by the manufacturer: 42 W.
Dissipated power of the connections: 0.3 x 42 = 12.6 W.
Power of circuit breaker + connections = 42 +12.6 = 54.6 W at 250 A.
For 200 A (the tested value):
Dissipated power of the Polypact and its four NS250 circuit breakers:

Sum of the dissipated power in the incoming cubicle:
1
2
598
1600
2
--------------- 1410
2
405 W
=
54 6 ,
250
2
------------ 200
2
35 W =
4 x 35 W (same calculation as above) = 140 W
P(W) = 405 + 35 +140 = 580 W
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/8 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Example

Once the dissipated power of the devices has been determined and the enclosure
with its IP selected, transfer the results (sum of the dissipated power and width of the
device zone) to the chart corresponding to the enclosure IP.
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
3
Draw a line parallel to the others on the chart and read the corresponding difference
in temperature.
For the given example, the heat rise is 22C at mid-height in the enclosure.
The internal temperature= external temperature + heat rise
= 35C + 22C = 57C
57C < 60C stipulated by the standard, i.e. the result is acceptable for an IP3
cubicle.
This gives roughly:
Internal temperature = 60C at mid-height in the enclosure for a low IP value.
Internal temperature = 70C at mid-height in the enclosure for a high IP value.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/9 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Charts

Quick calculation charts
for internal temperatures
for System P
For the enclosures not mentioned on the previous
pages, use the equation:
where:
T: internal temperature - external temperature
P: power dissipated by the devices, connections and
busbars (in Watts)
S: total free surface area of the enclosure
(expressed in m
2
)
K: thermal-conduction coefficient of the material
(W/m
2
C)
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the
manufacturer. Add approximately 30% to account for the
connections and the busbars.
Test conditions: the cubicle is on the floor against a wall, the indicated internal heat
rise is that measured at mid-height in the enclosure.
IP3X cubicle, 400 mm deep IP3X cubicle, 600 mm deep

D
D
3
8
2
4
2
4
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
5
IP3X cubicle, 800 mm deep IP3X cubicle, 1000 mm deep
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
6
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
7
IP55 cubicle, 400 mm deep IP55 cubicle, 600 mm deep
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
8
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
9
IP55 cubicle, 800 mm deep IP55 cubicle, 1000 mm deep
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
0
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
1
T
P
S K
-------------- =
K = 5.5 W/m
2
C for painted sheet metal.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/10 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Charts

Quick calculation charts for
internal temperatures for System
G
The indicated internal heat rise is that measured at mid-
height in the enclosure.
IP3X wall-mount enclosure
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
2 Test conditions:
600 mm wide enclosure
mounted directly on wall
without fixing lugs.
IP43 wall-mount enclosure
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
3
Test conditions:
600 mm wide enclosure
mounted directly on wall
without fixing lugs.
IP3X floor-standing enclosure
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
4
Test conditions:
600 mm wide enclosure
on floor against a wall.
IP43 floor-standing enclosure
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
5
Test conditions:
Mounted on wall with
fixing lugs or on
mounting uprights.
IP55 wall-mount and floor-standing enclosures
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
6
Test conditions:
600 mm wide enclosure
mounted directly on wall
without fixing lugs or
mounting uprights.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/11 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Ventilation

Switchboard ventilation
The air enters the lower section via the fans and exits the upper section:
b through a ventilated roof
b or through a ventilation opening.
The air throughput of the fans is determined by the equation:
The chart below can be used to determine the necessary throughput, based on the
dissipated power, the difference in temperature (internal - external) and the exposed
surface area of the enclosure.
Example
Consider an IP3X cubicle, 650 mm wide and 400 mm deep, containing components
(devices, connections, busbars, etc.) dissipating 1000 W.
The ambient temperature around the cubicle is 50C.
Given that the average temperature at mid-height should not exceed 60C, the
difference in temperature T is equal to 60 - 50 = 10C.
The exposed surface of the cubicle (non adjacent to a wall or other cubicle)
is 4.46 m.
(back = 1.3 m, front = 1.3 m, roof = 0.26 m, side panels = 1.6 m).
What is the necessary throughput of the ventilation system?
The throughput can be calculated as:
D = 234 m
3
/h.
In the range of Prisma Plus accessories, select a system with a throughput
of 300 m
3
/h.
D
D
3
8
1
3
9
1
Calculation data
P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts)
P
r
: power of the heating resistor (in Watts)
T
m
: maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C)
T
i
: average internal temperature (in C)
T
e
: average external temperature (in C)
T
m
= T
m
T
e
T = T
i
T
e
S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m
2
)
K : thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m
2
C)
K = 5.5 W/m
2
C for painted sheet metal
D: ventilation throughput (in m
3
/h)
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer.
Add approximately 30% to account for the connections and the busbars.
D 3 1
P
T
------- KS


=
D 3 1
1000
10
------------- 5 5 4 46


=
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/12 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Heating

Switchboard heating
The heating resistor, placed in the bottom of the switchboard, maintains the internal
temperature 10C higher than the external temperature. When the switchboard is not
in operation, the heater compensates the dissipated power normally emitted by the
switchboard.
The power of the heating resistor is calculated:
b using the equation: Pr = (T x S x K) - P
b or using the charts below, based on the exposed surface area of the enclosure and
the desired difference in temperature.
Chart to determine the heating resistor for small wall-mount enclosures
(exposed surfaces y 1 m
2
)
D
D
3
8
1
7
8
8
Chart to determine the heating resistor for all types of enclosures and cubicles
D
D
3
8
1
7
8
9
Calculation data
P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts)
P
r
: power of the heating resistor (in Watts)
T
m
: maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C)
T
i
: average internal temperature (in C)
T
e
: average external temperature (in C)
T
m
= T
m
T
e
T = T
i
T
e
S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m
2
)
K : thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m
2
C)
K = 5.5 W/m
2
C for painted sheet metal
D: ventilation throughput (in m
3
/h)
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer.
Add approximately 30% to account for the connections and the busbars.
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/13 Version 1 - 31/10/03
Thermal characteristics
Thermal management
of switchboards
Heating
Characteristics
System G/P
100E45000.fm/14 Version 1 - 31/10/03

You might also like